Home

GT16 User`s Manual (Basic Utility)

1. c00e 2 47 Display operation of brightness contrast 2 47 Functions of the brightness contrast 2 47 C CISA EEE A E AE thea boenceeiuiatenaaeene 2 8 Display operation of Clean cccccceeeeeeeeeees 2 8 Operation Of CIEAN ccccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 9 Cleaning of display SECTION cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 8 Communication Detail Setting cee 3 13 Communication detail setting display OD Gl A OM ictsstcceuaceusmnasiansrabnsesauncantendeutuehecmbsavates 3 13 Communication detail setting functions 3 13 Display contents of communication detail SOUN scans susensuelsnanectancs E 3 16 Communication interface setting cccceeceees 3 1 Communication Setting cccceccceeeceeeeeeeaeeenes 3 1 Communication setting contents 0 06 3 3 Communication setting display operation 3 2 Communication setting functions 008 3 1 Communication setting operation 0 3 7 Key word registration deletion and protection delete a5 aunroauisastenibacesvaut edsa sips ancnemnioumeaaaenemuesiens 3 17 D 1 ed GO OM airs carac casas E E EE 6 1 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location ccccseceseeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 6 4 Display lE aceicoseceautoiccecceuecsiensacteecyercenencuteeseteunede OS version confirmation Display SettinGS cc
2. APPENDICES AA Refers to information o required for operation HINT Refers to information useful for operation Show the items including detailed explanation Hardware GT16 User s Manual Hardware Basic Utility GT16 User s Manual Basic Utility Shows the operation steps Operate the steps from the step 1 Shows the setting item displayed on the software screen or the GOT screen Refers to a button displayed on the computer screen or the GOT screen or a key of the computer keyboard The above is different from the actual page as it is provided for explanation only PACKING LIST After unpacking confirm that the following parts are included GT1695M X Installation fitting 8 GT1685M S GT1675M S GT16 75M V GT1675 VN GT1672 VN GT1665M S GT1665M V GT1662 VN Installation fitting 4 GOT 1 GT1655 V Installation fitting 4 GT16 General Description 1 1 UTILITY FUNCTION Utility is a function which carries out connection of GOT and controller screen display and operation method settings program data control and self check etc Refer to the following for the utility function list 1 2 Utility Function List 1 1 Utility Execution For utility execution utility has to be displayed by installing BootOS and standard monitor OS in the C drive built in flash memory There are following three types
3. Disabled Enabled For using the external authentication ID touch the check box Use ext auth ID and switch the setting __ The external authentication ID is not used The external authentication ID is used Touch Ext auth ID to display the external authentication ID input dialog box and enter the external recognition ID When the input is completed touch the Enter key When the authentication method is set to Fingerprint auth or External auth general the external authentication ID can be input with the external authentication device b The operator information editing process ig completed If vou close the screen before pressing OE button the changed data will be discarded Do you want to proceed Edit operation Edit the operator information stored in the GOT 2009 08 25 1 2009 08 25 2 2009 08 25 2009 08 25 Jperator_ information edit OperatorName OPO005 Operator ID 1 Level Password Make a permanent password V Use ext auth ID Ext auth ID Continued to next page 3 Touch the OK button after all items are input and then the dialog box shown left is displayed and the input operator information is added 4 Touch the Cancel button or the XI button and then the dialog box shown left is displayed 7 Select the operator information to be edited with touching the operator information 2 Touch the E
4. eee Exec camer ee ee ee ee ee File conversion from GIL to GWY LOGOO0001_O002 G1L LOGOOO000 _O002 CSY Source file Change to Change file format files are selected 512 2KB in_total Number of selectable files in this folder 5 files Example Dialog box if the 61L gt CSV button is touched Vv Continued to next page Touch the check box of G1L file which is to be converted to CSV file or Unicode text file to select the file Touch the following button in accordance with destination file type e CSV file G1L CSV button e Unicode text file G1L TXT button Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive If touch the Exec button the dialog box shown left is displayed Touch the OK button While executing Processing appears on the screen message 6 2 Various Data Control i l ag _ Z O lt a lt m 6 42 This folder already contains the file LOGOO00 71 0002 CSV Do you want to replace the existing file Modified 09 02 09 18 4 with this one Modified 07 30 09 13 42 Process completed 6 2 Various Data Control When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the conversion If touch the OK button overwrites the file If touch Cancel button
5. J 10 23 09 09 55 Switch appl ications i l 10 23 09 09 52 Switch appl ications 10 23 09 09 52 B 1 Touch switch Application switching 10 23 09 09 51 Screen switching Base 10 23 09 09 51 Switch appl ications 10 23 09 09 49 Switch appl icep 10 23 09 09 28 Switch applice z T 10 23 09 09 25 Switch appl ice 2010 23 10 23 09 09 25 B 1 Touch switch 10 23 09 09 22 B 1 Numerical Inpe oi i 10 23 09 09 16 Screen switchi 10 23 09 09 16 Switch appl ice 10 23 09 08 30 Switch appl ice 10 23 09 08 30 B 1 Touch switch 10 23 09 08 29 Screen switchi 10 23 09 08 28 Switch appl ice 10 23 09 07 21 Switch appl ice 10 23 09 07 21 B 1 Touch switch 10 23 09 06 58 Screen switchi 10 23 09 06 58 Station No sv 10 23 09 06 58 Display system language 10 23 09 06 58 Switch applications 10 23 09 06 56 Switch applications 10 23 09 05 53 Screen switching Base 10 23 09 05 53 Station No switching Common 10 23 09 05 53 Display system language 10 23 09 05 53 Switch applications Program Data Control Operation Log Information Operation Log Data List File Name A Project1 OPELOG OPELOG_20101023_0001 610 A D 2010 Date Time Screen No Operation Change To F ai J 10 23 09 09 55 Switch applications Operation Log ES 10 23 09 09 52 Switch applications ili 10 23 09 09 52 B 1 Touch switch Application switching 10 23 09 09 51 S
6. 20ms 10ms Oms 10ms 20ms 40ms 80ms 120ms Standard 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation 2 49 Key sensitivity setting APPENDICES POINT Operation settings by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 Set buzzer volume and window move buzzer volume by GOT setup in Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 or in System Environment of GT Designerz2 When change a part of the setting change the setting by the GOT display setting after downloading the project data lt gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 9 GOT Display and Operation Setting GT Designer2 Version L Screen Design Manual 3 8 Setting of the GOT display and operation GOT setup 2 3 2 Display operation of operation setting Main menu GOT setup C gt gt 1 3 Utility Display GOT setup Operation GOT setup Operation Buzzer volume OFF Window move buzzer OFF Security setting Setting Utility call key Setting Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 Touch an item to Key reaction speed Standard 0 ms change settings Touch panel calibration Setting Touch detection mode Avoid input error USB mouse keyboar d Setting SoftGOT GOT link Setting VNC server func setting Setting K Cancel 2 50 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation 2 3 3 Setting operation of operation E Buzzer volume window move buzzer Touch detectio
7. 6 1 4 Display file The display screen and storage destination for each type of data are shown below The file name and contents of each data can be displayed with property display of the utility tees ee eran Storage destination aoe Drive name folder name A drive B drive C drive E drive G1BOOT 2 Standard monitor OS system screen data Standard monitor OS system screen management information file Standard monitor OS monitor function 6 X 8 dot font ASCII characters Standard monitor OS 24 dot numerical HQ font OS information A drive B drive C drive 32 dot numerical HQ font screen E drive TrueType numerical font AG1SYS 12 dot standard font 16 dot standard font Extended function OS BootOS Option OS Communication driver Project information A drive B drive C drive E drive Advanced alarm log file CSV file Advanced alarm log file TXT file Alana information Advanced alarm log file binary file 2 one Alarm log file CSV file Hard copy file BMP file Hard copy Hard copy file JPG file 5 monnguenaciean A ipe file CSV file Serge hee ne l A drive B drive E drive o Ta Advanced recipe Resource data Advanced recipe file TXT file 5 With GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 any folder name information screen i fil ified Advanced recipe file binary file ORA Nae ea De SRSA Operation log file CSV file a Operation log Operation log file TXT file information screen Operation log fil
8. At this time match the version of the standard monitor OS in the GOT with the version of the standard monitor OS with which the project data was created When OS and project data are in the CF card or USB memory when using GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 For S MODE switch pressing installation after the OS installation is complete the project data is downloaded When installing with the utility install the OS and download the project data from their respective operation screens Installation cannot be interrupted Do not perform any of the following during a BootOS or standard monitor OS installation Failure to do so may result in installation failure causing the GOT malfunction e Powering off the GOT e Pressing the reset button of the GOT e Turning off the CF card access switch of the GOT e Removing the CF card or USB memory If the installation failure and the GOT malfunction occur take the following action e If BootOS installation failed Install CoreOS 7 5 1 Installing the CoreOS f standard monitor OS installation failed Install BootOS 7 3 1 Installing when starting the GOT 7 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card or USB Memory 7 3 1 Installing when starting the GOT zZ O The displayed message is different depending on the installation condition of standard monitor OS When the screen O requesting operation is displayed operate the GOT according to the instructions
9. ChNo USB 1 TAOLA C ST Host PC driver corresponding to the channel number ChNo RS422 485 ChNo Ethernet L0 Mere None assigned by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 is Extend I F Setting i r 7 displayed in the driver display BOX Extend F 1 Extend F 2 oie JBUSL E Communication detail setting switching operation Ifthe driver display BOX is touched on the communication setting screen or Ethernet I F assign screen the screen switches to the detailed setting screen of the related controller device 5 3 2 Communication Detail Setting E 5V power supply setting operation When connecting a controller to the RS 232 interface whether to supply 5VDC power or not to the controller through 9 pins can be selected Thus it is not necessary to connect an external power supply When setting the RS 232 interface to 9 Host PC the 5V supply is automatically changed to NO 1 Touch 5V supply Communication setting Standard I F Setting Assign Ethernet I F Channel Dr iver assign RS232 Cho USB oo ChNo Ethernet 0 Extend F Setting Extend F 1 Extend F 2 Ist eo ee ChNo None 2 Q BUS Q None 2nd ChNo None None 0 None Q None 3rd a None None 0 None Q None Definition of ChNo O None 5 8 External device 0ther connection 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection OK Cancel 3 1 Communication Setti
10. FLoopBK Sta RLoopBkK Sta Loop Back lt D Link Info gt lt Transient Status gt _lransmission Err U Fruod 2 3 4 5 6 5 8 g 10 11 12 Is 14 15 16 8 7 8 5 1 Diagnostic Functions O1 i N 5 21 a LED status Displays the MELSECNET H communication unit operation status Data link normal Data link error Operating other than as control MNG Green Operating as control station station i Operating other than as sub control S MNG Green Operating as sub control station estan D LINK Data link being executed Data link stopped 1 T PASS Baton pass being executed Baton pass not executed Duplicate station number and control M S E Green Normal station error GOT R W Accessed from GOT Not accessed from GOT CRC Red Code check error Normal OVER Red Data entry delay error Normal AB IF Red All reception data 1 Normal TIME Red Time limit exceeded Normal 2 DATA Reception data error Normal UNDER Red Send data error Normal LOOP Red Forward reverse loop reception error Normal SD Sending data Receiving data For monochrome display it is displayed as lit or O not lit b Loop information Displays the MELSECNET H communication unit loop status No Item Description F loop Displays the status Normal NG of the F loop R loop Displays the stat
11. Operating authority obtained time 60 SEC 0 Invalid Operating priority guaranteed time 0 SEC Operation status popup notification NO Touch buttons to set in the SoftGOT GOT link INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Cancel APPENDICES 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation 2 63 E SoftGOT GOT link function setting operation 1 Exclusive authorization obtained state a Obtaining the exclusive authorization GOT setup Operation SoftGOT GOT link function setting Operating priority obtained state Not obtained Obtain SoftGOT GOT link function setting Operating authority obtained time SEC 0 Invalid Operating priority guaranteed time 0 SEC Operation status popup notification b Releasing the exclusive authorization GOT setup Operation SoftGOT GOT link function setting m Operating priority obtained state Obtaining Obtain SoftGOT GOT link function setting Operating authority obtained time SEC 0 Invalid Operating priority guaranteed time 0 See Operation status popup notification 2 Authorization obtained time GOT setup Operation SoftGOT GOT link function setting Obtain Operating priority obtained state l Not obtained SoftGOT GOT link function setting Operating authority obtained time 60 SEC O Invalid Operating priority guaranteed me Operation status
12. Revision SH NA 080929ENG A First edition SH NA 080929ENG B SH NA 080929ENG C SH NA 080929ENG D SH NA 080929ENG E SH NA 080929ENG F SH NA 080929ENG G SH NA 080929ENG H Compatible with GT Works3 Version 1 17T e GT1675 VN GT1672 VN and GT1662 VN supported e SRAM control supported e Converting a CSV file or Unicode text file to an advanced recipe file G1P file enabled Compatible with GT Works3 Version 1 19V e Compatible with switching the display order of operation logs on the operation log information screen e Compatible with Behavior of duplicate IPs Compatible with GT Works3 Version 1 23Z The OK button is changed to the OK Cancel buttons Compatible with no setting of the utility call key Compatible with the setting of Operating priority guaranteed time Operation status popup notification in the SoftGOT GOT link screen Compatible with the display of GOT information Compatible with the Ethernet settings check and the change of the host Compatible with the setting of Comment setting in the Q L QnA ladder monitor screen Compatible with the Ethernet connection status check with the ping transmission Compatible with the display of GOT start time history in Batch self check Compatible with the latest display in Operation log information Compatible with GT Works3 Version 1 28E e Compatible with GT1655 V e Compatible with the specification change of the numeric keyboard C
13. 24 30 00 Fax 47 0 32 84 85 77 Fonseca S A R Jo o Francisco do Casal 87 89 PT 3801 997 Aveiro Esgueira Telefono 351 0 234 303 900 Fax 351 0 234 303 910 Sirius Trading amp Services srl Aleea Lacul Morii Nr 3 RO 060841 Bucuresti Sector 6 Phone 40 0 21 430 40 06 Fax 40 0 21 430 40 02 INEA RBT d o 0 Izletnicka 10 SER 113000 Smederevo Phone 381 0 26 615 401 Fax 381 0 26 615 401 SIMAP s r o Jana Derku 1671 SK 911 01 Trencin Phone 421 0 32 743 04 72 Fax 421 0 32 743 75 20 PROCONT spol s r o Pre ov K peln 1 A SK 080 01 Pre ov Phone 421 0 51 7580 611 Fax 421 0 51 7580 650 INEA RBT d 0 0 Stegne 11 SI 1000 Ljubljana Phone 386 0 1 513 8116 Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 Beijer Electronics AB Box 426 SE 20124 Malmo Phone 46 0 40 35 86 00 Fax 46 0 40 93 23 01 Omni Ray AG Im Schorli 5 CH 8600 D bendorf Phone 41 0 44 802 28 80 Fax 41 0 44 802 28 28 GTS TURKEY Bayraktar Bulvari Nutuk Sok No 5 TR 34775 Yukar Dudullu Umraniye ISTANBUL Phone 90 0 216 526 39 90 Fax 90 0 216 526 3995 CSC Automation Ltd 4 B M Raskovoyi St UA 02660 Kiev Phone 380 0 44 494 33 55 Fax 380 0 44 494 33 66 MALTA MOLDOVA NETHERLANDS NETHERLANDS NORWAY PORTUGAL ROMANIA SERBIA SLOVAKIA SLOVAKIA SLOVENIA SWEDEN SWITZERLAND UKRAINE TOO Kazpromavtomatika KAZAKHSTAN Ul Zhambyla 28
14. 51 10 23 09 09 51 10 23 09 09 49 10 23 09 09 28 10 23 09 09 25 10 23 09 09 25 10 23 09 09 22 10 23 09 09 16 10 23 09 09 16 10 23 09 08 30 10 23 09 08 30 10 23 09 08 29 10 23 09 08 28 10 23 09 07 21 10 23 09 07 21 10 23 09 06 58 10 23 09 06 58 10 23 09 06 58 10 23 09 06 58 10 23 09 06 56 10 23 09 05 53 10 23 09 05 53 10 23 09 05 53 10 23 09 05 53 6 2 Various Data Control Screen No Operation 52 6 Level0 1D 0 Date descending File Name A Project1 OPELOG OPELOG_20101023_0001 610 BASE_1 ST_O FE ENG Moni tor Off line mode BASE_1 ST_O FE ENG Moni tor Search Change To Switch applications Switch applications Touch switch Application switching Screen switching Base Switch applications Switch applications Switch applications Switch applications Touch switch Application switching Numerical Input Screen switching Base Switch applications Switch applications Touch switch Application switching Screen switching Base Switch appl ications Switch appl ications Touch switch Application switching Screen switching Base Station No switching Common Display system language Switch appl ications Switch appl ications Screen switching Base Station No switching Common Display system language Switch applications Operation Log Utility BASE_1 Moni tor Utility Operation Log Utility 23 BASE_1 Moni tor Ladder edi tor BASE_1 Moni tor
15. 8 3 1 Downloading project data PC to GOT 2 When Communication Setting has not been downloaded The GOT automatically assigns the installed communication driver in the order of 1 to 4 as follows Only the extend interface is assigned automatically Communication setting x Standard F Setting Assign Ethernet F Channe l Dr iver assign R5232 BV suppl A QnA L QCPU L QJ 1024 9 Host PQ o o y y RS422 485 O None i None o one _ None Extend I F Setting Extend F 1 Extend F 2 Ist PONG Nee Go None 1 Crie Cee 2 2nd LCbNo TNone a LGN Pe 3 fL_O__ None__ ___J 0 Nore ___ e 4 3rd O None Nome S ek Definition of ChNo O None 5 8 Externa device 0ther connect ion 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection OK Cancel 1 ChNo 1 Communication driver installed at 1st 2 ChNo 2 Communication driver installed at 2nd 3 ChNo 3 Communication driver installed at 3rd 4 ChNo 4 Communication driver installed at 4th 3 1 Communication Setting UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP zZ H W 79 z O lt 2 zZ Oo 2 z SE p u q oO ul 30 x DL ti oE oz DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK DEBUG INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 3 a After communication driver is assigned automatically When saving the settings to the GOT with OK button after the automatic assignment of
16. AA sala RG gize Time Advanced sys alarm 16 02 1 Advanced user alarm Advanced User Advanced User 16 07 p Q item s has have been selected 0 0KB in total 7 SRAM Free space 464 8KB er Initialize 8 Sun capacity so a ase 11 Backup restorat ion F 480 OB 9 Drive capacity _487_9MB asl gt No Item Description 1 Check box Touch the check box to select or clear the item 2 E PETA Displays the used functions in the order of the advanced system alarm advanced user alarm and logging function 3 Setting ID Displays the setting IDs The setting IDs of the advanced system alarm are not displayed 4 Size Displays the data size Displays the setting name For the setting name only characters within the display range Setti 5 a iii are displayed 6 Date Time Displays the creation date and time of each data 7 n item s has have been selected Displays the information of the items currently selected 8 SRAM Free space Displays the current free space size or total space size of the SRAM user area Displays the current free space size or total space size of the drive selected for Select 9 Free space drivel 10 Initialize all Initializes all areas of the SRAM user area Select each area of the SRAM user area to initialize multiple areas of the SRAM user 11 Initialize selected area area Switches drives to be used for the data backup or restor
17. Copy Move Rename CreateFolder Del 2 Iftouch the Rename button displays the x Path Mame PROJECT File Name LINE A_REC IPS AZO lt gt AC DEL QIWJETRIT Y UY 1 Of P AISIDIFI GI AI JI RIL LIXICIVIBININ Enter The file name will be changed Current name ARPOOOO 1 61P New name LINE A_REC IPE 61P Do you want to proceed Process completed 6 2 Various Data Control screen shown left then input the file name to be renamed By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol If touch the Enter button displays the dialog box shown left If touch the OK button starts renaming file While executing Processing message appears on the screen When renaming is completed completion dialog box is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog box 8 Folder create operation Folder to be used in advanced recipe is created E USB drive Free space 483 0MB Drive capacity 483 OMB 0 files are selected 0 0KB in total Number_of selectable files in this folder 1 files x Path Name ADSPROJECT 1 Folder Name AZ _ _ lt gt Ae DEL QUA EI RIT YUL OTP AUSIDIFIGIHI JI RIL ZUKICIVIBINYM Enter Create new folder Process completed 7 Touch the Create Folder button 2
18. Drive capacity 483 0MB Number_of selectable files in this folder sent _ oat ete 1 files are selected 0 9KB in total l lder 1 files i _ Select all files Carcel selection 2 As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed select the record comment for Sagi oe renee saving the device value Name Recipe No 1 o T 7 i F il EA H F D H l 1 P Process 4 setting r z oai Ig d i Say Or do f M atch re cor ds fi le e Jey ce 3 If touch the button the screen Record Comment shown left is displayed For changing the record comment of saving destination input the record comment By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital a z English minuscule 0 9 Numeric Symbol Other than alphanumeric and symbol can not be inputted If record comment is not changed it is not need to input i 6 31 DATA CONTROL Continued to next page 6 2 Various Data Control 6 32 Record Ne Record Comment Process 1 setting Do you want to save record Process completed 6 2 Various Data Control 4 If touch the Enter button the dialog box shown left is displayed 5 If touch the OK button starts saving record 6 When saving is completed completion dialog box is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog box 12 Record match op
19. MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GO iooo GT16 User s Manual Basic Utility node Operaton N Clamp Operation mode ari en Raset Convey Auto Man Ou TH mile Me OPERATION LOG MTSUEISH La EZ SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Always read these precautions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product In this manual the safety precautions are ranked as WARNING and CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in A WARNING death or severe injury CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION Z iy resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Note that the N caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety e e e e e E ew EOE e SS OS Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS WARNING Some failures of the GOT communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off An external monitoring circuit should
20. Replacing a backlight without removing the GOT from the control panel can cause the backlight to drop resulting in an injury BACKLIGHT REPLACEMENT PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Wear gloves for the backlight replacement when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user Not doing so can cause an injury Before replacing a backlight allow 5 minutes or more after turning off the GOT when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user Not doing so can cause a burn from heat of the backlight DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations For details of the battery directive in EU member states refer to HardWare MHandling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations Refer to HardWare Appendix 3 for details of the regurated models Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and or relevant unit s in the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this manual as they are precision devices Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation INTRODUC
21. Therefore do not pull out the CF card while the Processing message is on the screen after CF card access switch has been turned OFF INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 6 2 Various Data Control 6 67 6 2 5 Hard copy information W The function of hardcopy information Carries out delete copy and move to the file created by the hardcopy function Refer to the following manual for details of hard copy function K gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 38 HARD COPY FUNCTION eGT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 13 2 Hard Copy Function Description ee poe Reference P Designer2 Designer3 Inf ti a ee Displays the kind name data size creation date and time Hardcopy information display example ies of the file or folder E The operation of hardcopy information and folders Delete Deletes the file e o 2 Delete operation Copy Copies the file Co o 3 Copy operation Rename Renames the file o o 4 Rename operation WE The display operation of hardcopy information Main menu Data control Data control gt gt 1 3 Utility Display Touch Data control Hard copy information ree space 951 4MB rive capacity 955 OMB 0 files are selected 0 0KB in total Number of selectable files in this folder 0 files sae all files i Cancel selection Copy Rename Del 6 68 6 2 Various Data Control
22. Touching the Cancel button cancels installation After executing or canceling installation restart the GOT 7 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING SELF CHECK DEBUG DATA CONTROL ad e 15 Oe OF om O2 na ai O A uz On On Wu e z e E m lt o zZ APPENDICES c When the version is the same or newer regardless of the data stored in the CF card or USB memory conditions a and b above The version information and a dialog for selecting whether or not to continue installation are displayed Boot US has been already instal led Exsisting 08 Ver 01 01 B Expected OS Ver d1 01 B Exsisting basic OS and other OS and project data will be deleted Do you want to install lt GOT screen when BootOS is installed from CF card or USB memory gt If touch OK button installation is executed If touch Cancel button installation is canceled 2 Standard monitor OS installation Match the version of each OS file when installing standard monitor OS Standard monitor OS cannot be installed if the version of each OS file does not match When the installation process is discontinued When the installation process is normally executed Standard monitor OS E O O Standard monitor OS i 2 O O Communication driver 2 O O C
23. Up load 6 114 6 3 OS Project Information E Display example of project information Data control 0S project info Project info C e A Built in CF card DIRI GISYSLOG ta GIAI ICIRDAT F6KY 03 28 08 22 38 C Flash Memory E USB drive UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP Delete Copy Property Data check Down load Upload COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING Number Item Description The drive by which a file or folder is displayed can be selected When the CF card is not connected A Built in CF card and B Memory card are not 1 Select drive displayed S If the USB memory is not installed E USB drive is not displayed mA The project data Project Folder in the selected drive is displayed a 2 Sanaa When the name exceeds 18 characters the 19th and later characters are not displayed The project data being monitored on the GOT is preceded by Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed X 4 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name i 5 Date and time Displays the date and time when each file is installed Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive m The size of drive xr oO selection Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive Displays the execution switch of functions download upload
24. check Ethernet status check IP address of the other terminal 192 168 3 39 Ping transmission E Operation of Ethernet status check If touch the select button of IP address of the other terminal a keyboard is displayed E Pire transmission Enter the IP address of the other terminal with the keyboard 1 2 lt Default 192 168 3 18 gt IP address of the other terminal 2 If touch the Ping transmission button a ping is sent to the IP address entered in IP address of the other station The result is displayed in the dialog box The timeout time is about 5sec 5 31 5 1 Diagnostic Functions 5 2 Batch Self Check Z O 2 5 2 1 Batch self check gt The Batch self check collects data about energization time installed OS and others and can display it in View self check results menu In the Batch self check screen the CF card or USB memory can be set as save destination of the log Also the following information are displayed in View self check results menu p Z tu For GT For GT AXED Item Description Z225 ES Designer3 2 P Information at power on Information at system start up Maintenance time notification a Y 2 Start up information O ot information AGO System status 1 Installed OS Installation history a O System status 2 Communication driver GOT system configuration information O S Z Communication settin a Ing Dis
25. e z e E m lt o zZ Close APPENDICES 7 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS 7 3 7 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card or USB Memory There are the following two types for the BootOS standard monitor OS installation using the CF card or USB memory 1 Installing when starting the GOT gt 7 3 1 All the OS and project data stored in the CF card or USB memory are transferred to the GOT when powering on the GOT This installing method is effective in the following cases e The GOT utility cannot be displayed e The standard monitor OS is not installed 2 Installing using the data control function Utility gt 7 3 2 By operating the utility select OS or project data stored in the CF card or USB memory and transfer them to the GOT Pre 1 2 3 4 cautions on installing BootOS standard monitor OS Installing both BootOS and standard monitor OS After completing BootOS installation install standard monitor OS When installing BootOS the built in flash memory in the GOT is initialized and goes to the status at factory shipment All OS and project data are erased BootOS is installed in the GOT at factory shipment It is not necessary to install BootOS when not upgrading it Copying project data using CF card or USB memory After installing BootOS standard monitor OS and other OS download the project data
26. 2 26 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 2 Operation of multimedia setting version control Version control Unit version 00 multimedia unit process stops Unit software version 01 01 00 v Update software ver 01 02 00 Do not turn off a multimedia unit While updating software Do you want to update software of the multimedia unit from 0 1 01 00 to 01 02 00 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings Check the version displayed in Unit software version It is the version of the software currently installed in the multimedia unit Touch the Unit software Update menu button and then the update program transfer screen is displayed By installing a CF card in which the updated program is stored the program can be updated Only when the updated program newer than the unit software version is stored the version of newer updated program is displayed in Update software version To update the program to the new version touch Update button The dialog shown left is displayed Touch OK button and then the software is updated Touch Cancel and then the software is not updated OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP 2 28 Updating multimedia unit software Caution Do not power off the unit while updating Completed update of the unit software version Unit software version 01 02 00 Fail to update the unit sftware Version correctly The dialog box shown lef
27. 9 Drive size Displays the used entire size of drive selected by select drive 10 Operation switch Execution switch of each function 11 Number of folders and files Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders About the displayed file The files other than that for advanced recipe are not displayed on the advanced recipe information screen ee Folders and files displayed For the folders and files displayed refer to the following 6 1 4 Display file 6 2 Various Data Control 6 15 UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DEBUG SELF CHECK X Z O oO lt x m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 Advanced recipe record list screen 1 Touching the Execute button on the advanced recipe information screen after selecting the advanced recipe file this screen appears Records selected in each advanced recipe file can be displayed or saved loaded Program Data Control Advanced Recipe Information Advanced Recipe Record List File Name A PROJECTI RECIPE1 ARPOOO01 G1P Setting No 1 Name Recipe No 1 rocess 2 setting rocess 3 setting rocess 4 setting Load record Save record Match records Delete Device GOT PLC PLO GOT GOT lt PLC Value Number Item 1 Description o Record No of adva
28. B Memory card E Q L QnA ladder monitor setting operation Debug Debug setting Q L QnA ladder monitor setting A Built in CF card Data save location Automatic program read Priority comment Local device monitor Drive for device comment Comment setting Setting to save ladders Caution Valid only when the data storage drive is A Built in CF card or B Memory card YES Common comment a A Built in CF card Hide comment Save a ladder program Cancel 4 2 Debug Setting 1 2 Cancel Setting items are changed if setting item is touched If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the Debug Setting screen If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Debug Setting screen 4 2 2 Backup restoration setting zZ O The storage location for backup data can be set O For how to use the backup restoration refer to the following manual gt 3 gt GOT1000 Series User s Manual Extended Functions Option Functions for GT Works3 11 BACKUP RESTORE 5 e GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 11 Backup restore D Z Set the following items with touching the items on the GOT iT 225 nee For GT For GT LO Function Description Setting range ann Designer2 Designer3 a No A Standard CF
29. Completed the process Succeeded Failed 0 6 2 Various Data Control If touch the Execute button the dialog box shown left is displayed Touch the OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen When only file with the same name exists in the destination folder the dialog shown left appears without starting the movement Touching the OK button overwrites the file If touch the Cancel button cancels moving When moving is completed completion dialog box is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog box 6 Rename operation An operation log file is changed Data control Data control Operat i on aos aie car d B Date Time a e OPELOG_20090730 0000 a 07 30 09 15 54 0 0G_200 Ol E USB drive 7 0 2KB 07 30 09 m CSV JOPELOG_20090730 0001 8 7KB a 02 09 E og 02 09 09 02 09 zeio OPELOG_ oat 0000 ree space 954 5MB Drive capacity 955 OMB 1 files are selected a i y y a 2 0KB in aD Pe iaintrar cot aes Bre Selected i 20B in toian of selectable files in this folder 6 files Ee ee A LOS A_LOg AZO lt gt AC DEL LIXICIVIBININ Enter The file name will be changed Current name OPELOG_20090730_0007 610 New name LOG amp _LOG 610 Do you want to proceed Process completed 1 Select the check box of the file to be 2 renamed by touching If touch the Rename button displays the screen shown left th
30. DLE BootOS is installed in the GOT at factory shipment It is not necessary to install BootOS when upgrading of it is eh unnecessary T cP r This chapter explains the installation using GOT ooo GT Designer3 or CF card gt GOT i GT Designer2 USB memory BootOS or Write standard monitor OS E OS file s installation When GOT is remote installed Bae Lea lt gt T easily using the CF card 2 E 2 le USB memory Se Install the CF 225 CF card 4 card in GOT sus GT Designer3 USB memory OFS or GT Designer2 OS file Ls I m m I gt s l Install the CF card in GOT The GOT can starts without an OS installed CF card Set the OS boot ae to A Sona 2 CF Card m Lu Q GOT CF card GOT USB memory BootOS or OS file standard monitor OS Vn upload installation DLN Install OS from GOT to GOT GOT gt Inn 2 using CF card USB memory 5 Install the CF T CF card 4 card USB z Ee ey memory in GOT m 1 When execute installation with USB memory standard monitor OS has to be installed in GOT in advance For details of the installation using GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 refer to the following K gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 7 COMMUNICATION WITH GOT z O eGT Designer2 Version L Basic Operation Data Transmission Manual lt lt m CoreOS In 7 1 to 7 4
31. GT05 50PCO GT16 50PCO GT10 40PCO GT10 30PCO GT10 20PCO GT16 UCOV GT16 50UCOV GT15 UCOV GT14 50UCOV GT11 50UCOV GT15 90STAND GT15 80STAND GT15 70STAND A9GT 50STAND GT05 50STAND GT15 70ATT 98 GT15 70ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 97 GT15 60AT T 96 GT15 60ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 77 GT15 50ATT 95W GT15 50ATT 85 GT16 90XLTT GT16 80SLTT GT16 70SLTT GT16 70VLTT GT16 70VLTTA GT16 70VLIN GT16 60SLTT GT16 60VLTT GT16 60VLTN GT15 90XLTT GT15 80SLTT GT15 70SLTT GT15 70VLTT GT15 70VLTN GT15 60VLTT GT15 60VLTN GT15 XHNB GT15 VHNB GT11H CNB 37S GT16H CNB 42S GT11H 50ESCOV GT16H 60ESCOV GT10 LDR GT10 50FMB GT14 C10EXUSB 4S GT10 C10EXUSB 5S For GT11 For GT10 E Software Abbreviations and generic terms GT Works3 GT Designer3 GT Simulator3 GT SoftGOT1000 GT Converter2 GT Designer2 Classic GT Designer2 iQ Works MELSOFT Navigator GX Works2 GX Simulator2 GX Simulator GX Developer GX LogViewer PX Developer MT Works2 MT Developer MR Configurator2 MR Configurator FR Configurator NC Configurator FX Configurator FP FX3U ENET L Configuration tool RT ToolBox2 MX Component MX Sheet LCPU Logging Configuration Tool Description Abbreviation of the SWLIDNC GTWK3 E and SWLIDNC GTWK3 EA Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000 GOT900 series Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of data
32. GT1050 Q Abbreviation of GT1050 QBBD GT1045 Q Abbreviation of GT1045 QSBD GT1040 Q Abbreviation of GT1040 QBBD Abbreviation of GT1030 LBD GT1030 LBD2 GT1030 LBL GT1030 LBDW GT1030 LBDW2 GT1030 LBLW GT1030 LWD GT1030 LWD2 GT1030 LWL GT1030 LWDW GT1030 LWDW2 GT1030 GT1030 LWLW GT1030 HBD GT1030 HBD2 GT1030 HBL GT1030 HBDW GT1030 HBDW2 GT1030 HBLW GT1030 HWD GT1030 HWD2 GT1030 HWL GT1030 HWDW GT1030 HWDW2 GT1030 HWLW Abbreviation of GT1020 LBD GT1020 LBD2 GT1020 LBL GT1020 LBDW GT1020 LBDW2 GT1020 GT1020 LBLW GT1020 LWD GT1020LWD2 GT1020 LWL GT1020 LWDW GT1020 LWDW2 GT1020 LWLW GT1050 GT1040 GT10 Abbreviation of GT1050 GT104L1 GT1030 GT1020 A 17 Abbreviations and generic terms GT16 Handy GT1665HS V andy GOT Description Abbreviation of GT1665HS VTBD GOT1000 GOT GT11 GT1155HS Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS QSBD Series Handy GOT GT1150HS Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS QLBD GT SoftGOT1000 GOT900 Series GOT800 Series E Communication unit Abbreviations and generic terms Bus connection unit Serial communication unit RS 422 conversion unit Ethernet communication unit MELSECNET H communication unit MELSECNET 10 communication unit CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit CC Link IE Field Network communication unit CC Link communication unit Interface converter unit Serial multi drop connection unit Connection Conversion Adapter RS 232 485 signal conversion ada
33. Input numerical value by the keyboard 2 If touch the OK button the GOT restarts and operates with the changed settings If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Main Menu OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 2 7 2 1 3 Cleaning of display section Clean In utility the screen can be set as not to be effected by touching the screen when clean with clothes Refer to the below for the cleaning procedure C gt Hardware 9 3 Cleaning Method WE Display operation of Clean Main menu GOT main unit setup C 1 3 Utility Display x N Touch GOT setup the upper left of of the screen and the upper right of in turn S Even if touch points other than the upper left corner and upper right corner of the screen the GOT does not operates 2 8 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings E Operation of Clean After cleaning the screen touch the screen following the instruction displayed After touching the screen the screen returns to the Main Menu The following screen is displayed Please press the upper left of of the screen and the upper right of in turn M ye 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK DEBUG INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 1 4 V
34. Item Description Screen to display images taken with a video camera or to play video taken with a video camera Play button for playing video Button to pause images or video taken with a video camera gt button Button to return to the beginning of video files and to play the video Print Screen gt button D button m button Button to stop playing LK button o gt button Button to return to the beginning of video files and to play the video Button to play the video in slow motion button Button to start printing the screen aie button Button to cancel printing the screen Button to switch the display to the video image screen button Button to switch the display to the video image screen button Button to accept messages Cancel button Button to stop messages Message display screen Exit button Button to exit the multimedia screen switch and to return to the utility screen Screen to display the file name and shooting time of the video being played and messages l Play position display bar Bar to display the play position of the video 4 This screen displays the shooting time of a video file saved with the GOT unit software version 03 02 00 or later only 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings UTILITY FUNCTION U O cs Lu N Z 2 lt x Lu a Oo O a zz IO gt LU LIN Q nn O aog COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTI
35. KAZ 100017 Karaganda Phone 7 7212 50 10 00 Fax 7 7212 50 1150 MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES 1 C SYSTEMS LTD EGYPT 23 Al Saad Al Alee St EG Sarayat Maadi Cairo Phone 20 0 2 235 98 548 Fax 20 0 2 235 96 625 ILAN amp GAVISH Ltd 24 Shenkar St Kiryat Arie IL 49001 Petah Tiqva Phone 972 0 3 922 18 24 Fax 972 0 3 924 0761 CEG INTERNATIONAL Cebaco Center Block A Autostrade DORA Lebanon Beirut Phone 961 0 1 240 430 Fax 961 0 1 240 438 AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE CBI Ltd SOUTH AFRICA Private Bag 2016 ZA 1600 Isando Phone 27 0 11 9770770 Fax 27 0 11 977 0761 ISRAEL LEBANON Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V FA European Business Group Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Germany FACTORY AUTOMATION _ Tel 49 0 2102 4860 Fax 49 0 2102 4861 120 info mitsubishi automation com www mitsubishi automation com
36. System language switching using the device The system language can be switched using the system language switching device set with GT Designers For the setting method of the system language switching device refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 3 Language Switching Device Setting E Opening screen screen save time creen save backlight Battery alarm display OFF Effective 10 MAX 10 If touching the setting numerical Keyboard is displayed Input numeric with the keyboard If touch the OK button the GOT restarts and operates with the changed settings If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Main Menu 2 2 Display Settings 2 45 OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP A W Screen save backlight battery alarm display Language English Opening screen time 5 Sec Screen save time 0 Min O None Screen save backlight OFF Battery alarm display ON Brightness contrast Setting Human sensor Effective 1 Sensor detect level 10 MAX 10 Sensor detect time 0 0 Sec Sensor off delay LO Min 10 Sec E Brightness Contrast Refer to the following for brightness contrast setting lt a 2 2 4 Brightness contrast adjustment E Human sensor GO p Display Language English Op
37. Touch OK button lf there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy If touch the OK button overwrites the file If touch Cancel button cancels to copy When the copy is completed the dialog box of completion is displayed If touch OK button closes the dialog box 5 Graph operation Displays the selected extended alarm log file in a graph When the extended alarm watch advanced user alarm advanced system alarm is set in history mode the selected extended alarm log file is displayed in historical graph lt gt gt a Historical graph display When set in accumulation mode displayed it in tally graph lt gt gt b Tally graph display Refer to the following for details related to setting of the extended alarm watch GT Designer3 Versioni1 Screen Design Manual Functions 10 ALARM eGT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 8 ALARM Data control Data co ntrol Alarm info rd aii is m Date Belect drive A Built in CF c E USB drive ree space 481 6MB Drive capacity 483 0MB 1 files are selected 0 1KB in total Number of selectable files in this folder 1 file Select all files emoc G1A gt TXT 8 Cancel selection O ow Example Historical graph 1 Touch the c
38. a Add Edit Delete Undo Drive in use Import Export Save The inport process overyrites existing files Do you want to proceed The import process of operator information file ig completed 6 2 Various Data Control 7 Touch the Import button 2 The dialog box shown left is displayed Touch OK button and then the Admin password authentication screen is displayed Input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key 3 When the administrator password is correctly input the dialog box shown left is displayed and the operator information stored in a CF card is imported to the GOT f Export operation Export the operator information stored in the GOT to a CF card Fe A ron z 1 Touch the Export button dministrator z 2 P0001 1001 10 2009 08 25 in P0005 1 1 2009 08 25 2 The dialog box on the left is displayed select an output file format to Touch the following buttons according to the export the operator information output format for the file e Binary file Binary button e CSV file CSV button 3 The dialog box shown left is displayed Touch OK button and then the Admin The export process overwrites o os existing files password authentication screen
39. bazd lea ACEL AIWETRI TTI OI TI OP AJSIDIPIG A II RIL LJEICITIBININ Eater Old pageword CEEE AISIDIFIGIA J RIL LJEICITIBININ Eater The pagevord change 1s completed 7 Log into the GOT with the operator name corresponding to the password to be changed on the Main Menu screen for the utility 2 Touch Password change in the operator setting menu and then the Password change dialog box is displayed 3 Input the current password on the Password change dialog box Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key 4 Input a new password 5 After inputting a new password input the new password again 6 When the new password is correctly input the dialog box shown left is displayed and the password is changed 6 2 Various Data Control 6 93 UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DEBUG SELF CHECK X m Z O oO lt x m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES E Function setting 1 Function setting function The functions for the operator information can be set The following items can be set For GT For GT Items Description Reference Designer2 Designer3 The time from
40. gt A of the BootOS is displayed m Minor version Major version X m za 8 lt x m Refer to the following for details of the screen display operation 3 6 3 1 OS information INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 6 1 Data Storage Location 6 3 Version confirmation of BootOS by rating plate Confirm the version of BootOS installed in the GOT at product shipment by rating plate of GOT rear face se MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL _GT1675M VTBA IN _100 240VAC 50 60Hz POWER MAX 90VA MAC ADD SERIAL 0000009701AA00001 D AA E BootOS version In case that the BootOS is two digits only the first digit is written BACKLIGHT GT16 70VLTTA 6 1 3 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location When download the project data confirm the capacity of the user area in the drive to which transferred the transferred project data size the transfer size and buffering area size of the optional function OS in advance to judge whether to carry out the download The capacities can be confirmed by GT Designer3 or GT Designerz2 Refer to the following for details GT Designer3 Versioni Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 7 5 2 Drive capacity required for data transfer GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 1 2 Drive capacity required for data transfer 6 1 Data Storage Location
41. settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Main Menu 2 2 4 Brightness contrast adjustment E Functions of the brightness contrast The brightness can be adjusted l For GT For GT Function Description Designer2 Designer3 Brightness of display part can be adjusted by 8 levels GT1675 VN Brightness setting O GT1672 VN GT1662 VN can be adjusted by 4 levels Refer to setting of the brightness by GS UTILITY FUNCTION O Z W N a 2 z W a O an _ Zz5 40E gt Ww LIN l Q Ona O aog Ka GT Designer3 version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals App2 GOT internal device E Display operation of brightness contrast COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING von GOT main unit setu Displa L37 1 3 Utility Display p play GOT main unit Touch setup Display Brightness contrast 9 a LW Q Brightness contrast lt GOT setup Display Intensity contrast adjustment i ae 3 Brightness setting i dp Touch Elto adjust the brightness O ad Z O O lt x Q Cancel INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 2 Display Settings 2 47 E Operating the brightness contrast 7 Brightness can be adjusted by touching key of brightness adjustment 2 If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the Display screen If touch the Cancel
42. shown left is displayed Touch the OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen This folder already contains the file ARPOOOO CSV Do you want to replace the existing fi le Modified 07 04 08 14 37 with this one Modified 07 04 08 14 71 Process completed When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the conversion If touch the OK button overwrites the file If touch Cancel button cancels the conversion The message of completion is displayed in dialog box when conversion is completed If touch OK button the dialog box is closed 6 2 Various Data Control DATA CONTROL 3 CSV TXT G1P conversion operation CSV file or Unicode text file is converted to an advanced recipe file G1P file Data control Data control Advanced Recipe information As A Select drive PROJECT 1 indName A Built in CF card Size Date Time DIR Free space 475 1MB Drive capacity 488 0MB x v Us idl 0 8KB 05 31 10 16 54 1 files are selected 0 8KB in total Number _ of selectable files in this folder 1 files Select all files GIPCSY GIP TXT cwvnsr CreateG1P Execute Cancel selection Copy Move Rename createFoider Del Data control Data control Advanced Recipe information x Select drive A PROJECT 1 indName al A Built in CF card Size D
43. za change settings Enable CPU No setting Cance E Backup restoration setting operation 1 Drive for backup setting drive for backup data 7 Toucha setting item and then the setting is changed Drive for backup data A Bui lt in CF card Trig bkup setting Max of bkup data o T X 1 50 0 No limit Enable CPU No setting 2 Iftouch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the Debug Setting screen If touch the Cancel button the changed m Cancel settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Debug Setting screen 2 4 6 4 2 Debug Setting 2 Trigger backup setting For operations of the trigger backup setting refer to the following L gt 4 2 3 Trigger backup settings 3 Max number of backup data 7 Touch the setting item and then a keyboard Drive for backub setting appears Delve Tor bactan dita Input values with the keyboard Trig bkup setting Max of bkup data 1 50 0 No limit Enable CPU No setting Setting range 0 to 50 Default 10 When 0 is specified the GOT does not check the number of backup data to be stored 2 If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the Debug Setting screen If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to 2 the Debug Setting screen 7 Toucha setting item
44. 02 Screen switching Base Switch applications Switch applications Input the date or time to be searched Touching the Enter button displays the dialog box on the left Touch the OK button When processing is being executed the Processing message is displayed on the screen The results found are displayed and the dialog box on the left is displayed To continue a search touch the OK button To stop a search touch the Cancel button When searching is completed a completion message is displayed in the dialog box Touching the OK button closes the dialog box 6 2 Various Data Control DATA CONTROL 6 66 9 Latest display The latest operation log files are selected and displayed in a list Data control Data Select drive Free space 487 5MB Drive capacity 488 OMB control Operation log information At Project 1 OPELOG indName A Built in CF card Size DIR E 10 rec 20101022 mero OPELOG_20101023 12K Time 10 22 10 09 15 10 23 10 09 09 l a eei 0 files are selected Number_of selectable files in this folder 2 files 0 0KB in_total Select all files 610 3 GIOSTXT Ji Latest List am Data Control File Name A Project1 OPELOG OPELOG_20101023_0001 610 Operation Log Information Operation Log Data List A Ben Cancel selection Copy Move 1 Rename createrotder Del 10 23 09 06 58 1
45. 03 00 00 or later of the multimedia unit is required If the software version of the multimedia unit is old an error message is displayed For how to upgrade the multimedia software refer to the following L gt Version control 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 2 31 2 Operation of multimedia screen a Video image screen Images taken with a video camera connected to the multimedia unit can be displayed on the GOT screen Images taken with a video camera can be recorded 1 Image display screen Screen to display images taken with a video camera 2 oo button Button to pause images taken with a video camera Button to start recording images taken with a video camera 3 Button to stop recording 4 5 elas button Button to start printing the screen Button to cancel printing the screen 6 Button to switch the display to the play video screen 7 8 Menu button Button to switch the screen to the file menu screen 9 Exit button Button to exit the multimedia screen switch and to return to the utility screen 10 OK button Button to accept messages 11 Cance button Button to stop messages 12 Screen to display error messages etc 2 32 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings b 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Video Play video screen files saved in the CF card installed on the multimedia unit can be played and displayed 1 2 3
46. 16 50 GOT system architecture info S N GOTO86 1644020014 MAC address 08 00 70 AB 23 84 H W version AA S W version AA UNIT OPTION CFCard A 511664128 byte B Obyte 2 74 2 4 Maintenance Function E Display of GOT information GOT setup GOT maintenance function GOT information X Communication driver A QnA L QCPU L QJ7 1024 Ver 05 16 50 GOT system architecture info S N GOTO86 1644020014 MAC address 08 00 70 AB 23 84 H W version AA S W version AA UNIT p O Z 3 225 OPTION lt Op CFCard A 511664128 byte ae B Obyte cE cc E no 9 aog Item Description Communication driver Displays the communication driver written to the GOT S N Displays the serial number MAC address Displays the MAC address H W version Displays the H W version S W version Displays the S W version at factory shipment UNIT Displays the communication unit mounted on the GOT OPTION Displays the option unit mounted on the GOT CFCard Displays the capacity of the CF card mounted on A drive B drive 2 4 Maintenance Function 2 76 2 4 Maintenance Function 3 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE zZ O SETTING 2 Z z LL gt COMMUNICATION SETTING H 5 op 2 In the communication setting the communication interface names and the related communication channel E communication driver names display and channel numbers are set SLE Moreover in the communication detail setting the communication interface details are set Communicatio
47. 3 1 Ethernet Setting function cece cceccssceceeeceeeceeeccaeeceeceeeeaeeeeaeeseesaueeaueesaeeseuesaeesegeesaeenes 3 20 3 3 2 Display operation of Ethernet Setting ccc ceccceccceeeee cece esas esse eeeeeeeee esse eeseeeseeeeseeeseeees 3 20 3 3 3 Display contents of Ethernet Setting cc cccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeseeseeesaeeeeeeeaeeesaeeeas 3 21 4 DEBUG A1 Montor SCN CNS sega aces cegns tec ease sees E EA E Epea 4 1 4 1 1 Function of monitor screens ccc ccccceecccececeseeeeceeeecececaueceueceueeceeecsueceeecsueesueesaeecaeessueesas 4 1 4 1 2 Display operation Of monitor screens ccc eecc eee ceeeeeeeeee ceca eeceeeeeueceeeeseeeseeeseueeseeeaeeeaeeeeas 4 2 42 010 le 96 Eee ee ene teen eee ere oe ee ee era ae ee eee eee eee ee eee 4 3 4 2 1 Q L QNA ladder monitor Setting cc cccccccccecssecececeeceeeeseseeesececseeeseaeeesseaeeesaaeeesansessaas 4 3 4 2 2 Backup restoration Setting cccccccccccssccecsececeececeeeeceeeeceeeeseeeeseaeeeseeesaeeesageeseeeeseeeeseeesaages 4 5 AZo Tigger DACKUD SCUINGS eicsccsecacscues sdccttencedasornasaecmontusded i AEE EE Ei EEE AE 4 8 4 3 Memory Data Control cccccccccccccsececeeeeeeeeesseeesseeesseeeeseeeeseueesseeeseeeeseeeeseaeeseeessueeseeeessaeeeeseeeeses 4 10 4 3 1 Functions of memory data control ccccccccccececeeeceeeeseeese cece eeseeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeesaaes 4 10 4 3 2 BACKUP MESO
48. 3 Precautions 6 2 Various Data Control 5 Copy operation Folder to be used in advanced recipe is copied E USB drive Free space 477 0MB Drive capacity 483 OMB 1 files are selected 0 9KB in total Number_of selectable files in this folder 1 files Cancel selection E USB drive Free space 476 6MB Drive capacity 483 OMB Number_of selectable files in this folder 1 files Please select 7 J a eee i destination Exec Cancel Jl i Jl The target file to copy ARPOOGO 1 G1P Do you want to copy the file This folder already contains the file ARPOOGO1 GIP Do you want to replace the existing fi le Modified 07 04 08 14 2 with this onet Modified 07 04 08 14 08 Continued to next page 1 files are selected 0 9KB in total Touch the check box of the file to copy to select the file 2 Touch the Copy button Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders If touch Exec button the following dialog box shown left is displayed Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the co
49. 8 5 2 Install USB peripheral devices 4 3 7 USB device status display When no faults are found in mounting etc a memory failure may be arosen Replace the CF card or USB memory or built in flash memory C drive For details of built in flash memory contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service The following example explains about Memory Check using built in flash memory C drive For the Built in CF card A drive memory check or Extended memory card B drive memory check install the CF card before carrying out the same key operations as built in flash memory For the USB drive E drive memory check install the USB memory before carrying out the check operations Select Flash Memory in the Memory check setting screen If select OK button the numeric keyboard window is displayed If select Cancel button returns to the initial menu 2 Touch to input password 5 9 2 0 and touch Enter key If touch Enter key executes read write check for the built in flash memory which is completed in around 10 seconds 5 1 Diagnostic Functions Internal Flush memory area writefread check Execute now Please input password 1 8 9 a4 Bl ALS OLED 1 2 3 e F er Password change The password cannot be changed When input password error the cancel dialog box is displayed If touch OK returns to the Memory check screen When error is found in memory When error i
50. Adjust is set for Time setting The clock data of the controller set as Adjust CH No of Clock data GOT is matched to clock data External Adjust in GOT Setup Clock Setting of GT Designers or in System Environment Time setting of GT Designer2 is changed For details of Adjust and Broadcast refer to the following manual C GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals GT Designer2 VersionL Screen Design Manual WE Display operation of time setting Main menu Time setting L 3 1 3 Utility Display Clock setting Adjust 10 18 2010 13 15 34 MON GOT internal battery Norma voltage status Set the Time setting Time setting and Clock setting OK Cance 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings E Operation of time setting 1 Time setting Setup the method to adjust the time between GOT data and the clock data of controller connected to the GOT Setting Description zZ O O Z z LL gt F E Adjust the time of GOT clock data to the clock data of controller E 7 O Z Adjust yeas F It is same as set in the GOT setup in Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 or in System Environment of GT ana Designer2 A x Ze w Cs eGT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals a ra 2 4 9 2 How to match clock data between the GOT and controllers 2 S 3 eGT Designer2 Version Screen Des
51. Author Ix ect Drawing S W version GT Designer2 Version2 87R B 1 6 3 OS Project Information Touch OK button lf there is no file of the same name in the copy destination folder starts to copy When there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the dialog box mentioned left is displayed without starting the copy If copy in this case the copied file is overwritten to the project data in the copy destination folder If touch OK button starts to copy If touch Cancel button cancels to copy When copying completes the dialog box of completion is displayed If touch OK button closes the dialog box If touch Property button after selecting the project data to display the property the property is displayed as shown left In property display the following information is displayed Item Description Date Displays the creation date of the file Author Displays the author of the project data Draw ea Displays name and version of the drawing software by which the project data is created version If touch A W button the screen scrolls up down line by one line If touch Al 4 button the screen scrolls up down by one screen If touch gt lt button the property display is closed and returned to the previous screen 5 Data check operation Carrys out data check of the selected project file Touch the Data check button after se
52. B 404 Q62DA Q64DA Input Output Moni tor B 405 Q62DA Q64D4 Graph Moni tor B 406 QD62D 0D62E QD62 Op Mon B 407 QD62D 0D62E AD62 1 0 Monitor B 408 QD75P QD75D Operation Monitor B 409 QD75P 0D75D 1 0 Monitor B 410 QD75P 0D75D Basic parameters 1 B 411 QD75P QD75D Basic parameters 2 B 4 12 QD75P QD75D Detailed para 1 1 B 413 QD75P D75D Detailed para 1 2 B 4 14 QD75P 0D75D Detailed para 2 1 B 415 QD 5P QD75D Detailed para 2 2 B 416 QD75P QD75D OPR detailed para B 417 QD75P QD75D OPR basic parameters B 418 QD75P QD75D 1 0 signal amp Status B 4 19 QD75P QD75D Axis monitor data 1 B 420 QD 75P QD75D Axis monitor data 2 B 421 QD 75P QD75D OPR B 422 QD75P QD75D Speed pos control B 423 QD75P QD75D Pos speed control B 424 QD75P QD75D Axis control data 1 B 425 QD75P QD75D Axis control data 2 B 426 QD75P QD75D Axis control data 3 4 Data check operation Checks the selected special data Dialog when data is normal Data normal Dialog when data is error Data error Touch the Property button after selecting a special data to display Property as shown left In Property display the following information is displayed Item Description Date Displays date and time of file creation Author Displays the author of the project data Drawing S W Displays name and version of the drawing version software by which the project is created If touch the a W button the screen scrolls up down
53. English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol If touch the Enter button displays the dialog box shown left If touch the OK button starts creating folder When creating folder is completed completion dialog box is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog box 8 List display Displays operation logs in an operation log file in a list Data control Data control Operation log information Select drive roject 1 OPELOG mie A Bui lt in CF card Size Date DIR G10 JOPELOG_20101022 0000 0 6KB 10 22 10 09 15 V eae OPELOG_2010 01 10 23 10 09 09 Free space 487 1MB Drive capacity 488 0MB 1 files are selected 1 2KB in_ total Number of selectable files in this folder 2 files fs ee es SES ee eee ee es Program Data Control Operation Log Information Operation Log Data List File Name A ProjectT 0PELOG OPELOG_20101023_0001 610 A D 2010 Date Time Screen No Operation Change To asst s s r CSzrY 10 23 09 09 55 Switch applications Operation Log ES 10 23 09 09 52 Switch applications ili A 10 23 09 09 52 B 1 Touch switch Application switching 10 23 09 09 51 Screen switching Base 10 23 09 09 51 10 23 09 09 49 10 23 09 09 28 10 23 09 09 25 Switch appl ications Switch appl ications Switch appl ications Switch appl ications 10 23 09 09 25 B 1 Touch switch Application switching 10 23 09 09 22 B 1 Numerical Input 10 23 09 09 16 Screen s
54. Ethernet setting LL gt 1 H E 2 t ere aene wot paree oreo Comnication_ 5 Oa f o ew a o e Oo f e o ewe a o e Oo o ee 9 Z ke Lu 225 C Ew a oS ao fo 3 Restore default settings zZ H W 79 z O lt 2 zZ Oo 2 oO z zE p u q oO ul 30 lt DL ti oE oz 1 Channel select tab Channels can be switched Switching to the channel which does not have the Ethernet setting is not available is displayed on the tab of the channel whose setting is changed 2 Ethernet setting items The contents of the Ethernet setting configured in GT Designer3 are displayed The setting of the host station can be changed L Change of host DEBUG 3 Restore default settings If touch this button the change of the setting is canceled and the setting returns to the status when the project data was written SELF CHECK 1 How to cancel the change of the setting in the Ethernet setting screen Cancel the settings changed in the Ethernet setting screen with the Restore default settings button The changed settings remain until they are canceled with the Restore default settings button The changed settings are not canceled even if writing the project data or OS to the GOT When the project data is written to the GOT without canceling the changed settings those changed settings are reflected to the Ethernet setting of the written project data
55. Functions Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 The following describes the functions available as the debugging function o For GT For GT Item Description Reference Designer2 Designer3 System monitor Ladder monitor Network monitor intelligent module monitor servo amplifier monitor CNC monitor A list editor List editor Monitor screens for MELSEC A SFC monitor Ladder editor MELSEC L 4 1 troubleshooting Log viewer Motion SFC monitor Motion program SV43 editor Debug setting Q L QnA ladder monitor setting Backup restoration setting Lots 4 2 hemonidaia Backup restoration function GOT data package acquisition CNC a data I O Memory card format Memory information USB device 43 status display SRAM control Motion program SV43 I O 4 1 Monitor Screens 4 1 1 Function of monitor screens The Monitor screens are designed to confirm the device status of PLC CPU and to make the response for PLC system trouble more efficient The following shows the functions that can be performed with the Monitor screens a For GT For GT Item Description Designer2 Designer3 l The device of PLC CPU and buffer memory of intelligent function module can be System monitor O monitored or tested Ladder monitor The program of PLC CPU can be monitored in ladder format Oo O The network status of the MELSECNET H MELSECNET II CC Link IE Controller Network monitor l l O Network and CC Link IE Field Network can be m
56. GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DEBUG x O LLI I O LL l LLI 2 COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS DATA CONTROL INSTALLATION OF APPENDICES E Operation of system alarm display 1 System alarm display resetting 7 Eliminate each cause of the system alarm being Reset _ occurred raver on bie Error causes can be identified by the error code error message and channel No displayed on the System alarm screen gt Hardware 10 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 Amethod for resetting system alarm depends on an error e GOT error Touch the button to reset system alarms e CPU error and Network error The system alarm is automatically reset after its cause is eliminated 1 Before resetting the system alarm display in the GOT error Eliminate the system alarm cause before resetting the system alarm display in the GOT error If not eliminated the system alarm display in the GOT error will not be reset even after the reset operation 2 Processings with reset operation The following data in the system information are also reset e GOT error code Write device e GOT error detection signal System Signal 2 1 b13 5 1 Diagnostic Functions 9 1 3 Memory check 6 E Memory check function O Memory check function carries out the write read check of A drive Standard CF Card B drive Extended memory T card C drive Built in flash me
57. GT Works3 Connecting multiple controllersto one GOT Multi channel function GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 1 3 2 3 3 3 Establishing communication between a personal computer and a controller via the GOT FA transparent function Obtaining information of Non Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT e GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 e GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Connecting Non Mitsubishi products to the GOT Products 2 for GT Works3 e GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 1 3 2 3 3 3 Obtaining information of peripheral devices applicable to the GOT e GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 Connecting peripheral devices including a barcode reader to the GOT e GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 1 3 2 3 3 3 WE Transferring data to the GOT Writing data to the GOT l l l e GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 1 2 2 2 e GT Designer2 Version2 Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual For GOT1000 Series Reading data from the GOT Verifying a editing project to a GOT project E Others Obtaining specifications including part names external dimensions and e GT16 User s Manual Hardware options of each GOT e GT16 Handy GOT User s Manual e GT15 User s Manual e GT14 User s Manual e GT12 User s Manual Installing the GOT e GT11 User s Manual e GT11 Handy GOT User s Manual e GT10 User s Manual e
58. Hardware 8 5 2 m Install USB peripheral devices 4 3 7 USB device status display When no faults are found in mounting etc a memory failure may be arosen Replace the CF card or USB memory or built in flash memory C drive For details of built in flash memory contact yo ur local Mitsubishi Electric System Service The following example explains about Memory Check using built in flash memory C drive For the Built in CF card A drive memory check or Extended memory card B drive memory check install the CF card before carrying out the same key operations as built in flash memory For the USB drive E drive memory check install the USB memory before carrying out the check operations iP Touch to input password BIRBO ana touch Select Flash Memory in the Memory check setting screen If select button the numeric keyboard window is i Internal Flush memory area displayed write read check If select button returns to the initial menu Execute now OK Cancel key Please input password If touch Enter key executes read write check for the built in ee Tee eps pete po TEF OJA Del Enter 5 1 Diagnostic Functions 5 5 UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTIN 5 DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DEBUG lt oO Wu x 5 uw al W N DATA CONTROL COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF
59. IP address is restricted according to the system configuration e When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network Do not set the IP address 192 168 0 18 for the GOTs and the controllers in the network When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network Do not set the IP address 192 168 0 18 for the controllers except the GOT in the network Doing so can cause the IP address duplication The duplication can negatively affect the communication of the device with the IP address 192 168 0 18 The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they communicate with the GOT Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT main unit to from the panel Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the communication unit printer unit or option function board onto from the GOT Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction When installing the option function board wear an earth band etc to avoid the static electricity Not doing so can cause a unit corruption CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that sati
60. If the written project data does not have a channel with same Ethernet settings as that of the channel changed in Ethernet setting screen the changed settings are not reflected DATA CONTROL 2 Range where the settings changed in the Ethernet setting screen are reflected The settings changed in the Ethernet setting screen are valid in the GOT On the other hand they are not overwritten to the project data written to the GOT The changed settings are not reflected to the project data which is read from the GOT after changing the settings If the GOT data is copied with the GOT data package acquisition the change in the Ethernet setting screen is reflected to the copied data INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 3 3 Ethernet Setting 3 21 E Change of host 1 Touch the device to be set as the host 2 If touch the OK button the GOT restarts and operates with the changed settings If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Communication Setting screen 3 22 3 3 Ethernet Setting 4 DEBUG In this manual the overview of the debuggingfunction and the operation procedure until displaying the screen are described For display contents and operation procedure of debuggings refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series User s Manual Extended Functions Option Functions for GT Works3 eGOT1000 Series Extended Option
61. L 7 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 1 1 Utility Execution Z O 8 Z LL gt a H gt OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK DEBUG INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 1 2 Utility Function List The items in the following list can be set operated on the utility screens For GT Designers of an old version and GT Designer2 displayed screens setting items and others may differ from those described in the manual Supported A Partly supported x Not supported For GT For GT Item Functions overview Reference Time Time setting Displaying and setting the clock current time and setting the clock current time a CLET CUN the channel No to be used for the 343 mode communication for the FA transparent function _ Clean Clean Displaying the screen for cleaning the display Displaying the screen for cleaning the display screen for cleaning the display 2 1 3 Video RGB Displaying the screen for setting the video RGB I O or 5414 GOT main setting unit Multimedia unit setup Displaying the screen for setting the multimedia 2 1 5 setting License Displaying the screen for registering and releasing TT management the license a _ Behavi f Setting the GOT operation when a device with the ehavior o same IP address as that of the GOT is added to t
62. L Screen Design Manual 3 5 Set Password O Z W N a 2 z W a Q _ Zz5 LO gt Ww LIN l a Na O aog Restrictions on screen display The security level change screen cannot be displayed when project data do not exist in GOT Change the security level after downloading the project data to GOT COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING WE Displaying the security level change Main menu GOT setup Operation gt gt 1 3 Utility Display a U Q GOT setup zN Touch Operation A Security setting x O U T O Er i D Security setting Security level change Touch Security level change Please input password 5 O O lt x Q Input the password of the security level which is set in GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation 2 53 W Security level change operation 1 Password input operation 1 By touching 0 to 9 A to F key the password of the changed security level is input e ins a 2 When correcting the input character touch Del al key to delete the correcting character and input the password again 3 After inputting password touch the Enter key Sscip e erence cuccecs When the password matches the normal completion message is displayed When the password does not match an
63. LL 2 OK button Cancel button gt lt Close Return button m Reflect or cancel the changed settings e OK button Touch this button to reflect the changed settings and return to the previous screen Depending on the setting item the GOT restarts e Cancel button E Touch this button to cancel the changed settings and return to the previous screen z lt e PX Close Return button q Touch this button to display the following dialog box If the settings are not changed the dialog box is not displayed Operate following the message of the dialog box Settings have been changed Do you want to discard the changes INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 1 3 Utility Display 1 13 WE Keyboard operation 7 Touch the numerical value to be changed 2 Keyboard for numerical input is displayed and cursor is displayed simultaneously The key board display position chanegs by the position of numerical value touched At the time of numerical input displayed in the position which will not interrupt the inputting Communication setting Standard I F Setting Assign Ethernet I F Channe l Dr iver assign RS232 DV suppl ChNo AZ QnA L QCPU L QJ7 1024 hNo RS422 485 ChNo None ooo l O Extend I F Setting Extend F 1 st Lho None Cid Cursor g None None 3rd 0 None Definition of ChNo O None 5 8 External device Other connection 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC co
64. Manual GT11 Handy GOT User s Manual E GT10 manuals GT10 User s Manual A 14 Manual Name Manual Name Packaging Stored in CD ROM Stored in CD ROM Packaging Stored in CD ROM Manual Number Model code JY997D17501 09R815 JY997D20101 JY997D20102 09R817 Manual Number Model code JY997D24701 09R819 QUICK REFERENCE WE Creating a project Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3 e GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 1 2 2 2 e GT Designer2 Version2 Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual For GOT1000 Series Setting available functions on GT Designer3 Creating a screen displayed on the GOT Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency of drawing Setting details for figures and objects i e GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 1 2 2 2 e GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual For GOT1000 Series 1 3 2 3 3 3 Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action Setting functions to use peripheral devices e GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Simulating a created project on a personal computer Ai f P e GT Simulator2 Version2 Operating Manual E Connecting a controller to the GOT Obtaining information of Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT Connecting Mitsubishi products to the GOT o e GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for
65. USB mouse keyboard zez GOT setup Operation USB mouse keyboard setting O i 2 Toq Sins Use USB mouse NO 2 5 Inter lock with mouse cursor touch operation NO Fa Use USB keyboard No 8 Z S USB keyboard type Japanese 106 keyboard O a LW O E USB mouse keyboard setting operation S Lu E i ener ee 1 To use the USB mouse touch the setting item of O GOT setup Operation USB mouse keyboard setting LL Use USB mouse m Use USB mouse The setting content is changed by touching Inter lock with mouse cursor touch operation w Use USB keyboard 1 YES RY NO USB keyboard type Japanese 106 keyboard l O ad Z O O lt x O OK Cancel INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Vv Continued to next page APPENDICES 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation 2 61 2 62 Use USB mouse Inter lock with mouse cursor touch operation Use USB keyboard USB keyboard type Japanese Ih Yooard 2 Cancel Use USB mouse Inter lock with mouse cursor touch operation Use USB keyboard USB keyboard type Japanese SS d 3 Cance Use USB mouse Inter lock with mouse cursor touch operation Use USB keyboard USB keyboard type 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation Japanese 106 keyboard 4 S To move the mouse cursor to the touched position touch the setting item of Interlock with mouse cursor tou
66. and image quality can be set Item The target for the video settings and the preview channel can be selected and the captive area Video Display gn ue PONORA aeon and vertical SO direction and image quality color tone Settings contrast brightness color intensity can be set The captive area and image quality can be set for each channel For GT D ot Seti For GT escription etting range i D Designer2 Designer3 Channel 1 2 3 4 lt At factory shipment 1 gt Captive area Horizontal 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt Vertical 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt Image Quality and Color Tone 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt Contrast 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt Brightness 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt Intensity 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt 1 GT1675 VN GT1672 VN GT1662 VN GT1655 V cannot be used 2 Displaying the video display setting GOT setup Main Menu L37 1 3 Utility Display a es Ge Ge Ee Touch GOT setup Communication Setting 3 1 Communication Setting GOT main unit setup GOT main unit setup Touch Video RGB Setting Video Display Setting Video RGB Video RGB Setting Menu Touch Video Display Settings Captive Area Horizont 000 Vertical 000 Image Quality ColorTone 000 Contrast Brightnss Intensity Touch an
67. and then the setting is changed Drive for backup data Trig bkup setting 2 If touch the OK button the changed settings ei ed are reflected and the screen returns to the op eee Debug Setting screen D If touch the Cancel button the changed 1 settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Debug Setting screen A I X 4 2 Debug Setting 4 2 3 Trigger backup settings When the conditions of the trigger specified for each backup setting Rise Time are met the GOT automatically backs up data How to use the trigger backup refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series User s Manual Extended Functions Option Functions for GT Works3 11 BACKUP RESTORE e GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 11 Backup restore E Display operation of trigger backup setting Debug setting Main menu gt gt 1 3 Utility Display a ee SS a Touch Backup restoration Debug Backup restoration setting Touch Trigger backup setting Debug setting Trigger backup setting setting Debug Debug setting Backup restration setting Trigger backup setting No Backup setting T Detai SYSIBKUP SYS2BKUP 02 00 Mon Wed Fri SYS3BKUP i 0004 SYS4BKUP 12 00 Tue Thu Sat Touch an item to change settings Check the file register changes E Execute E Not execute OK Cancel E Trigg
68. be carried out for files The USB drive only stores log files and cannot be displayed For details of Advanced Alarm refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 10 ALARM eGT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 8 ALARM Function Description none R Reference 5 Designer2 Designer3 Information E The display example of alarm i Displays name data size creation date and time of file or p a i P display of files information folder and folders MRecord save operation GiA gt Converts the G1A file of advanced alarm log file to CSV 2 G1A CSV conversion operation G1A CSV conversion file TXT conversion operation G1A gt G1A CSV conversion operation G1A TXT conversion TXT conversion operation Converts the G1A file of advanced alarm log file to TXT ret file Deletion Deletes file 3 Deletion operation Copy Copys file file 4 Copy operation Graph SS ee the advanced alarm watch result by historical 5 Giaphoperation graph or tally graph W The display operation of alarm information Main menu Data control Data control lt F gt 1 3 Utility Display omo ee es EE x a aoe lo Touch Data control Touch Data control es Alarm information Alarm information Data control Data control Alarm info elect drive is A Built in CF card A A AA ame Size Date Time 0 1KB 13 14 E USB drive Operate Extended alarm lo
69. button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Display screen Cancel 2 48 2 2 Display Settings 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation 2 3 1 Operation setting functions Setting regarding GOT operation can be set The items which can be set are described below If touch the each item part the respective setting becomes possible me For GT For GT Function Description Setting range Designer2 Designer3 Buzzer volume OFF SHORT LONG Buzzer volume setting can be changed O setting lt At factory shipment SHORT gt Window move UTILITY FUNCTION N amp E D aT ZZD LO gt E W ggo nH oO Oo aog Whether turn ON OFF buzzer when move window can ON OFF buzzer volume be selected lt At factory shipment ON gt O setting Security setting Security level change screen can be displayed 5 2 screen change 3 2 3 4 Security level change o Toe Utility call key Utility call key setting screen can be displayed 6 ane Z screen change lt 3 gt 2 3 5 Utility call key setting JE O58 The touch panel sensitivity when touching the GOT ane a screen can be set Key sensitivity setin E g a setting can be changed when double touch is O i made when touching the GOT screen only once For preventing chattering Touch panel reading error can be corrected D Touch panel 7 7 ee lt gt 2 3 6 Adjusting the touch panel position Touch O L panel calibra
70. c Move check ooN 7 Can aie ATAA A A among screen COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS DATA CONTROL INSTALLATION OF APPENDICES 5 1 Diagnostic Functions 5 8 c Move check among screens e Pattern 1 Shape transformation color check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal Pattern 1 e Pattern 2 Shape transformation color check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal ro Parema Pattern 2 5 1 Diagnostic Functions e Pattern 3 Shape transformation color check The overlaped shapes of pattern 1 and pattern 2 are displayed If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal e Pattern 4 Shape Check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal If touch the upper right part of the screen returns to Display check screen k d To Display check The main screen image after the screen information read and write is executed 5 1 Diagnostic Functions ap Ww Q W Q L 5 1 5 Font check E Font check function The font check is a function which confirms fonts installed in GOT The character data of the font is displayed on the upper left part of the screen one by one E D
71. cancel Precautions for operating project data Data check of the file can be executed o Oo The project data to be displayed can be selected o Oo Reference Display example of project information Operation of project information 2 Delete operation 3 Copy operation 4 Property display operation 5 Data check operation 6 Download operation setup operation b Setup operation 7 Upload setup cancel operation b Setup cancel operation When the OS boot drive is set to A Standard CF Card deleting copying downloading setting up and uploading project data are not available 6 3 OS Project Information 6 113 UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DEBUG SELF CHECK X m za 8 lt x m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES WE Display operation of project information Main menu Data control OS project information lt gt 1 3 Utility Display Touch Data control OS project information a l Project information Project information Data control 0S project info Project info Belect drive C ize Date Time 07 08 08 10 15 176K 03 28 08 22 38 N A Built in CF card G1 C Flash Memory E USB drive Operate Project data file 6876KB File Delete Copy Property Data check Download
72. completed touch the Enter key b Authentication method Switch the authentication method Touch the item to switch the display 1 Rater between Operator name password External auth general Fingerprint auth Operator name password When External auth general or Fingerprint authentication is selected the check box for Operator name password is displayed If the check box is selected the login is also enabled with Operator name password X m za 8 lt x m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Continued to next page APPENDICES 6 2 Various Data Control 6 95 6 96 Faseword expiration date edit Input password expiration date Password expiration date ss jf ttf lt gt ae De 1j2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Sees IES See Ed The function setting editing process is completed If you cloge the screen before pressing OE button the changed data will be digecarded Do you want to proceed 6 2 Various Data Control c Touch Password expiration date and then the Password expiration date edit dialog box is displayed Input the expiration date When the input is completed touch the Enter key Initial position input Set the initial position input byte count of external authentication ID from among the data read from the external authentication device Valid byte count i
73. contrast Contrast 100 to 100 a Ww 9 brightness color intensity can be set lt At factory shipment 0 gt ct Brightness 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt Intensity 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt 2 Display operation of Video setting COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING Main Menu GOT setup GOT main unit setup Eg 1 3 Utility Display GOT setup O 5 i Touch O Multimedia settin Communication setting gl L_ gt 3 1 Communication Setting x O m T O Video setting T Multimedia D Multimedia B i O setting MENS Hor izont 000 Vertical 000 2 Color Tone 000 T Contrast 000 l Br ightnss 000 Touch an item lt Intensity 000 lt to be set 2 Touch Video setting INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 2 21 3 Operation of Video setting 1 To change the captive area or image quality touch the display section of each item Captive Area Refer to step2 to step5 Image Quality Refer to step6 to step9 MI Captive Area Horizont 000 Vertical 000 Image Quality ColorTone 000 Contrast 000 Brightnss 000 Intensity 000 d 2 The captive area horizontal direction vertical direction can be changed y 2 4 E X Video setting 1 f 3 Captive Area T l m 5 Hor izont 1 000 a y h h h h Ve
74. e Execution keys for each function 6 82 6 2 Various Data Control b Operator information edit screen Touch the Add button or touch the Edit button with the operator information selected on the Operator information management screen and then the Operator information edit screen is displayed T The operator information can be edited 5 Jperator information edit gt OperatorName a Operator ID b Level c Password d jv Make a permanent password e f g 9 H Lu 225 6 rh oS aoe OK Cance z 2 No Item Description cine a0 Oo WU fs The operator name to be edited is displayed or input an operator name to be added Up to 225 a Operator Name TA 16 alphanumeric characters E O O A The operator ID to be edited is displayed or input an operator name to be added b Operator ID Setting range 1 to 32766 Maximum number of registrations 255 The operator security level to be edited is displayed or input an operator security level to be C Level c added 0 to 15 d Password Input a password D 5 Make a permanent Switches the setting of the item disabled and enabled m e a password _ Disabled V Enabled Switches whether to use the external authentication ID f Use ext auth ID Not Used V Used x The external authentication ID is displayed or input an external authentication ID a Fingerprint authentication ID setting ra
75. etc which can be 7 Operation switch carried out in Project information Number of folders and 8 files Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders X m Z O oO lt x m wl Hinr Displayed folders and files For the folders and files displayed refer to the following K gt 6 1 4 Display file INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 6 3 OS Project Information 6 115 E Operation of project information 1 Display operation of project information a 7 Touch the drive in Select drive The project on aa i data in that drive will be displayed ees 2 Touch the project data It is then selected and highlighted 3 Refer to the following for operation of delete copy property data check download upload Md ae as Delete gt 2 Delete operation Delete cony Proverty Data check Downtoad Uptoaa _ CODY eeeeeeee 3 Copy operation Property r gt 4 Property display operation Data check 5 Data check operation Download setup See eee eee z 6 Download operation setup operation Upload setup cancel E eae eee eee ee r 7 Upload setup cancel operation 4 Touching gt lt button closes the screen 2 Delete operation This operation deletes the selected file Touch and sele
76. files in this folder 1 files Select all files GIPSCSY GIPSTXT Create61P Execute Cancel selection Copy Move Rename createrotder Del rogram Data Control Advanced Recipe Information Advanced Recipe Record List File Name A PROJECTI RECIPE1 ARPOOO01 G1P Setting No 1 Name Recipe No 1 No AttrRecord Comment Date Time rocess sett ing 2 P Process 2 setting 3 Process 3 setting 4 rocess 4 setting Save record Match records Delete Device PLC G0T GOTSPLC Value Load record GOT gt PLC Record Mo 1 Record Comment Process 1 setting Do you want to load record Process completed 6 2 Various Data Control 1 2 Touch the check box of the recipe file to select the file Touch the Execute button As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed select the record comment to which you want to load the device value If touch the button the dialog box shown left is displayed If touch the OK button starts loading record When loading is completed completion dialog box is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog box 11 Record save operation Device value of a controller is saved in the selected record 7 Touch the check box of the recipe file to select the file Touch the Execute button Data control Data control Advanced Recipe information E USB drive Free space 477 0MB
77. flash memory C drive 2 The USB memory can be used from Utility MEn 7 3 2 Installing using the data control function Utility 2 When using the project data stored in the Standard CF Card A drive or extended memory card B drive with the GOT hold the CF card installed to the GOT For the USB memory store the project data to the Standard CF Card A drive extended memory card B drive or Built in flash memory C drive 6 1 Data Storage Location 6 1 UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DEBUG SELF CHECK X m za 8 lt x m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES E At maintenance E GOT main unit Resource data upload C drive EES METET gt Built in flash memory N Copy Copy GT Designer3 a GT Designer2 A drive E drive Copy files on Standard CF card USBdrive Oop Windows B drive Extended memory card OQ O CF card Operation Log USB memor when installed in GOT CF card y CF card USB memory unit CF card extension unit when installed when installed when installed in GOT in PC in PC Alarm Recipe Inserting Removing Install Download Write Upload Read eee The data of the build in flash memory Project data etc can be saved even if the battery voltage becomes
78. function switch utility can be set as a touch switch that is displayed on a user created screen by GT Designer3 or GT Designerz2 Main menu Special function switch Utility For the details of the special function switch refer to the following lt gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 2 6 Setting Special Function Switch eGT Designer2 VersionL Screen Design Manual 6 2 5 Setting items of special function switch 1 3 Utility Display Locking the utility display by password When you try to display the utility main menu while the password is set to the GOT by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 the display for password input will be appeared The password setting of GT Designers is in the common menu The password setting of GT Designer2 is in the common menu Please input password 1 8 9 Aj B E O A Del Enter When the password is not matched displays the error message The password is wrong When touching the OK button the screen returns to the monitor screen 1 Input operation of password 1 Input the password after touching 0 to 9 A to F key 2 Define the password by touching Enter key after password input 3 To correct the input character touch Del key to delete the correcting character and reinput retype the new character 2 Password input cancel operation When button is touched it returns to the monitor screen Refer to the following fo
79. functions related to the troubleshooting are troubleshooting displayed O Logging data collected by the high speed data logger module and the LCPU can be Log viewer O browsed and the logging data can be read via the GOT Motion SFC The motion SFC program and devices in the motion controller CPU Q series can be monitor monitored Motion program This function is available for a motion controller OS SV43 special model SV43 editor For details of this function please contact our company O 4 1 2 Display operation of monitor screens Main menu Monitor screens Debug e Monitor A screens the debug to be operated Debug is displayed For System monitor Cmo Com Driver 4 gt jou 2 wesc nena 4 2 4 1 Monitor Screens 4 2 Debug Setting Z O O 4 2 1 Q L QnA ladder monitor setting 5 a Storage locations and others for data to be used for the ladder monitor function can be set E Saving the ladder data cuts out the need for reading the ladder data from PLC CPU at the next GOT start up enabling to start the ladder monitoring earlier Refer to the following manual for details of the ladder monitoring function 9 eGOT1000 Series User s Manual Extended Functions Option Functions for GT Works3 Lu eGOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 22 S zei A i To For GT For GT Function Description Setting range Designer2 Designer3 C Flash Memory B M
80. installed MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link IE Controller Network Network status ee l communication unit GT15 J71GP23 SX CC Link IE Field Network 5 1 8 display communication unit GT15 J71GF13 T2 or CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Ethernet status Heci Sends a ping to check the Ethernet connection status 5 1 9 chec 5 1 1 Self check function Carries out self check of screen data hardware or memory etc 5 1 5 1 Diagnostic Functions 5 1 2 System alarm E System alarm function System alarm is the function to display error code and error message when an error occurs in GOT controller or network System alarms can be reset on the System alarm display screen For details of system alarm refer to the following manual L eGT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 11 ALARM eGT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 8 ALARM WE Display operation of system alarm Main menu Self check 3 1 3 Utility Display Touch Self check Diagnostic functions System alarm display Self check Diagnostics System alarm GOT error Reset 480 Communication channel not set Set channel number on Uti lity 12 51 32 CPU error No Error Network error No Error Diagnostic functions System alarm Touching Reset resets the system alarm display in the GOT error 5 1 Diagnostic Functions 5 2 UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND
81. is displayed Do you want to proceed Input the administrator password This saves unsaved changes Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key 4 When the administrator password is correctly The export process of operator input the dialog box shown left is displayed and information Tile is completed the operator information stored in the GOT is exported to a CF card file name AUTHINF G1U l ag _ 2 lt a lt m 6 2 Various Data Control 6 91 E Password change 1 Password change function The passwords to be used for the operator authentication can be changed For the password change log into the GOT in advance with the operator name corresponding to the password to be changed 2 Display operation of password change Main menu Data control Data control 1 3 Utility Display Sql Touch Data control Toto Data control Touch Operator Information Password change perator setting menu EN Operator management Password change Password change Password Input a present password 1 Function 01d password Oo 6 92 6 2 Various Data Control 3 Password change operation l Operator management feed Password change Password cha Input a present password
82. item to be set 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings UTILITY FUNCTION O Z Lu N Z 2 z Lu a O O a zz IO gt Ww LIN l Q nn O aog COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK DEBUG INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 14 3 Operating the video display setting i Channel CHT cH2 cH3 chal Captive Area Horizont 000 Vertical 000 Image Quality ColorTone 000 Contrast 000 Brightnss 000 Channel cA cha CHS chal Captive Area Up Down Vertical 000 B H d Default Confi rn E Left Right 4 Hor izont l wa n Changes are discarded if you close s the window before pressing Confirm Do you want to proceed 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings tw Select a video channel No to be displayed The video image for the selected channel No is previewed To change the captive area or image quality touch the display section of each item Captive Area Refer to step3 to step6 Image Quality Refer to step7 to step10 The captive area horizontal direction vertical direction for the selected channel No can be changed 2 4 akg Moves the Moves the Moves the captive area a captive area captive area a certain distance to the touched certain distance in the direction position in the direction Touching
83. line by one line If touch the Al 4 button screen scrolls up down by one screen If touch the gt lt the property display is closed and returned to the previous screen Select a data check target file and touch the Data check button The data check is executed and the result is displayed by the dialog box shown left If touch the OK button the dialog box is closed 6 2 Various Data Control 6 77 i DATA CONTROL 6 78 5 Download operation Transfers the special data written in the A drive Standard CF Card B drive Extended memory card or E drive USB drive to the C drive Built in flash memory The GOT monitors C drive data This item explains using the A drive Special data to be stored in a CF card When storing the project data from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 to CF card select C Built in flash memory for Project Data in Boot Drive Communicate with Memory Card Boot OS Vv Continued to next page 6 2 Various Data Control LJ Sal Memory Card Write OREA Core OS Write Write Data Project Data OS Special Data Destination Memory Card D v GOT Type ATI 6640x480 v Boot Project Data C Built in Flash Memory v OS C Built in Flash Memory vi C Built in Flash Memory Data control Data corte Special data info x pe lect arive i Kind Name Size Date Time A Built in CF car
84. maintenance function Addition times reset Power on addition time Back light x 1000 H Display Touch key pushingvad Touch key Memory writing tipe Build in flasKQO000 Addition time E Operation of Addition times reset GOT setup GOT maintenance function Addition times reset 1 Power on addition time Back light 1666 x 1000 H Reset Display 1666 x 1000 H Reset ouch key pushing addition times 2 Touch key 1000 x 10000 Reset gt emory writing times Build in flash10000 x 1000 Reset Addition times resetting timing It is convenient to reset addition times when replace backlight display section touch panel or built in flash memory GOT maintenance Touch Addition times reset Touch the Reset button of each item to set 0 for the addition time and addition count If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the GOT maintenance screen If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the GOT maintenance screen 2 4 Maintenance Function 2 71 UTILITY FUNCTION e O Z W 2 zZ 2 3 W fa O an _ Zz5 40E gt Ww LIN Q Oa O aog COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK DEBUG INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 72 2 4 3 GOT start time E GOT start time function GOT start time i
85. mentioned left is displayed o BME If touch OK button deletes the file will be deleted Do you want to proceed If touch Cancel button cancel the deletion 3 When the deletion is completed the completion dialog box is displayed If touch OK button the dialog box is closed Deletion has been completed 6 2 Various Data Control 6 71 6 72 3 Copy operation Copies the selected file J E P SNAP0002 ae 09 02 09 LJ BMP SNAPOOOS E USB drive 469 8kKB 09 02 09 13 07 ea BMP SNAPOOO4 469 8KB 09 02 09 13 09 D BMP SNAPOOO5 469 8KB 09 02 09 13 12 Free space 952 8MB Drive capacity 955 0MB 1 files are selected 469 8KB in total Number of selectable files in this folder 4 files Select all files Cancel selection Copy Rename Del The target file to copy SNAPOOO 1 BMF Do you want to copy the file This folder already contains the file SNAPOQO1 BMP De you want to replace the existing Ti le Modified 08 01 08 00 38 with this one Modified 09 02 09 13 00 Completed the process Succeeded Fal led 6 2 Various Data Control Touch the check box of the file to copy to select the file If touch Copy button the dialog Please select a destination is displayed in the left bottom of the screen If touch the folder of the copy destination the screen display is changed to the folder o
86. names information creating a new advanced recipe folder Writing reading matching record data and deleting device values with the advanced recipe record list Continued to next page N W S O Z m Q A lt APP 3 Applicable X Not applicable Not required GT Refe Item Functions overview GT16 GT15 SoftGOT GT11 a 1000 Converting logging files in G1L format gt CSV TXT format x x Logging Deleting copying moving logging files information changing logging file names Deleting logging folders creating a new a x x logging folder Converting operation log files in G10 format CSV TXT format x O Operation log Deleting copying moving operation log files information changing operation log file names Deleting operation log folders creating a new x x operation log folder Data control Hard copy Deleting copying hard copy files changing information hard copy file names x x x Data Deleting or checking special data files contro Deleting special data folders downloading Special data special data stored in the CF card USB X information 7 o memory to the C drive Built in flash memory Adding editing deleting importing exporting Operator operator information changing passwords information setting the automatic logout time password x expiration date and external authentication ID Fingerprint Adding deleting fingerprint information x information Installing or uploading OS d
87. network added to the network afterwards O Z W N a 2 z W a O O a zz LO gt Ww LIN a nan O nog 1 For checking IP address duplication Use CoreOS with the version 05 10 00AG or later 2 When the IP address duplication is not checked a When the IP address of the GOT is set to 192 168 0 18 the IP address duplication check is not COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING performed b Depending on the device to connect with the GOT the IP address duplication check may not be performed 3 When the GOT is added to the network in which a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT exists GOT goes into offline status and the following dialog box appears s W QO IPF FLAP BELTED BSF EFL ERKI T FLAS BELT CRE The IP address is dupul icated Remove the communication cable and specity the IP address again after rebooting the GOT y IFES HANEM T FARREN A PE 5 IP Address 192 168 0 181 MAC Address 08 00 70 38 C0 60 2 C l e When correcting the same IP address of other device as that of GOT z After correcting the same IP address of other device as that of GOT touch the Reboot GOT button to 3 restart the GOT gt e When changing the IP address of GOT q Touch the Clear IP Address button to clear the IP address of GOT After touching the Reboot GOT button to restart the GOT change the IP address of GOT by the utility INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOO
88. notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at our discretion In some of three ca
89. of this chapter only BootOS and standard monitor OS are described For CoreOS refer to the following 7 5 CoreOS ad e 15 Ae Os om O2 na Ge O A we On On Wu e z e E m lt A zZ APPENDICES 7 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation Under mentioned BootOS and Standard monitor OS are necessary to execute utility OS name Function overview Storage location BootOS Standard monitor O Built in flash memory C G1BOOT Requied for the control of GOT and the communication between PC and GOT Installed at factory shipment BootOS can be installed from GT Designer3 GT Designer2 or the CF card When installed from GT Designer3 GT Designer2 or the CF card GOT is initialized to be the factory shipment status Standard monitor OS must be pre installed in the GOT when CF card that stores data with the OS boot drive set to the A drive installing the BootOS again A G1BOOT Required for the GOT operation as the monitoring function of GOT installation and deletion of the OS file or project data touch key control or displa BEE proj y ey utility screen Built in flash memory function of the screen and guidance 2 Not installed in GOT at factory C G1SYS System screen data shipment Required for display and operation of the user created screen and with the OS boot drive set Designer2 or the CF card or USB TrueType numerical font memory to the A drive 12
90. on the screen F a 5 1 Drives to be used When installing OS at power on use the A or E drive O The B drive cannot be used for OS installation at power on E 2 S MODE switch pressing installation function aE When the CF card or USB memory that stores data with the OS boot drive set to the A drive is used the qo S MODE switch pressing installation function is not available DEG E Operation procedure The S MODE switch is on the back of the GOT as shown below Installation switch S MODE COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING faa Lu QO NM O Lu E O Er Lu ep 1 When installing with CF card 7 Power OFF the GOT switch the CF card access switch to OFF and install the CF card where the BootOS ce standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the CF card interface of the GOT 6 lt 2 Switch ON the CF card access switch of GOT q 3 Power on the GOT Power on the GOT while pressing the install switch S MODE switch on the back of the GOT 1 point press installation function 4 The BootOS or standard monitor OS is installed in the built in flash memory The CF card access LED is lit during the install execution Do not pull out the CF card or power off the GOT while the CF card access LED is lit ad e 15 ne OF om O2 na Ge O A uz On On Wu e z e E m lt o zZ Now installing BootOS APPENDICES 7 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS In
91. or power OFF the GOT while the CF card access card is lit O H Z O O lt Install now Ee O ad e 15 Oe OF om O2 na Ge O A uz On On Wu e z e E m lt o zZ APPENDICES 7 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card or USB Memory cer 5 GOT restarts automatically after the installation is completed Reboot 6 After confirming that GOT restarted normaly switch OFF the CF card access switch of GOT Confirm the CF card access LED is not lit remove the CF card from the CF card interface of GOT 2 When installing with USB memory Install the USB memory in which BootOS standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the CF card interface of GOT 2 Display the data control function screen Utility on the GOT and install BootOS standard monitor OS from the USB drive to GOT T ha OF i le Instal Upload Property Data check Touch Install 3 The USB memory access LED is lit during install execution Do not pull out the CF card or power OFF the GOT while the USB memory access LED is lit Install now 4 GOT restarts automatically after installation is completed Reboot 5 After confirming normal restart confirm that the USB memory access LED is not lit Display the USB device status screen and remove the USB memory from the USB interface of GOT 3 4 3 7 USB device status display 7 8 7 3 Bo
92. proceed If touch Cancel button the deletion is canceled DATA CONTROL 3 When the deletion is completed the completion dialog box is displayed If touch OK button the dialog box is closed Deletion has been completed 6 2 Various Data Control 6 9 6 10 4 Copy operation Copies the selected file Data _control Data control Alarm info Select drive A Free space 477 9MB y Drive capacit 483 OMB 1 files a Number _of selectab re selected 0 1KB in total es i e efil n this folder 1 files ese The target file ta copy AAMOOG01 G14 Please select destination Exec Cancel Do you want to copy the file This folder already contain AAMOOOO1 G14 s the file Do you want to replace the existing file Modified 09 03 09 13 27 with this one Modified 09 03 09 13 23 Completed the process Succeeded Failed 0 6 2 Various Data Control Touch the check box of the file to copy to select the file If touch Copy button the message Please select a destination is displayed in the left bottom of the screen If the copy destination folder is touched the screen display is changed to the folder of copy destination At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders If touch Exec button the following dialog box shown left is displayed
93. set to A Standard CF Card deleting and downloading special data are not available W Special data information display operation Main menu Data control Data control pE 3 Utility mEes Poe Jom ns LSS ae 4 TT a Touch Data control Data control Touch Special data information Special data information USB drive Operate Project data file 68 76KB Delete Property Data check Download 6 74 6 2 Various Data Control W Special data information display example Data control Data control Special data info Size Date Time A i Built in CF card 5 T DIK 31S SLOb U o o m Ea CIRDAT m 03 28 08 22 38 UTILITY FUNCTION C Flash Memory E USB drive OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP Delete Property Data check Down load B COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING Number Item Description The drive by which a file or folder is displayed can be selected When CF card or USB memory is not installed the following drives are not displayed 1 Select dri 1 aa CF card A Built in CF card B Memory card USB memory E USB drive D 5 2 Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder TT In the case of file displays the extension in the case of folder displays DIR Q Displays the name of special data in the selected drive 3 Name When the name exceeds 18 characters the 19th and later char
94. the operator must be registered in the operator information Refer to the following for details of operator information 6 2 7 Operator information Refer to the following for precautions when registering fingerprints X gt 2 For registering operator 7 Inthe fingerprint information management touch the Contents registered list ean ea cas password Adnini sett ing EX contents registered list 2 The administrator password authentication screen is displayed Fingerorint information management rator password dministra rd authentication Password 3 After the administrator password is correctly input a list of fingerprint IDs registered in the fingerprint unit is displayed Fingerprint ID E j Number of registered fingerprints 0000001 0000002 0000003 0000004 0000005 os 4 To register a fingerprint ID touch the REG n button o Touch the DEL button after selecting a fingerprint ID to delete the selected ID Touch the DEL ALL button to delete all the registered fingerprint IDs l ag _ 2 lt a lt m Continued to next page 6 2 Various Data Control 6 101 6 102 Fingerprint ID 0000001 Select total count Finger 1 Fingerprint ID 0000001 Select total count Finger 2 Fingerprint ID 0000001 Select t
95. unit No Item Description Displays the communication data link status of the host station D Link in prog 3 Com Status PERSA Once B Pass stopped Testing Offline Offline Displays the cause of the interrupted communication baton pass of the host station Normal Comm Cable disconnection Disconnecting returning to system Offline Offline test H W test Offline test self loopback test 4 Cause of Ssp Offline test shipping test Displays the cause of the interrupted data link cyclic transmission of the host station Normal Comm StopOrder D Link observation timer time up Slave stations do not exist Param not rcvd Host out of range 5 Cause of Stop Host reservation Dup Host No Dup Master Sta Master detected Sta No not set Param Err Other Params in comm CPU stop error Invalid ring configuration 5 27 5 1 Diagnostic Functions d Unit error information Displays the number of unit errors and the error codes No Description 7 Error histories of 16 errors are displayed in 16 lows from the latest l E e Link scan time information Displays the link scan time 2 No Description Current LS time Displays the current link scan time o A a 8 Max LS time Displays the maximum link scan time 2b T N Min LS time Displays the minimum link scan time a i a Constant LS time Displays the link scan time set in the parameter nog f Host station line status Displays the connection status
96. up down by one line If touch 4 button the screen scrolls up down by one screen Touch a check box to select the file For operation of operating switches refer to the following G10 gt CSV G10 TXT lt gt 2 Operation of G10 CSV conversion G10 TXT conversion Delete lt gt 3 Delete operation CODY esia lt 4 Copy operation MOVE ccccceeeees 5 Move operation Rename lt gt 6 Rename operation Create Folder 7 Folder create operation LAGU E 8 List display Latest lt gt 9 Latest display If touch gt lt button the screen is closed 2 Operation of G10 CSV conversion G10 TXT conversion Operation log file G10 file is converted to CSV file or Unicode text file that can be displayed edited on personal computer Data control Data control Operation log information i PROJECT 1 OPELOG gt Built in CF card Size Date Time LOG_ 20090730 0000 0 2KB 07 30 09 15 54 15 50 E USB drive 0 2KB LOG_20090730 or 8 7KB 09 02 09 LOG_20090730 0002 1 0KB 09 02 09 E G10 JOPELOG_20090902 000G 0 2KB 09 02 09 ree space 954 5MB Drive capacity 955 OMB 1 files are selected 2 Oe in rae Nurber f ae Files i in this folder 6 files Select all files C ea A PRO EC uo A Built in CF card ce Size Date Time
97. upper left corner at factory shipment COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING Menu call key 1 point touch on the upper left corner Main menu Ff faa Lu QO The menu call key can be set by the GOT utility GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 For the setting method of the utility call key refer to the following O E lt 3 2 3 5 Utility call key setting i eGT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals H 4 9 GOT Display and Operation Setting eGT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 3 8 Setting of GOT Display and Operations GOT Setup T H Z O O lt x QO INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 1 3 Utility Display 1 9 1 10 1 Prohibited simultaneous 2 point presses Do not touch 2 points or more on the GOT screen simultaneously Touching 2 points or more simultaneously may activate a part other than the touched point 2 When setting menu call key to 1 point When having set Pressing time of the menu call key setting screen to other than 0 s Keep pressing the touch panel for the period set to Pressing time or more before leaving the finger from the touch panel For menu call key setting refer to the following L 2 3 5 Utility call key setting 3 When touching special function switch utility If you touch the special function switch utility while user created screen is displayed the main menu is displayed The special
98. 0 10 23 09 00 21 10 23 09 00 13 Switch applications 10 23 09 00 06 Switch applications 10 23 09 00 03 Switch applications 10 23 09 00 02 B 1 Touch switch Application switching 10 23 09 00 02 Screen switching Base 10 23 09 00 01 Switch applications 10 23 09 00 00 Switch applications Program Data Control Operation Log Information Operation Log Data List File Name A ProjectT 0PELOG OPELOG_20101023_0001 610 A D 2010 Date Time Screen No Operation 10 23 09 05 50 Switch applications 10 23 09 05 50 Adjust External device 10 23 09 05 48 Screen switching Base 10 23 09 05 48 Switch languages 10 23 09 05 48 Station No switching Common 10 23 09 05 48 Switch appl ice Off line mode 10 23 09 05 48 Display syste ENG Search completed 10 23 09 05 48 Switch appl ice Moni tor 10 23 09 05 45 Start GOT 10 23 09 03 44 Switch appl ice 10 23 09 02 20 Switch appl ice 10 23 09 02 05 Switch appl ice 10 23 09 01 50 Switch appl ice 10 23 09 01 47 Switch appl ice 10 23 09 01 59 Switch appl ice 10 23 09 01 37 Switch appl ice 10 23 09 01 07 Switch appl ice 10 23 09 01 06 Switch appl ice 10 23 09 00 40 Switch appl ice 10 23 09 00 21 Switch appl ice 10 23 09 00 13 Switch applications 10 23 09 00 06 Switch applications 10 23 09 00 03 Switch applications 10 23 09 00 02 B 1 Touch switch Application switching 10 23 09 00
99. 0 lt At factory shipment 0 gt 1 GT1675 VN GT1672 VN GT1662 VN GT1655 V cannot be used 2 Adjust when a noise is displayed along the horizontal direction or characters are blotted or the contours are unclear 2 Displaying the RGB display settings Main Menu GOT setup 1 3 Utility Display GOT main unit setup a es es E ernie eit AN Touch GOT setup GOT main unit setup Video RGB setting Communication setting gt 3 1 Communication Setting RGB Displ tti Video RGB isplay settings Video RGB Settings RGB Display Preview Channel CH1 cH2 Input Signal Touch ClockPhase 000 RGB Display hee ant S000 Tone naam f Vertical 000 to be set Settings 2 16 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 3 Operating the RGB display setting Zz 7 Select an RGB channel No to be displayed 2 The RGB image for the selected channel No is z previewed E me Peale EPS 2 The clock phase and screen display position horizontal direction vertical direction can be Channe CHT CH changed Input Signal ClockPhase 000 4 O Z gt j Display Position tu Horizont 000 gt a ao Vertical 000 467 AAN 7 ao Changes the Changes the Changes the Oo 2 number a certain number to the number a a0 amount in the touched certain amount direction position in the direction 3 When touching the Confirm but
100. 0 23 09 06 58 10 23 09 06 58 10 23 09 06 58 10 23 09 06 56 10 23 09 05 53 10 23 09 05 53 10 23 09 05 53 10 23 09 05 53 Date descending Screen switching Base Station No switching Common Display system language Switch applications Switch applications Screen switching Base Station No switching Common Display system language Switch applications A D 2010 Date Time Screen No Operation Change To _ 10 23 09 09 55 Switch appl ications Operation Log ES 10 23 09 09 52 Switch applications Utility al 10 23 09 09 52 B 1 Touch switch Application switching 10 23 09 09 51 Screen switching Base IBASE_1 10 23 09 09 51 Switch applications Moni tor 10 23 09 09 49 Switch applications Utility 10 23 09 09 28 Switch applications Operation Log 10 23 09 09 25 Switch applications Utility 10 23 09 09 25 B 1 Touch switch Application switching 10 23 09 09 22 B 1 Numerical Input 23 10 23 09 09 16 Screen switching Base BASE 1 10 23 09 09 16 Switch applications Moni tor 10 23 09 08 30 Switch applications Ladder edi tor 10 23 09 08 30 B 1 Touch switch Application switching 10 23 09 08 29 Screen switching Base BASE 1 10 23 09 08 28 Switch applications Moni tor 10 23 09 07 21 Switch applications Ladder monitor 10 23 09 07 21 B 1 Touch switch Application switching L Program Data Control Operation Log Information Operation Log Data List A D 2010 Date Time 10 23 09 09 55 10 23 09 09 52
101. 0 8XB Phone 44 0 1707 27 61 00 Fax 44 0 1707 27 86 95 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Office Tower Z 14 F 8 12 1 chome Harumi Chuo Ku Tokyo 104 6212 Phone 81 3 622 160 60 Fax 81 3 622 16075 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION Inc 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 Phone 1 847 478 21 00 Fax 1 847 478 22 53 EUROPE FRANCE IRELAND ITALY POLAND RUSSIA SPAIN JAPAN USA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC GEVA Wiener Stra e 89 AT 2500 Baden Phone 43 0 2252 85 55 20 Fax 43 0 2252 488 60 TECHNIKON Oktyabrskaya 19 Off 705 BY 220030 Minsk Phone 375 0 17 210 46 26 Fax 375 0 17 210 46 26 ESCO DRIVES amp AUTOMATION Culliganlaan 3 BE 1831 Diegem Phone 32 0 2 717 64 30 Fax 32 0 2 717 64 31 Koning amp Hartman b v Woluwelaan 31 BE 1800 Vilvoorde Phone 32 0 2 257 02 40 Fax 32 0 2 257 02 49 INEA RBT d 0 0 BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA Aleja Lipa 56 BA 71000 Sarajevo Phone 387 0 33 921 164 Fax 387 0 33 524 539 AKHNATON 4 Andrei Ljapchev Blvd PO Box 21 BG 1756 Sofia Phone 359 0 2 817 6000 Fax 359 0 2 97 4406 1 INEA RBT d 0 0 Losinjska 4a HR 10000 Zagreb Phone 385 0 1 36 940 01 02 03 Fax 385 0 1 36 940 03 AutoCont C S s r o Technologick 374 6 CZ 708 00 Ostrava Pustkovec Phone 420 595 691 150 Fax 420 595 691 199 Beijer Electronics A S Lykkeg rdsvej 17 DK 4000 R
102. 1675 GT1672 GT1665 GT1662 GT1655 GT16 Abbreviation of GT1695 GT1685 GT1675 GT1672 GT1665 GT1662 GT1655 GT16 Handy GOT GT1595 GT1595 X Abbreviation of GT1595 XTBA GT1595 XTBD GT1585V S Abbreviation of GT1585V STBA GT1585V STBD GT1585 S Abbreviation of GT1585 STBA GT1585 STBD GT1575V S Abbreviation of GT1575V STBA GT1575V STBD GT1575 S Abbreviation of GT1575 STBA GT1575 STBD GT1585 GT157 0 GT1575 V Abbreviation of GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VTBD GT1575 VN Abbreviation of GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VN Abbreviation of GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD GT1565 V Abbreviation of GT1565 VTBA GT1565 VTBD GT156 0 GT1562 VN Abbreviation of GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD GT1555 V Abbreviation of GT1555 VTBD GOT1000 GT1550 GT1555 Q Abbreviation of GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD Series GT1550 Q Abbreviation of GT1550 QLBD GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595 GT1585 GT157 0 GT1560 GT1550 GT1455 Q Abbreviation of GT1455 QTBDE GT1455 QTBD GT1450 Q Abbreviation of GT1450 QLBDE GT1450 QLBD GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455 Q GT1450 Q GT1275 GT1275 V Abbreviation of GT1275 VNBA GT1275 VNBD GT1265 GT1265 V Abbreviation of GT1265 VNBA GT1265 VNBD GT12 Abbreviation of GT1275 GT1265 Abbreviation of GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 Q Abbreviation of GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA GT1150 QLBD GT1450 GT1155 Q GT1150 GT11 Abbreviation of GT1150 GT11 Handy GOT GT1055 Q Abbreviation of GT1055 QSBD
103. 2 Installation operation BootOS and OS which are written in the A drive Standard CF card B drive Extended memory card or E drive USB drive can be installed in GOT This item explains using the A drive Install the CF card to which the BootOS or OS to install is written to the GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card Hardware 8 3 2 E CF card Hardware 8 5 2 Install USB peripheral devices 2 Touch A Built in CF Card for drive selection ontrol 03 project i select drive C lt ind Name ze Date A Built in CF card DIR G1BOOT 07 25 DIR FXIGISYS 7 RP a 1 i 3 Touching Install button starts the install l E USB drive 7 OF i f Install i Up load l Property Data a F_UN a a a a CR Voy 4 Install is completed Restart now GOT restarts if touch OK button 4 When the installation is completed the dialog box shown left is displayed 6 3 OS Project Information 3 Upload operation BootOS and OS in the C drive Built in flash memory can be uploaded to the A drive Standard CF card B drive Extended memory card and E drive USB drive The CF card after uploading can be used for installing the OS on another GOT L gt 7 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS This item explains using the A drive Install the CF card used as the uploading dest
104. 2 1 Display setting functions Setting regarding display is possible The items which can be set are shown below When each item part is touched the respective setting becomes possible nam For GT For GT Items Description Setting range Designer2 Designer3 Language Opening screen time Screen save time Screen save backlight Battery alarm display Brightness Contrast Human sensor Sensor detect level Sensor detect time Sensor off delay 4 2 3 Confirmation of the current language and switching language can be performed regarding with the language displayed by utility and dialog box The title display period at the main unit boot can be set The period from the user stops the touch panel operation till the screen save function starts can be set Whether turn ON or OFF the backlight simultaneously at the screen save function start can be specified Whether to display system alarm when the voltage of the GOT internal battery has dropped can be specified The brightness can be adjusted 2 2 4 Brightness contrast adjustment Screen saver status cancel by human sensor can be set to Effective or Invalid The sensor detect level can be set The time corresponding to the Sensor detect level is displayed setting is disabled When the Sensor detect level is changed the corresponding time is reflected by touching OK button The time period from when t
105. 2 72 H Hard copy information cccccccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 6 68 The display operation of hardcopy TONNAN seian n r ia 6 68 The function of hardcopy information 6 68 The operation of hardcopy information 6 70 I TODS I cscs 5 15 Display operation of I O Check 0060 5 16 I O Check function ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 5 15 I O check operation cc0cceeeees 9 16 5 20 5 29 Installation of boot OS and standard OS 7 1 Boot OS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation cccccseccs sees eeeees 7 2 Boot OS and standard OS installation using CF CI oip E 1 4 Data Control function cece ceccc eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeaes 7 7 Prior preparations for installing boot OS ANd Standard OS ccccsecccecccseeeeeeeaeeeseeeeaeeeaees 7 3 Index 1 The 2 point presses installation function 1 5 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS cceeeees 7 9 L Laader IMONMOF sarakan ea ies aaa 4 1 License management cceecseeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 2 35 Logging information ccccececeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeees 6 38 M Maintenance time Setting cccccseceeeeeeeee eens 2 68 Display operation of maintenance timimg SEMINO roine ait N iai 2 69 Function of the maintenance timing setting 2 68 Operating the maintenance timing setting 2 70 Memo
106. 2 E Install USB peripheral devices a Open Project Information screen to select the file to copy Data control 0S project info Project_info xX Belect drive Kind Name M PROJECTI Size Date Time 4K 08 02 08 03 34 t C Flash Memory 4 If touch Copy button the message Please select a destination is displayed in the left bottom of the screen E USB drive 5 Ifthe copy destination folder is touched the screen display is changed to the folder of copy destination At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders fl i pae IFi le ease select a destination Exec Cance 6 If touch Exec button the dialog box Copy file name mentioned left is displayed PROJECT Copy destination A A PROJECT Copy now ok Vv Continued to next page 6 3 OS Project Information 6 117 UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DEBUG SELF CHECK X m za 8 lt x m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 6 118 Same named project data has already existed Do vou want to overwrite T Copy 1s completed 4 Property display operation Displays the property of the project data in the selected folder 1 Data control 0S project info Date 08 02 08
107. 4 5MB rive capacity 955 OMB S Z F On G10 C8 G10 TXT Latest z z I m E Copy Move Rename CreateFolder Del 3 a S 325 ide EO 1 The target drive can be selected Even if CF card is not installed this message appears 2 Check box If the check box is selected up to 512 files can be selected Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder 3 Kind P TT In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed 2 4 Name Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Rename button etc x L 6 Rename operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation 5 Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 6 Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 7 Creating date amp time The date and time when each file was created are displayed i Multiple files can be selected or canceled at once 2 8 Select all files Cancel selection Touch the Select all files button to select all files iT If the number of the displayed files exceeds 513 the first 512 files are selected 9 Drive size Displays the used entire size of drive selected by select drive 10 Operation switch Execution switch of each function 11 Number of folders and files Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders About
108. 4 Name Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Copy button etc lt gt 4 Copy operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation 5 Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 2 6 Displays the size of the file displayed in Name T 7 Date and time The date and time when each file was created are displayed 5 Select all files Cancel Multiple files can be selected or canceled at once a Touch the Select all files button to select all files If the number of the displayed files is exceeds 513 the first 512 files are selected 9 The size of drive Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection 10 Operation switch Execution switch of each function 11 Number of folders and files Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders Display of creation date and time The creation date and time display is not updated even if a file is created or updated while displaying the alarm information display screen If close the screen currently displayed moving the screen to the folder of the upper hierarchy etc and display the screen again the updated contents are displayed selection X m Z O oO lt x m ee INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Folders and files displayed For the folders and files displayed refer to the following 6 1 4 Display f
109. 5 1 Diagnostic Functions 5 24 d Transient status Displays the number of transient transmission errors and the error codes No Item Description 7 Transmission Err Displays the number of transient transmission errors The histories of 16 latest errors are Other than GT155 _ displayed in 16 rows in reverse chronological order Only the latest error is displayed in arak one row 8 ErrCode e Link scan time information Displays the link scan time No Item Description Current LS time Displays the current link scan time 9 Max LS time Displays the maximum link scan time Min LS time Displays the minimum link scan time Constant LS time Displays the link scan time set in the parameter f Host station line status Displays the connection status of the CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit No Item Description Displays the connection status of the host station Normal IN Loop Back OUT cable disconnection IN Loop Back OUT connecting a line IN Loop Back OUT wrong cable connection OUT Loop Back IN cable disconnection OUT Loop Back IN connecting a line OUT Loop Back IN wrong cable connection Connction Disconnect IN cable disconnection OUT cable disconnection Disconnect IN cable disconnection OUT connecting a line 10 Disconnect IN cable disconnection OUT wrong cable connection Disconnect IN connecting a line OUT cable disconnection Disconnect IN
110. 8 TRANSFERRING DATA z lt QO EREA A habl TSE Please install the Standard 05 ad Ze 15 Oe OF om O2 na ai O A uz On On Wu e z e E m lt o zZ Boots version 02 01 00 E APPENDICES 7 5 CoreOS 7 13 7 5 2 When the CoreOS cannot be installed When the CoreOS cannot be installed confirm the following item If the CoreOS cannot be installed even after checking the following item the error may be caused by a hardware failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative Error The CoreOS installation is not executed even when installing the CF card in the GOT The message is displayed on the GOT 7 14 7 5 CoreOS GOT error Contact your local sales office CF card error Installation will be cancelled Check whether the CF card can be used Optional unit has been connected to extension I F slot The optional unit should be removed before starting installation Installation will be canceled GOT type and OS version do not match Installation will be canceled The version of OS is not acceptable to this GOT Installation will be canceled Confirm the version of OS Memory card access switch is off Turn on the switch and restart the GOT Installation will be canceled Action 1 Check whether the CF card access switch of the GOT is on If the switch is off switch it on 2 The writing from the GT Designer3 or GT De
111. 9 Screen switching Base BASE_1 09 Switch applications oni tor 09 Switch applications Utility Switch applications Operation Log Switch applications Utility Touch switch Application switching Numerical Input 123 Screen switching Base BASE_1 Switch applications Moni tor o 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 09 oo DS ane eee SE OS Switch appl ications Ladder editor Touch switch Application switching F Screen switching Base BASE_1 Switch appl ications Moni tor Switch applications Ladder monitor Touch switch Application switching Screen switching Base BASE_1 Station No switching Common ST_O FE Display system language ENG Switch applications Moni tor Switch applications Off line mode Screen switching Base BASE_1 Station No switching Common ST_O FE Display system language ENG Switch applications Moni tor o ter FOP S000 GCG G ec SGT FSG SCG GFT FFG SG TFG TGCS m n Nn Nn DDD D DJA D Do Do Do D D D D DDD DDD D D ONAN ONO VYVMYIMYNYWWH aN ae ANNANN amp 0 0 0 m o o o ao waama aN ANA G aO a a NNNNA o 6 64 Date descending Vv Continued to next page 6 2 Various Data Control Program Data Control Operation Log Information Operation Log Data List File Name A Project1 OPELOG OPELOG_20101023_0001 610 A D 2010 Date Time Screen No Operation Change To ai
112. 9 14 48 with this one Modified 07 30 09 15 50 Process completed 6 2 Various Data Control When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the conversion If touch the OK button overwrites the file If touch Cancel button cancels the conversion The message of completion is displayed in dialog box when conversion is completed If touch OK button the dialog box is closed 3 Delete operation Folder and file to be used on operation log are deleted 1 Touch the folder to delete or the check box Data contro ii Operat lon logo of the file to delete to select the file Date Time at OPELOG_20090730 0000 0 2KB 07 30 09 15 54 0 OPELOG_20 CSV JOPELOG_ 20090730 0001 CSV JOPELOG_20090730 0002 Ol G10 JOPELOG 20090902 pon E USB drive 30 0 09 02 09 09 02 09 09 02 09 ree space 954 5MB Drive capacity 955 OMB 1 files are selected Me ieee EE ai teed een er 2 0KB in_total Pe itintrap ot eS tte Selected fs 208 In tote of Aai files in this folder 6 files 2 If touch Del button the dialog box mentioned left is displayed a UO eee Gia If touch OK button the file folder is deleted aibe de ed While executing Processing message Do you want to proceed appears on the screen If touch Cancel button the deletion is canceled 3 When the deletion is completed the completion d
113. APPENDICES 2 1 2 Transparent setting Transparent mode setting E Function of the transparent mode When using the multi channel function the channel No of a controller to which the FA transparent function is executed can be specified For the multi channel function refer to the following manual L GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 20 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 2 8 Multi channel Function Also refer to the following manual for the FA transparent function e GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 21 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 53 FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION For GT j For GT Functionf Description Setting range Designer2 Designer3 ChNo The channel No of a controller to which the FA transparent 1 2 3 4 l function is executed can be set lt Default 1 gt O WE Displaying the transparent mode Main menu GOT main unit setup Transparent Mode Setting L gt 1 3 Utility Display Touch GOT setup A GOT main unit setup Transparent made Transparent mode GOT setup GOT main unit setup Transparent mode setting Touch the channel No display area of ChNo KE 2 6 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings E Operation the transparent mode 1 Touching the transparent ChNo numerical part on the left the keyboard is displayed
114. Buzzer volume window move buzzer volume Key sensitivity Key 2341 reaction speed Touch detection mode k ra Security setting o Oo 2 3 4 Utility call key olo 2 3 5 me paianen Touch panel calibration _e 6 2 3 6 O USB mouse keyboard setting px Oo 2 3 7 T O SoftGOT GOT link function setting pox O 2 3 8 z ep VNC server function setting Px f Oo 2 3 9 Maintenance timing setting Oo Oo 2 4 1 Addition times reset amp 2 4 2 5 GOT maintenance O x m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 2 1 1 Time setting E Time setting functions Time setting and displaying of the status of GOT built in battery are possible ie For GT For GT Item Description l Reference Designer2 Designer3 Setup the method to adjust the time between GOT clock data Time setting 1 Time setting and clock data of controller connected to the GOT Clock display Carry out the display and setup of GOT clock data o Oo 2 Clock display 3 GOT internal GOT internal battery Displays GOT internal battery voltage status battery voltage voltage status tat status Changing times When the time is changed on the Time setting amp display screen the changed time is written in a programmable controller even though Adjust or Broadcast is set for Time setting As a result the time of the programmable controller can be changed on the GOT even though
115. C5 E Extended and option function manuals Manual Number Manual Name Packaging Model code SH 080858ENG GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM 1D7MA7 SH 080859ENG GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM 1D7MA8 SH 080863ENG GOT1000 Series User s Manual Extended Functions Option Functions for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM 1D7MB3 E GT SoftGOT1000 manuals Manual Number VERVERA Packagin aE Model code SH 080860ENG GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM 1D7MA9 A 13 E GT16 manuals GT16 User s Manual Hardware GT16 User s Manual Basic Utility GT16 Handy GOT User s Manual E GT15 manuals GT15 User s Manual E GT14 manuals GT14 User s Manual E GT12 manuals GT12 User s Manual VFeTalOrsl aN Felaatss Manual Name VFeTalOrsl aN Felaars VAFeTalOrsl mn Felaatss Packaging Stored in CD ROM Stored in CD ROM Stored in CD ROM Packaging Stored in CD ROM Packaging Stored in CD ROM Packaging Stored in CD ROM Manual Number Model code SH 080928ENG 1D7MD3 SH 080929ENG 1D7MD4 JY997D41201 JY997D41202 09R821 Manual Number Model code SH 080528ENG 1D7M23 Manual Number Model code JY997D44801 09R823 Manual Number Model code SH 080977ENG 1D7ME1 E GT11 manuals GT11 User s
116. CE SETTING N Haesen diveacdee i wolliclose Ifyou touch the button without touching the the window before pressing Confirm Confirm button the dialog box on the left is Do you want to proceed displayed faa Lu QO 8 After completing all the items to set if you touch S the gt lt button the display returns to the i preview screen step1 2 I Lu 9 After completing the settings for all the items 2 you want to change in Video setting when closing Video setting preview with the gt lt button the display returns to Multimedia setting E menu L H Z O O lt POINT z Precautions for setting Incorrect settings may disrupt or stop the video image If this happens returning the settings to their default values restores normal display This phenomenon depends on the video camera or other device connected Use setting values that provide proper display INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 2 23 E Long time recording setting 1 Functions of long time recording settings In the long time recording settings the saving method of video files for long time recording can be set T For GT Description Setting range Designer2 Designer3 At the long time recording whether to start Continuous recording after deleting all the video files Valid Invalid save which are previously recorded or to s
117. CNET 10 MELSECNET H connection i CC Link IE Controll E n i k CC Link IE Controller Network MITSUBISHI Network connection PLC CC Link IE Field Network connection CC Link IE Field Network CC Link connection CC Link Ver 2 ID Intelligent device station Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 Connection to FUJI FA PLC FUJI PXR PXG PXH Connection to YASKAWA PLC YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS Ethernet YASKAWA Connection to YOKOGAWA PLC YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM Ethernet YOKOGAWA Connection to ALLEN BRADLEY PLC EtherNet IP AB Connection to SIEMENS PLC SIEMENS S7 200 SIEMENS S7 300 400 Ethernet SIEMENS S7 Microcomputer connection Computer Inverter connection FREQROL 500 700 MODBUS TCP connection MODBUS TCP AZBIL control equipment connection Azbil SDC DMC Connection to RKC temperature controller RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS 5 15 5 1 Diagnostic Functions WE Display operation of I O Check Main menu Self check Diagnostic functions 1 3 Utility Display a a ee eee een c Touch Self check Diagnostic functions Touch I O check I O check Self check Diagnostics 1 0 check Please select check channel 9 RS232 WE i O check operation 1 Connecting target confirmation If touch CPU button the connecting target confirmation communication check is carried out 7 After the CPU communication starts normally the dialog box mentioned f Pe aes CPU communication check r
118. Card See The drive for storing backup settings including Drive for B Memory card parameters and passwords for controllers can O E backup setting E USB drive be selected lt Default A Standard CF Card gt a 29 A Standard CF Card gE lt Drive for The drive for storing backup data can be B Memory card Su O O FE backup data selected E USB drive TE lt Default A Standard CF Card gt 828 The GOT automatically backs up data when None Rise Time k Trigger backup Wean triggers Rise Time specified for each lt Default None gt O backup setting are met L 3 4 2 3 Trigger backup settings Set the maximum number of backup data to Max of backup be stored Setting range 0 to 50 data When 0 is specified the GOT does not check lt Default 10 gt O the number of backup data to be stored Enable CPU Set whether to enable the CPU No setting or YES NO No setting not lt Default NO gt a O DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 4 2 Debug Setting 4 5 WE Display operation of backup restoration setting Main menu Debug setting L gt 1 3 Utility Display Touch Debug Touch Touch Backup restoration Debug setting setting Backup restore setting Debug Debug setting Backup restration setting Drive for backup setting Drive for backup data Trig bkup setting MY Touch an item to Max of bkup data f 1 50 0 No limit
119. Core OS write Write Data Project Data OS Special Data Boot OS Destination Memory Card D v Write Check GOT Type GT16 640x480 v gai can be written into the memory card Boot Project Data C Built in Flash Memory OS C Built in Flash Memory Write Data Size gt ilt it ac hi it r Project Data 0 Kbyte OS 0 Kbyte Special Data 0 Kbyte S C Untitled Projecti Total 0 Kbyte Base Screen f n addition to the above H E Common Settings use OKbyte GOT RAM E Communication Settings C Communication Settings with GOT IP List E Standard monitor OS Write Memory Card Information EE orinar ation iar C Extended function OS F Option OS E Data Area 0 Kbyte ption Intelligent module monitor data E Free Space 0 Kbyte C motion monitor data Memory Card Write _ Servo amplifier monitor data Language of Special Data English H E After confirming that the GOT is powered off install the CF card in the GOT After installing switch the CF card access switch on Powering the GOT on displays the following screen To cancel the installation power the GOT off and remove the CF card Cores Install ver 02 01 00 E TE Warning ald OFA E Raar aries Shalit EEA Rite ee mu LFA Seah Do You execute the Corels installation The internal memory is initialized and return to the state before factory s
120. Display Position Switching is set to Switch in the advanced alarm popup display setting set either of the following for the utility call key e Setting the position of the utility call key to the upper right or lower left corner e Setting Pressing Time of the utility call key to 1 or more seconds When Pressing Time is set to 0 and the key position is set to the lower left corner the operation is as described below If the positions of the key and the advanced alarm popup display overlap the utility screen appears by switching the display position of the advanced alarm popup display For the advanced alarm popup display refer to the following L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 10 8 Advanced Alarm Popup Display eGT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 8 5 Advanced Alarm Popup Display 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation 2 57 UTILITY FUNCTION O Z Lu N Z 2 z Lu a O Q _ zz LO gt Ww LIN a nn O aog COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK DEBUG INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 3 6 Adjusting the touch panel position Touch panel calibration setting W Touch panel calibration setting function Touch panel reading error can be corrected Normally the adjustment is not required however the difference between a touched position and the object po
121. For operating operation switches refer to the following ae e ee eee L gt a Add operation 6 Sere b Edit operation DEISE osses L3 c Delete operation NGO M L gt d Undo operation Import 005 e Import operation EXDOM scrdscinicacaes f Export operation After all settings are completed touch the Save button and then the settings are saved Touch the XI button without touching the Save button and then the dialog box shown left is displayed a Add operation Add operator information to the GOT Opera Level perator name input OPOOOg blaz lea AC DEL AIVIETRI TTDI TOP A 1008 _ ff lt AC Det Jt tt ft Rater Continued to next page Touch the Add button The Operator information edit screen is displayed and then touch an item to be edited a OperatorName b Operator D c Level d Password e Make a permanent password f Use ext auth ID g Ext auth ID a Touch the OperatorName and then b 6 2 Various Data Control 6 Nr the Operator name input dialog box is displayed Input an operator name Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key Touch the OperatorlID and then the Operator ID input dialog box is displayed In
122. Function of the maintenance timing setting For using the maintenance time notification a battery is required When setting the time or count to notify the maintenance time refer to the life described in Hardware Section 3 2 as a guide The maintenance time notification is output by the following two methods eOutputs to GOT special register GS680 Outputs as system alarm For details of the GOT special register and system alarm refer to the following GT Designer3 Versioni Screen Design Manual Fundamentals eGT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions eGT Designer2 Version L Screen Design Manual 2 68 2 4 Maintenance Function Switching OFF the maintenance time notification output The maintenance time notification setting which has been set once is not switched OFF even if changing its setting Switch OFF the maintenance time notification by the following methods e Execute addition time reset e Switch OFF each bit of maintenance time notification cancel information GS638 UTILITY FUNCTION By using system alarm the message that notifies that the maintenance time is near or it is already maintenance time is displayed For the display of the system alarm refer to the following lt gt Hardware 10 TROUBLESHOOTING For the display of the system alarm refer to the following O Z Lu N Z 2 z Lu a O Q _ zz LO gt Ww LIN a nn O aog K gt G
123. GT Designer2 Carry out the setting of clock setting in GOT set up in Environmental Setting of GT Designers or in System Environment of GT Designer2 To change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting at the display setting of GOT L eGT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 9 GOT Display and Operation Setting eGT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 3 8 Setting of GOT Display and Operation GOT Setup 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 2 Clock display Carry out the display and seting of GOT clock data The setup methods of clock data are shown below If touch the clock display section the keyboard for input is displayed and the clock update Clock setting Adjust 2 13 2010 10 45 24 MON GOT internal battery Norma voltage status stops 2 Input time with the keyboard by referring to the table below Input the scheduled time when the operation of step3 is to be carried out since the input time is reflected at the time of the operation of step3 The day of the week is displayed automatically according to the input date The effective range of clock setting is as follows Jan 1 2000 to Dec 31 2037 Key 0 to 9 ay Del Enter Cancel Cancel Description Input numeric value in cursor position Move the cursor Move the cursor to the left by one character when Del Key is touched
124. GT15 SoftGOT GT11 Ha rence Setting the maintenance notification times for the Maintenance backlight and display timing setting Setting the number of maintenance notifications for touch keys and the built in flash memory Addition times Resetting accumulated hours and counts for reset maintenance time notifications GOT GOT l maintenan ce Displaying the GOT start date and time current GOT start time meas xX X time and accumulated operating hours GOT information Displaying the GOT information the GOT information Displaying the GOT information x x x Assigning channel numbers and communication drivers to communication interfaces x O ee Setting communication parameters Po o f x o O Communi cation Setting or deleting sequence program protection key words canceling sequence program protection status When connecting to FX series x x CPU Communi Communi setting cation cation setting setting Displaying the contents of Ethernet setting Ethernet setting x O changing the host System monitor Starting the system monitor the system monitor See x Ladder monitor Starting the ladder monitor ee x Starting the network monitor the network monitor a x sions Starting the intelligent module monit arting the intelligent module monitor module monitor i i A A Servo amplifier Starting the servo amplifier monitor X x monitor Starting the motion monitor the motion monitor Sheth x Monitor CNC mon
125. GT16 User s Manual Basic Utility e GT16 Handy GOT User s Manual e GT15 User s Manual e GT14 User s Manual e GT12 User s Manual e GT11 User s Manual e GT11 Handy GOT User s Manual e GT10 User s Manual Operating the utility e GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Configuring the gateway function Works3 e GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual e GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Configuring the MES interface function Works3 e GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual e GOT1000 Series User s Manual Extended Functions Configuring the extended function and option function Option Functions for GT Works3 e GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual e GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Using a personal computer as the GOT Works3 e GT SoftGOT1000 Version2 Operating Manual ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS E GOT Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT1695 GT1695M X Abbreviation of GT1695M XTBA GT1695M XTBD GT1685 GT1685M S Abbreviation of GT1685M STBA GT1685M STBD GT1675M S Abbreviation of GT1675M STBA GT1675M STBD GT1675M V Abbreviation of GT1675M VTBA GT1675M VTBD GT1675 VN Abbreviation of GT1675 VNBA GT1675 VNBD GT1672 VN Abbreviation of GT1672 VNBA GT1672 VNBD GT1665M S Abbreviation of GT1665M STBA GT1665M STBD GT1665M V Abbreviation of GT1665M VTBA GT1665M VTBD GT1662 VN Abbreviation of GT1662 VNBA GT1662 VNBD GT1655 V Abbreviation of GT1655 VTBD GT
126. Ladder monitor BASE_1 ST_O FE ENG Moni tor Off line mode BASE_1 ST_O FE ENG KIE Moni tor Search 1 If touch the Latest button the latest one in the operation log files is displayed in a list In the list the following contents can be checked Display items Date Time Screen No Operation type Value after change For operation of operating switches refer to the following Date ascending descending Search 8 a Display order switching operation KL gt 8 b Search operation For the method for displaying the detail of each operation log refer to the following 8 List display E Precautions zZ O 1 Precautions for create delete O Z a Number of characters set for folder or file name when creating folder file T GOT recognizes file location according to path explained below a Specify folder or file name and total characters of path cannot exceed 78 characters E Users only can rename folder or file name Other than folder file name is automatically printed op Example CSV file Path in CF card or USB memory S Q D oa Sec l l WO 2 te 1 character Extension peices 4 characters Drive name 1 character Max 78 characters COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING wel Gime If folder is assigned the hierarchy The mark is displayed between folder name and folder name folder name and file name T
127. N AVION ecg nesstbececdeccteinnshdasonislucifectiwmasdanzedocthextud ddceecubuseadoarbidsnedssbeaidedebedsaceaaspeded 4 12 4 3 3 GOT data package acquisition ssciccteccicceveindenciseceschenvededeconesdsananesteasvadtaswcedeessseceennt wmectioen 4 13 4 34 CNC data VO fUNCHON ssc jaceaaecesnarotnatietsetgemece sed ice tenes tnccnesedscaduadeaesaeucesdecsanctasedadaendeces luecdeen 4 16 43o Memor card TOMA scsi cecieveceesscnsave socsceiesende annie EE EN tices EEEN A ETEA exon 4 16 4 3 6 Memory information cccccccscccssccesecsseecsceceeecececeueceuecececaeecseeseuessueesuessaeeseeeseeessaesneeeess 4 19 4 3 7 USB device status display cccccccccscccescceeeeceeecneeceeecacecsueceuececesseecueessueeeeeseuessaneneeeeas 4 21 AO ORAM CONTON sorore E ETE EE E E SE eenoteateeesen 4 23 4 3 9 Motion program 8SV43 W O oo ccccccccccceeeeeseeeeecaeeeeeseeeesaeeeesseeeeeseeeeesaeeeeseeeeeeaseeesaeeeesaaeees 4 27 5 SELF CHECK at Dago Sie FUNCIONS seuroina ce tcc ences tang eins sve E EE ER 5 1 Si SOUR e Ch TUN OMY sss siia E E e A aa 5 1 SIA OYA A ea E EE A E EEEE E 5 2 Llo Memory NECK seen a a nen ee eee oe ee nee ee nee ee ee eee eee 5 4 oka DAWNO CIEGK Seen ea ene eee eee ee ee ere 5 7 Sko FON CNOC apses Ea EE E E O EE E EEE 5 11 O10 HOUGI DAINCI COCK csiis EE EEEE EEEE EAE 5 13 Si POCOO Er een ee E A E nee ee 5 15 51 8 Ne twork status display osedcrcnch cone nctanastic oenasvaenanaexeeen EE EASED aan A 5 19 5 1 9 Eth
128. NG DEBUG DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 34 c File menu screen Video files of the CF card installed on the multimedia unit can be searched Searched video files can be displayed on the play video screen Select drive MR_MM 838 6K 02 28 12 841 5K 02 28 12 835 3 02 28 12 MMR CF card Number Item Description Screen to display video files in the CF card selected by Select drive or to delete video 1 File menu display screen files 2 Button to switch the display to the play video screen Button to switch the display to the video image screen 4 Exit button Button to exit the multimedia screen switch and to return to the utility screen 5 OK button Button to accept messages 6 Cance button Button to stop messages 7 Message display screen Screen to display error messages etc 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 2 1 6 License management For using functions which require a license register the license for the GOT For releasing a registered license for the GOT also execute on the license management screen aoe For GT For GT Item Description Setting range Designer2 Designer3 UTILITY FUNCTION PC Remote Operation Registers and deletes the license of the PC function Ethernet Remote Operation function Ethernet O O i VNC server function Registers deletes the license of th
129. No O None 5 8 External device 0ther connection 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection oK Cancel 3 14 3 2 Communication Detail Setting GOT NET No GOT PLC No GOT IP Address 192 168 3_ 18 GOT Port No Communication 5001 Download 5014 Default Gateway 0 _0 J Lo 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0_ Retry TIMES Startup Time SEC Timeout Time SEC Delay Time Co x10ms Communication parameter The screen switches to the detail setting screen Set communication parameters from this screen Refer to the following for the setting change operation 1 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Communication parameter setting by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 Set the communication parameters for each communication driver at Communication Settings in Controller Setting of GT Designer3 or in System Environment of GT Designer2 When change the communication parameters after downloading project data change the setting at communication detail setting of GOT lt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface eGT Designer2 Version L Screen Design Manual 3 7 Communication Interface Setting Communication setting 3 2 Communication Detail Setting COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING 3 2 3 Display contents of communication detail setting The contents of communication detail setting varies according
130. O None OF 1 ON Setting Effective 10 MAX 10 0 0 Sec 0 Min 10 Sec Aas ml English N cae fait rpc SEBS S204 2 Deutsch GOT setup Display Language English Opening screen time 5 Sec Screen save time 0 Min O None Screen save backlight Battery alarm display Brightness contrast Setting Human sensor Effect ive Sensor detect level 10 MAX 10 Sensor detect time 0 0 Sec Sensor off delay o Min 10 Sec 2 2 Display Settings 7 Ifthe setting item is touched the Language screen is displayed 2 If touch the language to be displayed the language is selected and the screen returns to the Display screen 3 If touch the OK button the GOT restarts and operates with the changed settings If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Main Menu 1 Selectable languages The system message switch button is displayed only for the selectable languages The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For the relation between the selectable languages and the fonts refer to the following L GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 5 Specifications of Applicable Characters GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 2 3 Specifications of Applicable Characters 2
131. OK button by step4 the dialog mentioned left is displayed for reconfirm Reconfirm whether to format the CF card or USB memory Touch the OK button to start the format Touch the Cancel button to cancel the format of CF card or USB memory When the formatting is completed the completion dialog mentioned left is displayed If touch OK button closes the dialog 4 3 Memory Data Control 4 17 UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES V1 wur a Restrictions on formatting e When use an unformatted CF card or USB memory in GOT format the CF card or USB memory by PC GOT cannot format the unformatted CF card or USB memory e The formatting of GOT does not change the file system Example FAT16 of the CF card or USB memory and inherits the file system before formatting 4 18 4 3 Memory Data Control 4 3 6 Memory information E Memory information functions Displays the flash memory empty area size available for the user of each drive and Boot drive empty area size Confirming memory empty space is enabled without connecting a personal computer E Memory information display operation Main menu Memory data control L 3 1 3 Utility Display Memory data control Touch Memory information Memory information D
132. OO 0 9KB 07 04 08 14 21 SV FARPOOOO 1 0 7KB 07 04 08 14 32 XT RRPO0001 1 4KB 09 03 09 09 23 1 files are selected 0 9KB in total selectable files in this folder 3 files Select all files 61P CSY 61PSTXT CreateG1P Execute ey I a Copy Hove Rename CreateFolder Del Cancel selection Number Item Description 1 Drive The target drive can be selected Even if CF card is not installed this message appears 2 Check box If the check box is selected up to 512 files can be selected Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder 3 Kind S In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed 4 Name Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Rename button etc lt 3 gt 7 Rename operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation 5 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 6 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 7 Creating date amp time The date and time when each file was created are displayed Multiple files can be selected or canceled at once 8 Select all files Cancel selection Touch the Select all files button to select all files If the number of the displayed files exceeds 513 the first 512 files are selected
133. OT make sure to support the CF card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break When installing a USB memory to the GOT make sure to install the USB memory to the USB interface firmly Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Before removing the USB memory from the GOT operate the utility screen for removal After the successful completion dialog box is displayed remove the memory by hand carefully Failure to do so may cause the USB memory to drop resulting in a damage or failure of the memory For closing the USB environmental protection cover fix the cover by pushing the A mark on the latch firmly to comply with the protective structure Remove the protective film of the GOT When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film the film may not be removed Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight high temperature dust humidity and vibrations When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals use the protective cover for oil Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT WIRING PRECAUTIONS WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock product damage or malfunctions CAUTION Always ground t
134. OT recognizes file location according to path explained below E Specify folder or file name and total characters of path cannot exceed 78 characters Users only can rename folder or file name Other than folder file name is automatically printed e Z Example CSV file Path in CF card or USB memory B 225 LO e W Na O ae 2 Toe 1 character Extension 4 characters Drive name 1 character Max 78 characters COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING Vl Oe If folder is assigned the hierarchy The mark is displayed between folder name and folder name folder name and file name The mark is also counted as one character m LU Q b Character strings that cannot be set to folder file The following character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name Even small characters of those cannot be used e COM1 to COM9 e LPT1 to LPT9 e AUX e CON x e NUL e PRN e CLOCK a In addition the folder file name showed below cannot be used T l e The folder name which begins with G1 W e Folder name and file name which begin with period e Folder name and file name which finish with period e Folder name and file name which have only one period or two periods c For deleting the folder The folder in which the file exists cannot be deleted Delete the folder after having deleted the files In addition on the logging information screen the files oth
135. Off line mode 10 23 09 05 53 Screen switching Base ASE_1 h a II t 10 23 09 05 53 Station No switching Ci ST_O FE d d 10 23 09 05 53 Diela oton engles T ENG reverse C rono ogica or er as CO ec e j 10 23 09 05 53 Switch applications Moni tor Date descending Search 1 2 Pr F A D 2010 Selected line position after switching the display order After the display order is switched while lines are selected the lines still remain selected Depending on which line is selected the selected line may not be displayed on the screen after switching the display order Display order of operation logs in non chronological order When the display order of operation logs are switched the logs are displayed in order as collected not in order as the date they are collected In case that the displayed operation logs are not lined up in time order due to the time change of GOT clock the displayed logs may not be lined up in order of the log dates even though the operation logs are switched b Search operation ogram Data Control Operation Log Information Operation Log Data List X 1 Touching Search in the list enables ile Name A ProJect1 OPELOG OPELOG_20101023_0001 610 searching of a log using the following items Time Screen No Operation Change To Item Date 09 0 Switch applications Operation Log 09 Switch appl ications Utility 09 Touch switch Application switching Time 0
136. ROM Manual Number Model code SH 080602ENG 1D7M48 SH 080529ENG 1D7M24 SH 080530ENG 1D7M25 SH 080532ENG 1D7M26 SH 080544ENG 1D7M32 SH 080545ENG 1D7M33 SH 080654ENG 1D7M63 The following table lists the manual relevant to GT Works3 product Refer to each manual for any purpose WE Screen creation software manuals Manual Number Manual Name Packaging Model code GT Works3 Version1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product SH 080866ENG GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 1 2 2 2 Stored in CD ROM 1D7MB9 SH 080867ENG GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 1 2 2 2 Stored in CD ROM 1D7MC1 SH 080861ENG GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM 1D7MB1 SH 080862ENG GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM 1D7MB2 E Connection manuals Manual Number Manual Name Packaging Model code SH 080868ENG GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM 1D7MC2 SH 080869ENG GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM 1D7MC3 SH 080870ENG GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 2 for GT Works3 Stored in CD ROM 1D7MC4 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 SH 080871ENG Stored in CD ROM os 1D7M
137. SB drive Memory data control Touch the memory data control to be operated 4 3 Memory Data Control UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 4 3 2 Backup restoration WE Display operation of backup restoration Main menu Memory data control Backup restoration Memory data control Backup restoration Backup restoration function Main menu Sett ing SYS 1BKUP Channe 1 01 Next chnnl W Backup function z Dev ice gt GOT Restoration fung E GOT gt Dev ice g D s RS Touch an item to B 2 ete PEE ata Change settings aq Delete backup data E Operation of backup restoration Backup restore data from the controller to GOT or erase backup data with the backup restoration GOT data package acquisition is also possible Refer to the following manuals for details of backup restoration GOT1000 Series User s Manual Extended Functions Option Functions for GT Works3 11 BACKUP RESTORE e GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 11 Backup restore 4 12 4 3 Memory Data Control 4 3 3 GOT data package acquisition zZ O E GOT data package acquisition function O The GOT data package acquisition copies the installed OS or data in the GOT main unit to the CF card
138. Screen Design Manual A 12 3 Advanced Recipe Function nog 2 E Function of advanced recipe information e For the advanced recipe file used in advanced recipe function copy delete file output are available gas In addition it is possible to writing reading into from a controller by using this function without creating the screen to FE operate the advanced recipe Advanced recipe setting of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 is required ZES For GT For GT Function Description Reference Designer2 Designer3 mExample of advanced recipe Displaying file The file folder name data size and creating date information display folder data amp time are displayed E Advanced recipe information i operation z 2 G1P CSV conversion W G1P CSV G1P file of advanced recipe file is converted to dics l QO i operation G1P TXT conversion conversion CSV file operation 2 G1P CSV i G1P gt TXT G1P file of advanced recipe file is converted to R Unicode taxt file operation G1P TXT conversion Advanced conversion 7 Recipe Q Information CSV TXT G1P CSV file or Unicode text file is converted to G1P 3 CSV TXTG1P conversion S screen conversion file of advanced recipe file operation L Lu N CreateG1P G1P New G1P file of advanced recipe file is created G1P file of advanced New G1P file of advanced recipe file is created file is created 9 G1P file create operation i record Selected record value is loaded in the dev
139. Screen save backlight is set to OFF the above signal has no effect on the screen save backlight GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 6 System Information Setting ma QO eGT Designer2 Version L Screen Design Manual 3 6 Setting System Information 4 Display control by human sensor The human sensor is a function that releases the GOT from the screen saving mode without the necessity to touch the GOT Q This function releases the GOT from the screen saving mode when the operator has come closer to the GOT 5 LL Approach Go away Approach Go away m Operator motion i i Sensor detect level Human Sensor e Detection Signal z System Signal 2 1 b5 O Sensor detect time Sensor Sensor 2 off delay off delay q Screen saving mode released Screen sa mode acti I I Screen saving Screen save time When there is no operator around the GOT for the time set as Sensor OFF delay the Human Sensor Detection Signal turns OFF When the time set as the Screen save time elapses after the Human Sensor Detection Signal turns OFF the GOT enters the screen saving mode Refer to the following manual for the Human Sensor Detection Signal System Signal 2 1 b5 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS lt gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 6 System Information Setting eGT Designer2 Version L Screen Desig
140. T Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions eGT Designer2 Version L Screen Design Manual E Display operation of maintenance timing setting COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING Main menu GOT setup GOT maintenance gt gt 1 3 Utility Display Touch Maintenance ee O timing setting gt UI Q Maintenance time notification O GOT setup GOT maintenance function Maintenance time notification Ww laintenance report time setting Tr Back light x 1000 H Di LL isplay x 1000 H aintenance report ti setting H Touch key x 10000 Times Flash memory x 1000 Times l O ad Z O O lt lt x Q OK Cance For the addition times as power on addition time refer to the following 2 4 2 Addition times reset INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 4 Maintenance Function 2 69 E Operating the maintenance timing setting GOT setup GOT maintenance function Maintenance time notification laintenance report time setting Back light 0 x 1000 H Display 0 x 1000 H laintenance report times setting Touch key O x 10000 Times Flash memory 0 x 1000 Times 1 OK Cance 2 4 2 Addition times reset Touch the select button of each setting item to display the keyboard Enter the value to be set For the keyboard operation refer to the following 1 3 3 mKeyboard operation If touch the OK button t
141. TALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 5 1 Diagnostic Functions 9 22 5 23 2 CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit 2 a No 1 2 IN Loop Info gt lt Transient Status gt IN Loop Sts Normal IN LoopBK Sta IN LoopBK factor LoopBK Sta Transmission Err ___0 7 rrlode i ONL I NE OUT Loop Info gt Loop Sts Normal OFFLINE LoopBK Sta rae LoopBK factor LoopBk Sta D Link _ nfo gt 4 Com Status B Pass IETT Cause of Ssp 6 Cable disconnection Cause of Stop 6 Param not revd j Link scan time info gt Current LS time Oms Max LS time Oms EN AON AON AON AEO AEON AEON AEON AEON AEON AEON AEON AEON AAEN oo Min LS time Oms lt Host line sts gt Constant LS time ms Connetion Disconnect CIN cable disconnection OUT cable disconnection IN cable disconnect count Q QUT cable disconnect count Q 10 IN line err count QO OUT line err count 9 LED status Displays the operation status of the CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit LED color Not Operating normally Hardware failure or WDT error Data link being executed Data link not executed OFFLINE Offline mode Other than offline mode M S ERR Ea pueied control station or No auplicaled control station or station No station No Other than control station in operation Sub control station in Other than sub control
142. TANDARD MONITOR OS GOT front face GOT rear face RS 422 485 interface USB interface Standard interface Standard interface APPENDICES 3 1 Communication Setting 3 3 4 Channel number specification menu BOX Set channel No to use with standard interface or extend interface Refer to this section 5 for driver that can be assigned to each channel 0 Set when the communication interface is not used 1 to 4 Set when connecting to a controller Except fingerprint unit bar code reader RFID controller and PC 5 to 7 1 2 Set when connecting to a barcode reader an RFID controller or a PC Only extend I F setting is possible gx 1x2 Set when connecting to a fingerprint unit a barcode reader an RFID controller or a PC Only standard I F setting is possible 9 1 Set when connecting with PC GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 For USB and RS 232 interface the simultaneous setting is possible However when either interface is during communication communication is not possible for another interface Set when using the function that uses the gateway function when connection types except the Ethernet connection is used for connecting to controllers MES interface function Ethernet download function report function hard copy when printing video display RGB display RGB output external I O operation panel function sound output Multimedia CF card unit or CF card extension unit e Fixe
143. TION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum CONTENTS GAFETY PRECAUTIONS een eee nee erry A 1 INTRODUCTION onae E E E EA EEE E E eer E reer A 8 CONTENTO aera e are eee A 8 ABOUT MANUALS csscsessessessessneesesenssnesneesnssnsesnsensensesnsenseaseaeensenseseesneenseaeesetsateeneeetsineeneeneeanteeneeneen A 12 QUICK REFERENCE eee ene eee er tee ee ee ee eer eee A 15 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ccsssssesseessesseeseesseeseesneeseernesneeneeesenseneesnsaneesneensaneeenenneen A 17 ABOUT DRAWING SOFTWARE VERSION sixes o crsss1e ctrscsancetecqeitorsereriae ieteiniatg ease eeeaemeerareatea A 22 HOW TO USE THIS MANUA ene anne ee ee ee ee ee eee A 22 BINS IS cece acne eterna E cee teeter E A 23 1 UTILITY FUNCTION 1A OUy ExKOCUUON Sacre esercepessetcd eeecesoetae ceptors ee pec EET Ea AEE EEN E EE EEEE E 1 1 Te UIC OWENS esensi A NA 1 2 T GUY DI I IN rE E E er E E T eee eee 1 6 1 3 1 Display operation of main MENU ccccccceccceecceeeeaeeeseeeceeeceeeceeeeseeeeeesaeeseeesseeeseeeseeeseeeeaess 1 9 MeO Uuiy Dasic COMMOUPAUC MN saneren EE 1 12 1 3 3 Basic operation of settings change cccccccecccsececeeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeesaeess 1 13 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings ccc ccccccecceeeeeeeeseeeceee
144. TOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 2 37 WE Display operation of Behavior of duplicate IPs Main Menu GOT setup GOT main unit setup En 1 3 Utility Display GOT setup GOT main unit setup Behavior of duplicate IPs Behavior of duplicate IPs GOT setup GOT main unit setup Behavior of duplicate Ips Behavior when a device of the same IP address as the GOT s address joins the network Maintain a network connection rec 2 38 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings WE Setting operation for Behavior of duplicate IPs Behavior when a device of the same IP address as the GOT s address joins the network Maintain a network connection rec S 1 7 If touch the setup item the setup contents is changed e Maintain a network connection rec The GOT stays connected to the network when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards A system alarm occurs e Do not maintain a network connection The GOT is disconnected from the network when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards 2 If touch the OK button the GOT restarts and operates with the changed settings 2 If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Main Menu 1 2 Precautions for selecting Do not maintain a network connection When s
145. The device value of selected record is deleted without value and changed to record only for reading The record name is not deleted Touch the check box of the recipe file to i x select the file a e Touch the Execute button E USB drive Free space 477 0MB Drive capacity 483 0MB 1 files are selected 0 9KB in total er of selectable files in this folder 1 files 2 As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen is displayed select the record comment to be File Name A PROJECTI RECIPE1 ARPOO001 G1P Setting No 1 deleted Name Recipe No 1 If the data of which attribution contains P can not be deleted 3 If touch the Pase Dee button the dialog box Value Record No shown left is displayed Record Comment Process 1 setting 4 f touch the OK button starts deleting device value The Processing message is displayed on the screen Are you sure you want to delete 5 When deleting is completed completion Process completed dialog box is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog box 6 2 Various Data Control E Precautions 1 When creating folder file a Number of characters set for folder or file name when creating folder file GOT recognizes file location according to path explained below Specify folder or file name and total characters of path cannot exceed 78 characters Users only can rename fol
146. The input key window shown left appears then input the file name to be created By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol 3 Iftouch the Enter button displays the dialog box shown left 4 If touch the OK button starts creating folder 5 When creating folder is completed completion dialog box is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog box 6 2 Various Data Control 6 27 l ag _ 2 lt a lt m 6 28 9 G1P file create operation Advanced recipe file G1P file is created When advanced recipe is only executed on Utility advanced recipe file should be created with this function in advance itrol ontrol Advanced Reci pi formatio elect drive PROJECT 1 indName Built in CF card Size Date Time DIR GIP ARP00001 0 9KB 07 04 08 14 21 E USB drive Free space 483 0MB Drive capacity 483 0MB 0 files are selected 0 0KB in total Number of selectable files in this folder 1 files Select all files GIP gt CSV GIPSTXT Create61P Execute Cancel selection Copy Move Rename CreateFolder Del Path Name AIN File Name AZ I e AD E 6 7181 9 0 HSA WUT I MULT E f en Vv Continued to next page 6 2 Various Data Control 7 Touch the Create G1P button 2 The screen t
147. The selected file will be converted into a CSY file Input file AAMOOGOT G1A Output file AAMGOO0 T CSV Do you want to proceed Vv Continued to next page 6 8 6 2 Various Data Control 1 Touch the check box of the G1A file which is to be converted to CSV file or TXT file to select the file The following dialog box is displayed when touching the following button according to the file type to convert to e CVS file G1A CSV Button e TXT file TXT CSV Button Example Dialog box when G1A gt CSV button is touched 3 Touch OK button When the file whose name is the same exists This folder already contains the file AAMOOOOT CSV in the destination folder the dialog box showed Do you want to replace the existing at left appears without starting the conversion Fi Modi fied 09 03 09 13 34 If touch the OK button overwrites the file with this one If touch Cancel button cancels the conversion Modified 09 03 09 1312 7 4 The message of completion is displayed in dialog box when conversion is completed If touch OK button the dialog box is closed Process completed 3 Deletion operation Deletes selected files 1 Touch the check box of the file to delete to select the file 2 If touch Del button the dialog box mentioned ths Pe left is displayed AAMOO001 G1A If touch OK button the file is deleted will be deleted o Do you want to
148. UNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP H W 79 z O lt 2 zZ Oo z SE LLI q oO ul 3 iS lt DL oE oz DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK DEBUG INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 3 As the communication driver A QnA L QCPU L QJ71C24 installed in the GOT is displayed touch it Communication setting Channel driver assign Change assignment Channel No 1 Please select communication driver None A QnA L QCPU L QJ7 1024 AJ710024 MELDAS C6 AJ 1024 UC24 4 The screen returns to the Channel Driver oo ee assign screen If touch the OK button the oo changed settings are reflected and the screen STNE Change assignment returns to the Communication Setting screen re E If touch the Cancel button the changed IR e settings are canceled and the screen returns to ae the Communication Setting screen 8 None Change assignment ees 5 Confirm that the selected communication driver A QnA L QCPU L QJ71C24 is assigned Communication setting Standard I F Setting Assign Ethernet F Channel Dr iver assign B s ea Tore TE 6 After the confirmation if touch the OK Te eae e Ethernet Cancel gt lt button the GOT restarts and operates with the changed settings Extend _ F 2 lo None ChNo None Mu
149. Ue ae communication unit being reset MST Green Operanng as master Operating einer than as station master station For online mode For online mode Data link bei Data link st DLINK Green ate NS Pe exenuiee ate sep Data link being executed For test mode For test mode Test completed Test being executed ERR AraC AOGE Normal unit being reset Faulty data link station 1 occurred TERR Rea Reception data eror Reception data normal fet Ptframeroe tamer frame error frame normal fer Pt tameoron tamer frame error frame normal LINK1 PORT1 side linking up PORT1 side linking down LINK2 PORT2 side linking up PORT2 side linking down GOT R W Accessed from GOT Not accessed from GOT For monochrome display it is displayed as lit or O not lit x O LLI ac O LL l LLI 9 COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS DATA CONTROL INSTALLATION OF APPENDICES 5 1 Diagnostic Functions 5 26 b Link information Displays the CC Link IE Field Network communication unit link status No Item Description Host PORT 1 oa ie Link up status Displays the link up status Linking up Linking down of the host station PORT1 side link info Host PORT2 ee Link up status Displays the link up status Linking up Linking down of the host station PORT2 side 2 c Data link information Displays the data link information Com Status Cause of Ssp Cause of Stop of the CC Link IE Field Network communication
150. WE Hardcopy information display example Data control Data contro Hard copy info A Built in CF card Ga A J lt indName Size 9 E PIR 03 02 09 13 50 1 E USB drive ree space 951 4MB rive capacity 955 OMB 0 files are selected 0 0KB in total ejecta S S nber_o able Select all files Cancel selection Copy Rename Del Number Item Description The drive which displays file or folder can be selected When CF card or USB memory is not installed the following drives are not displayed CF card A Built in CF card B Memory card USB memory E USB drive 1 Select drive 2 Check box If the check box is selected up to 512 files can be selected Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder 3 Kind 3 In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed 4 Name Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Copy button etc L gt 3 Copy operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation 5 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 6 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 7 Date and time Displays the creation date and time of each file Multiple files can be selected or canceled at once Touch the Select all files button to select
151. acters are not displayed The special data being monitored on the GOT is preceded by 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed O Lu 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name a 6 Date and time Displays the date and time when each file is installed a N Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection Only the size 7 The si f dri 7 Pea rO GINI in use is displayed when selecting the C drive 8 Operation switch Displays switch of each function executable in the Special data information download upload etc Number of folders and files Displays the total number of displayed files and folders wel Hinr Folders and files displayed For the folders and files displayed refer to the following lt 3 6 1 4 Display file X m Z O oO lt x m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 6 2 Various Data Control 6 75 W Special data information operation 1 Special data information display operation If touch a drive in Select drive the special data in the drive is displayed Data control Data control Special data info Belect dri E ind Name Size Date A Built in CF card G1SYSLOG 07 08 DIR CIRDAT 03 28 Time 08 10 15 08 22 38 2 Refer to the following for operation of delete property data check and download E USB dr
152. ailure diagnosis at the customer s expence The primary failure diagnosis will however be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 2 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 3 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced Replacing consumable parts such as the battery backlight and fuses Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by sci
153. all checks ended normally the dialog box shown right is displayed And the GOT restarts in five seconds 5 When an error occurs the dialog box that shows the GOT abnormal termination and the byte with the error appears and then the GOT restarts in five seconds When the dialog box shown right appears check the following e Check if the hardware has no problems Hardware 10 TROUBLESHOOTING Reese communication check Executing now Rsese communication check Ne error Restart RS232 communication check Error Wer ify 4 BYTE Restart O1 1 _ oo 5 1 Diagnostic Functions 5 1 8 Network status display E Functions of the network status display The network status display is a function that uses the communication units below to monitor the network status e MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 e CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15 J71GP23 SX e CC Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15 J71GF13 T2 e CC Link communication unit GT 15 J61BT13 The LED status or error status of a network module can be checked For the corrective actions for errors that occur on the network refer to the following manual The Reference Manual of the MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 network system PLC to PLC network to be used e CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual e The User s Manual of the CC Link IE Field Network master local module to be us
154. all files If the number of the displayed files exceeds 513 the first 512 files are selected Select all files Cancel 8 selection 9 The size of drive Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive selection 10 Operation switch Execution switch of each function 11 Number of folders and files Displays the total number of the files and folders displayed Display of the creation date and time The creation date and time display is not updated even if a file is created or updated while displaying the hardcopy information To display the updated creation date and time close the screen currently displayed by moving to the upper hierarchy folder etc and display the screen again wel Displayed folders and files For the folders and files displayed refer to the following K gt 6 1 4 Display file 6 2 Various Data Control 6 69 UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DEBUG SELF CHECK X Z O oO lt E x m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES E The operation of hardcopy information 6 70 1 Display operation of hardcopy information Data control Data Select drive Free space 951 4MB Drive capacity 955 OMB 0 files are selected 0 0KB in total Number of selectable files in t
155. ate Time DIR al v TXT ARPOOOO1 0 8KB 05 31 10 16 54 Free space 474 6MB i Drive capacity 488 OMB E 1 files are selected 0 8KB in total Number _ of selectable files in this folder 1 files oe es ee ee ee ee File conversion from TAT to GIP Source Tile ARPOQOQOO TAT Convert to ARPOOOO1 61P Do you want to convert the file Vv Continued to next page 6 2 Various Data Control 1 To select the file touch the check box of CSV file or Unicode text file to be converted to a G1P file Touch the CSV TXT gt G1P button to display Please select destination at the lower left corner of the screen Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive Touch the Exec button to display the dialog box shown left Touch the OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen This folder already contains the fi le ARPOOOO1 GIP Do you want to replace the existing fi le Modified O5 31 10 16 54 with this one Modified 08 31 10 16 54 When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the conversion To overwrite the file touch the OK button To cancel the conversion touch the Cancel button The completion message appears in the dialog box when the conversion is completed To close the dialog box touch t
156. ation a Precautions during folder file operation Create Delete Copy File output etc Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is processing folders and files the processing continues to be executed Example Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is creating a folder the folder is created Therefore do not pull out the CF card while the Processing message is on the screen after CF card access switch has been turned OFF While GOT is accessing to other file Alarm data etc When folder file processing for the recipe is excecuted while the GOT is in access to other file CF card access LED ON the GOT executes folder file processing for the Advanced Recipe after the processing for other file has completed Therefore it may take some time to finish the process of advanced recipe folder file The Processing message is displayed on the screen Me Estimation of processing time The process may take time depending on the setting of advanced recipe file to be operated The more number of blocks increases the longer it takes to process advanced recipe folder file Reference value Direct connection to QCPU and CPU device point 32767 points setting transmission speed 115200bps e When the block setting number to1 about 17 seconds e When the block setting number to 2048 about 4 minutes c For executing the saving loading of device value with advanced recipe file
157. ation in the SRAM user area The following drives can be switched only when a CF card or USB memory is installed e CF card A standard CF card B extended memory card e USB memory E USB drive 12 Select drive 13 Restoration Saves data in the selected drive to the SRAM user area 14 Backup all area Saves data in the SRAM user area to the selected drive 4 24 4 3 Memory Data Control E SRAM control operation zZ O 1 Operation to initialize all or selected areas of the SRAM user area T Z z Perform any of the following operations E e To initialize all areas of the SRAM user area 5 touch the Initialize all button 5 e To initialize selected areas of the SRAM user gt area select the check box of the area to be S initialized and then touch the Initialize E W selected area button Ze 2 gt E i a oS Example aoe Dialog box if the Initialize all button is touched 2 The dialog box shown left appears a i Caution Check the description of the dialog box To pe Start initializing SRAM initialize the SRAM user area touch the OK z z This process may take a few minutes button Tk MSE To cancel the initialization touch the Cancel FE After completion of initialization i sxe GOT will be rebooted button S58 Do you want to initialize 3 When touching the OK button in step2 the dialog box shown left appears for recheck To start the initialization touch the OK button To cancel t
158. ation management screen Ut Reenter your new password 5 When the password is input correctly the data is The password registration process is updated with the new administrator password a and the dialog box shown left is displayed Touch the OK button to return to the Fingerprint information management screen 6 2 Various Data Control E Contents registered list 1 Functions of Contents registered list The operator fingerprint ID used in the fingerprint authentication can be added or deleted 2 Display operation of Contents registered list Main menu Data control Data control gt gt 1 3 Utility Display Touch Data control Data control Fingerprint information management pl aa d password nig setting By Contents registered list Touch Contents registered Fingerprint information 6 2 Various Data Control UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DEBUG SELF CHECK X m Z O oO lt x m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 3 Display example of Contents registered list a Contents registered list screen Touch Contents registered list in the Fingerprint information management screen to display the administrator password authentication screen After the password which is set in Administrator password setting is correc
159. ayed by touching the upper right part of the screen Font data Option fonts To display optional fonts the followings are required e The option font installation The option fonts are displayed at the end O1 1 N 5 1 Diagnostic Functions 5 1 6 Touch panel check E Touch panel check function Touch panel check is a function which checks whether there is no dead zone area in touch key minimum unit 16 dots x 16 dots E Display operation of Touch panel check Main menu Self check Diagnostic functions 3 1 3 Utility Display Ead a a SE a x i GOT main unit setup Touch Self check Y Touch Diagnostic functions Touch Touch panel check Touch panel check t When you want to abort Starts Touch panel check If touch the Touch panel check of Diagnostic function the screen for drawing check is displayed Notes on Touch panel check If the touched part is not filled with yellow color there are the following two possible causes 1 Display part failure 2 Touch panel failure In that case contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service 5 13 5 1 Diagnostic Functions E Touch panel check operations Zz If touch Touch panel check of self check a black filled screen is displayed over the entire screen area 2 O A 7 Toucha part of the screen ir The touched part becomes a yellow filled display E 5 wo g fi 925 aoe Black filled scre
160. be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction If a communication fault including cable disconnection occurs during monitoring on the GOT communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative For bus connection The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes inoperative For other than bus connection The GOT becomes inoperative A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction DESIGN PRECAUTIONS WARNING Incorrect operation of the touch switch s may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone out When the GOT backlight goes out although the POWER LED blinks green orange and the display section dims the input of the touch switch s remains active This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in screensaver mode who the
161. button the dialog box Setup mentioned left is displayed Execute now 7 If touch OK button the setup is executed l ag _ Z lt a lt m 4 When the setup is completed the dialog box Setup is completed mentioned left is displayed PETALE HOW Touching the OK button restarts the GOT 6 3 OS Project Information 6 121 6 122 7 Upload setup cancel operation a Upload operation By upload operation the project data is transferred from the C drive Built in flash memory to the A drive Standard CF card B drive Extended memory card or E drive USB drive The CF card or USB memory after uploading can be used for downloading project data to another GOT This item explains using the A drive POINT Before setup operation The project data cannot be uploaded to the A drive B drive or E drive when the project data of the A drive B drive or E drive is set up Execute setup cancel lt gt gt 7 b Setup cancel operation before uploading the project data Upload Do you want to upload 7 The project data is already existed If Upload is done the project data is deleted Do you want to execute 7 Upload is completed 6 3 OS Project Information Touch A Standard CF Card in Select drive If touch the Upload button the screen mentioned left is displayed Touching the OK button executes uploading If any project data with the same name exists
162. cancels the conversion The message of completion is displayed in dialog box when conversion is completed If touch OK button the dialog box is closed 3 Delete operation Folder and file to be used on logging are deleted 1 Touch the folder to delete or the check box of the file to delete to select the file Date Time control Logsging information X LF cara Bi ia ri 4 aip 2KB 07 30 09 13 42 GIL L ll pA 22KB 3 GIL LOGOO001_ 0000 E USB drive 512 2KB 07 30 09 13 42 E CSV L0G00001 0002 18 7KB 09 02 09 18 42 CSV LOGO0001_0001 18 7KB 09 02 09 18 43 Free space 953 0MB Drive capacity 955 OMB 1 files are selected 512 2KB in fla Number_of selectable files in this folder 5 file 2 Iftouch Del button the dialog box mentioned left is displayed a one BI If touch OK button the file folder is deleted af E While executing Processing message Do you want to proceed appears on the screen If touch Cancel button the deletion is canceled 3 When the deletion is completed the completion dialog box is displayed If touch OK button the dialog box is closed Deletion has been completed 4 When it cannot be deleted the dialog box showed at left appears Only when deleting The folder cannot be deleted because folder is executed files or folders exist Verify that there is no file in the folder and Hidden files may exist in the GOT execute th
163. ccccsecceecceeceeeceeeeersaseeeeees Display operation of display setting 2 43 Display setting functions ccceeceeeee scenes 2 40 Display setting Operations cccccceeeeeeees 2 44 Drawing check ccccccceeccneceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeeaees 5 7 Display operation of drawing check 5 7 Drawing check function cccccceecceeee eens eeeees 5 7 Drawing check operation cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 8 E Ethernet Setting cccccsccssecsseesseteeesenseesaeesenees 3 20 Ethernet status check cccccceecsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 31 EAEN 0 PA D nee E en O eee 6 83 F Fr VIS ONIM sieis EEE 6 97 Fingerprint ID ccccccccseeceeeceeecesseeeseeeeenees 6 97 Fingerprint information ccccseecseeeeeeeeees 6 97 Fingerprint unit cece e eee ceeee sees eeeeeeeeeseeens 6 97 Font CROCK sosia case te ctnddcicile inmet aaieied deutlcansichaneddneddndentes 5 11 Display operation of Font check 08 5 11 Font check function ccccccececeseeeeeeeeeeeeaees 5 11 Font check Operation ccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 12 G GOT data package acquisition cccceeeeees 4 13 GOT Start TIME sinnena iai 2 12 Display of GOT start time ce eeeee eens 2 73 Display operation of GOT start time 2 12 GOT start time function eee eeeeeeee seen
164. cccsecceseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeseeeees 2 49 2 3 1 Operation setting TUNCHONS eccsieccceccsincancedneeennne sexigude edad anaa aa Eaa EE eara 2 49 2 3 2 Display operation of operation setting ccc ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeceeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeaeeeseeees 2 50 2 3 3 Setting operation Of OPErAation ccccceccsscccseecseeceeeeceeecececeuecsueesuecsueecseeceeessueseueeseeeseeesas 2 51 2 3 4 Security level CHANGE ccccccccccssccsscecseccscccceceueecseecacecseecsuecsueecseeceueeeuessueesseessueseueesaeeess 2 53 20 U lty Call key Setting serceru rrenen Ea E aaa 2 55 2 3 6 Adjusting the touch panel position Touch panel calibration Setting cccceeeeeeeeeeees 2 58 2 3 7 USB mouse keyboard Setting cccccccccccceecceeeee sees eeseeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeesaeeseeeeeees 2 61 2 3 8 SoOftGOT GOT link function setting ccc eecc cece eeeeee eee eese cess eesaeesaeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeaees 2 63 2 3 9 VNC R server function setting ccc cccccecseeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeceaeeeseueenaseesaseeseeeseeeesseeess 2 66 2 4 Maintenance Function ccccccccccssccsscecseceececeeeceeceaeecaeeceeesuesaueesueesueesenecseeeeuessueesaeeseeeseeeeneness 2 68 2 4 1 Maintenance time Settiing cccccccccscccceceeecescecseecaeecseeceusceeecaeecseeseaeesaeeseeesaeeseeessaessaees 2 68 2 4 2 Addition times reset ios cascrdsanweninsuadedte ws aceseinensee de teviamcoenstmm
165. ccording to the layout and procedures described in 5 1 4 MDisplay operation of drawing check When missing bits occurs contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service 5 7 5 1 Diagnostic Functions W Drawing check operation zZ The screen for drawing check can be displayed by touching Drawing check on the Display check menu z 1 Before execute drawing check 5 Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the gt next check in each step during drawing check Touching the upper left part of the screen returns to the Display check screen Upper left touch Upper right touch Z position position i m E 46r a Missing bit Color Check Each touch of the upper right part of the screen the entire screen color changes in the following order blue black red purple green light blue yellow white and gray Check missing bit and color visually C a a a a e e Blue Black Purple Green Light blue Yellow White COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING To b Basic figurecheck screen DEBUG If touch the upper right part of the screen at the final color white screen the following 2 Basic figure check screen is displayed b Basic figure check Check whether there is no shape transformation of basic figure or display losses The basic figure drawn has 4 types 1 Filled circle 2 Line 3 Rectangle 4 Ellipse x O LLI a O LL l LLI 2 To Pattern 1 of
166. ce status display O Main menu Memory data control zZ ke gt 1 3 Utility Display fi aT ee oo A 6 Z Fi Memory data control a O USB device status z display e Sie 5 Z2 USB device status display FE ozo Debug Memory data control USB device status display Vendor product jve Attach A RRRA AAAA RRR h Taka RRA USB keyboard Tahakathaahaahaaae storage SEE SELF CHECK COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS DATA CONTROL INSTALLATION OF APPENDICES 4 3 Memory Data Control 4 21 WE USB device status display operation 7 When the USB peripheral device is installed to GOT the screen shown left is displayed No Device Vendor product Drive Attach 1 USB mass storage fSRHGSSOOOIK E Sto RRRA sto K 2 USB storage KRRRARRARAAA A bcc 3 USB key SRR hhh storage 2 Sarak ah 2 USB mass storage is displayed in Device and Stop button is displayed in Attach 3 When the Stop button is touched the dialog Do you want to stop USB device box shown left is displayed Touch the OK button to prepare the USB peripheral devices removal Touch the Cancel button to cancel the preparation of USB peripheral devices removal 4 When the preparation of removal is ready the USB device has been stopped dialog box shown left is displayed 5 Touch OK to close the dialog box USB mouse keyboard recognition When using the USB
167. ch operation The setting content is changed by touching ZTA YES T NO To use the USB keyboard touch the setting item of USB keyboard type The setting content is changed by touching YES C5 NO To use the USB keyboard touch the setting item of USB keyboard type The setting content is changed by touching Japanese 106 keyboard M English 101 we keyboard If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the Operation screen If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Operation screen In the Operation screen touching the OK Cancel gt lt button restarts and operates the GOT with the changed settings 2 3 8 SoftGOT GOT link function setting E SoftGOT GOT link function The authorization of the SoftGOT GOT link function can be set and the exclusive authorization can be obtained or released Only the GOT can obtain the exclusive authorization While the GOT has the exclusive authorization GT SoftGOT1000 cannot obtain the authorization For the details of the SoftGOT GOT link function refer to the following zZ O O Z LL gt F E 5 p 3 GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Z _ For GT For GT ano Function Description Seting range Zz5 Designer2 Designer3 2 z LLN l The status whether or not the GOT obtains the exclusive a g 5 Exclusive L 2A D oo authori
168. client function Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU power supply module and I O module that are mounted to the base unit Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a serial communication Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP IP network A 21 ABOUT DRAWING SOFTWARE VERSION This manual explains the drawing software functions of the following versions e GT Designer3 Version1 45X e GT Designer2 Version2 111R or later For GT Designer3 of a version older than the above one and GT Designer2 some functions are not supported Therefore displayed screens setting items and others may differ from those described in the manual For the functions added by version upgrade of the GT Designer2 refer to the following GT Designer2 Version 2 Screen Design Manual For the functions added by the version upgrade of GT Works3 contact your local distributor HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL E Symbols Following symbols are used in this manual E Memory check operatic Carries out write reat teck of memory When drive is not displayed When the drive memory to check is not displayed confi rm the mounting procedure or memory type with reference to the following lt gt Hardware 8 3 2 m CF Card
169. communication driver automatic assignment will not be performed at the next time and after b Priority against Controller Setting of GT Designer3 or Communication Settings of GT Designer2 If download the communication settings to the GOT with GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 after the automatic assignment the GOT will operate with the communication settings of the GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 The GOT operates with the latest communication settings When the communication driver does not match with the unit that is installed in the GOT An error is displayed on the GOT when displaying Communication setting If an error is displayed confirm the combination of the communication driver and communication unit Refer to the following manual for the combination gt gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used System Configuration in each chapter GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 System Configuration in each chapter 3 1 Communication Setting 3 1 4 Communication setting operation WE Channel Driver assign operation The following describes how to operate the Channel Driver assign The example of changing to the direct CPU connection Communication driver A QnA L QCPU L QJ71C24 for the GOT of the computer link connection Communication driver AJ71QC24 MELDAS C6 is used Before the operation The GOT automatically restarts after executing this setting If proje
170. connecting a line OUT wrong cable connection Disconnect IN IN IN Disconnect IN connecting a line OUT connecting a line IN IN wrong cable connection OUT cable disconnection IN Disconnect IN wrong cable connection OUT connecting a line Disconnect IN wrong cable connction OUT wrong cable connction IN cable disconnct count 0 No error 1 or more Number of accumulated errors IN line err count 0 No error 1 or more Number of accumulated errors OUT cable disconnct count 0 No error 1 or more Number of accumulated errors OUT line err count 0 No error 1 or more Number of accumulated errors 5 25 5 1 Diagnostic Functions 3 CC Link IE Field Network communication unit 6 2 5 Self check Diagnostics Network status x 5 6T15 J716F13 T2 NETWK No 1 STI E lt LED status gt lt Host PORTI link info gt lt Unit error info gt Link up status Linking dow 6 E 1 2 1 rap 3 lt Host PORT2 link info gt 4 Link up status Linking dow 5 no i 7 8 a lt ink_Info a 7 Zs Com Status B Pass stopped 11 Eto Cause of Ssp 12 lt F 2 Cable disconnection 13 op ul O 14 eee 15 16 Current LS time Gms S Max LS time ms Z Min LS time z Constant LS time IG ZE Ok TE 9 S m 502 5x2 TE 22O a LED status T Displays the CC Link IE Field Network communication unit operation status 2 Lu Q Hardware failure or WDT error occurred RUN Green Operating normally
171. conomy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in Japan November 2012 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V German Branch Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 0 2102 486 0 Fax 49 0 2102 486 1120 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V org sl CZECH REP Czech Branch Avenir Business Park Radlicka 714 113a CZ 158 00 Praha 5 Phone 420 251551470 Fax 420 251 551 471 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V French Branch 25 Boulevard des Bouvets F 92741 Nanterre Cedex Phone 33 0 1 55 68 55 68 Fax 33 0 1 55 68 5757 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V lrish Branch Westgate Business Park Ballymount IRL Dublin 24 Phone 353 0 1 4198800 Fax 353 0 1 4198890 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Italian Branch Viale Colleoni 7 I 20041 Agrate Brianza MB Phone 39 039 60 53 1 Fax 39 039 60 53 312 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Poland Branch Krakowska 50 PL 32 083 Balice Phone 48 0 12 630 47 00 Fax 48 0 12 630 47 01 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V 52 bld 3 Kosmodamianskaya nab 8 floor RU 115054 Moscow Phone 7 495 721 2070 Fax 7 495 721 2071 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Spanish Branch Carretera de Rubi 76 80 E 08190 Sant Cugat del Vall s Barcelona Phone 902 131121 34 935653131 Fax 34 935891579 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V UK UK Branch Travellers Lane UK Hatfield Herts AL1
172. conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SWLIDNC IQWK iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works Abbreviation of SWLJIDNC GXW2 E and SWLJDNC GXW2 EA type programmable controller engineering software Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function Abbreviation of SWLJD5C LLT E EV type ladder logic test tool function software packages SW5D5C LLT EV or later versions Abbreviation of SWL D5C GPPW E EV SW D5F GPPW E type software package Abbreviation of SWLIDNN VIEWER E type software package Abbreviation of SWL D5C FBDQ E type FBD software package for process control Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 SWODNC MTW2 E Abbreviation of SWLJRNC GSV type integrated start up support software for motion controller Q series Abbreviation of SW ODNC MRC2 E type Servo Configuration Software Abbreviation of MRZJW O SETUPLIE type Servo Configuration Software Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software FR SWO SETUP WE Abbreviation of CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator Abbreviation of parameter setting monitoring and testing software
173. creen switching Base 10 23 09 09 51 Switch applications 10 23 09 09 49 beaks aaa ic Conditions 10 23 2010 09 00 pete ID t to search 10 23 09 09 25 B 1 a aidia 10 23 09 09 22 B 1 10 23 09 09 16 10 23 09 09 16 10 23 09 08 30 10 23 09 08 30 B 1 10 23 09 08 29 10 23 09 08 28 10 23 09 07 21 10 23 09 07 21 B 1 10 23 09 06 58 10 23 09 06 58 10 23 09 06 58 Display system Tanguage 10 23 09 06 58 Switch applications 10 23 09 06 56 Switch applications 10 23 09 05 53 Screen switching Base 10 23 09 05 53 Station No switching Common 10 23 09 05 53 Display system language 10 23 09 05 53 Switch applications Program Data Control Operation Log Information Operation Log Data List File Name A Project1 OPELOG OPELOG_20101023_0001 610 A D 2010 Date Time Screen No Operation Change To a o J 10 23 09 05 50 Switch appl ications i B 10 23 09 05 50 Adjust External device 10 23 09 05 48 Screen switching Base 10 23 09 05 48 10 23 09 05 48 10 23 09 05 48 10 23 09 05 48 Display systen 10 23 09 05 48 Switch applice 10 23 09 05 45 Start GOT 10 23 09 03 44 Switch appl ic 10 23 09 02 20 Switch appl ic 10 23 09 02 05 Switch appl ic 10 23 09 01 50 Switch appl ic 10 23 09 01 47 Switch appl ice 10 23 09 01 39 Switch appl ice 10 23 09 01 37 i 10 23 09 01 07 10 23 09 01 01 Switch languages 1 4
174. cription Reference Designer2 Designer3 Backup Executing backups executing restorations and deleting backup data 432 restoration are possible GOT data ade Copying OS data special data and project data stored in GOT main x33 T unit to CF card or USB memory are possible Di acquisition CNC data I O Machining programs parameters and others of the CNC connected 434 function to the GOT can be copied or deleted Memory card Formatting CF card or USB memory is possible 4 3 5 format Displaying the flash memory empty area size available for the user of Memory each drive and Boot drive empty area size is possible Confirming 436 infomation memory empty space is enabled without connecting a personal bi computer USB device Displays the USB device installation status Use this screen to remove 437 status display the USB memory from GOT Data in the SRAM user area can be backed up or restored and the SRAM control 4 3 8 SRAM user area is initialized This function is available for a motion controller OS SV43 special Motion program model 4 3 9 SV43 I O l For details of this function please contact our company 4 10 4 3 Memory Data Control E Display operation of memory data control Main menu L 3 1 3 Utility Display Touch Memory data control Memory data control is displayed For Memory card format Debug Memory data control Memory card format Belect Drive A Built in CF card E U
175. ct data has been downloaded the GOT starts monitoring of the controller after restarting Execute this setting after carefully confirming the safety 1 Communication setting Standard F Setting ChNo RS232 BV supply 1 AJ 1QC24 MELDAS C6 9 ChNo RS422 485 ChNo Ethernet 0 None None Extend I F Setting Assign Ethernet F Channel Dr iver assign ChNo USB Host PC Extend F 1 Extend F 2 Ist ChNo None ChNo None Multimedia Nome o f 2nd ChNo None ChNo None one 0 None 3rd ChNo None ChNo None 0 None 0 None Definition of ChNo O None 5 8 External device Other connection 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection Communication setting Channel driver assign 2 FA device connection Install communication driver A QnA L QCPU L QJ71C24 to GOT Download of Communication Setting from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 is not required After installing communication driver touch the Channel Driver assign button in Communication Setting Touch the Change assignment button on the dislayed screen as shown left PC connect ion 1 AJ71QC24 MELDAS C6 Change assignment Ext device connection 5 None Change assignment 6 None Change assignment 7 None Change assignment 8 None Change assignment 9 Host PC Modem Vv Continued to next page 3 1 Communication Setting UTILITY F
176. ct the file to delete Screen mentioned left is displayed if Delete Delete project data button touched a PROJECT 1 Confirm the deletion targeted file is specified Do vou want to delete 7 correctly If touch OK button the file is deleted If touch Cancel button the deletion is canceled N gt 3 When the deletion completes the dialog box Delete is completed shown left is displayed If touch OK button the dialog box is closed 6 116 6 3 OS Project Information 3 Copy operation Uploads the project data written in the C drive Built in flash memory to the A drive Standard CF card B drive Extended memory card E drive USB drive e Copying to another directory in the same drive e Copying between A drive B drive and E drive Copy to from C drive is disabled This item explains using the A drive Install CF card in the PC in which create a folder for the copy destination Set the same character with System Information of Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 or with System Setting of System Environment of GT Designer2 for the folder name GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 1 GOT Type Setting eGT Designer2 VersionL Screen Design Manual 3 1 GOT Controller Type Setting 2 Install the CF card mentioned above to GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card lt gt Hardware 8 3 2 E CF card Hardware 8 5
177. ctively and copying the result to a CF card or USB memory 4 3 7 4 3 8 4 3 9 x 5 2 zi P Continued to next page Data control Data control Supported A Partly supported x Not supported For GT For GT Item Functions overview Reference E E Deleting or copying alarm log files or copying Deleting or copying alarm log files log files Alarm Converting alarm log files in G1A format CSV TXT information format Displaying graphs of alarm log files Converting advanced recipe files in GIP format CSV TXT format Deleting copying moving advanced recipe files Advanced creating a new advanced recipe file Recipe Deleting or moving advanced recipe folders information changing advanced recipe folder names creating a new advanced recipe folder Writing reading matching record data and deleting device values with the advanced recipe record list Converting logging files in G1L format CSV TXT format Logging Deleting copying moving logging files changing 6 23 information logging file names Deleting logging folders creating a new logging folder Converting operation log files in G10 format CSV TXT format Deleting copying moving operation log files 6 2 4 changing operation log file names Deleting operation log folders creating a new operation log folder Hard copy Deleting copying hard copy files changing hard copy 6 25 information file names E Deleting or checking special da
178. cturing Systems Corporation Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co Ltd Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO LTD Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd Abbreviation of Hitachi Ltd Abbreviation of Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd Abbreviation of Panasonic Corporation Abbreviation of Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation Abbreviation of Allen Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc Abbreviation of GE Fanuc Automation Corporation GE Fanuc Automation Corporation Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA Abbreviation of SICK AG Abbreviation of Siemens AG Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co Ltd Abbreviation of programmable controller Generic term for temperature controller manufactured by each corporation Generic term for indicating controller manufactured by each corporation Generic term for control equipment manufactured by each corporation Abbreviation of indicating controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO LTD Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function Abbreviation of GOTs that use the
179. d BEYNE 4666K 07 08 08 13 27 A C Flash Memory E USB drive 7 15752KB 499672KB OFi le Delete Property Data check Download Write Check Data cannot be written into the memory card since the capacity of the destination memory card is short by 4702Kbyte Write Data Size Project Data 3 Kbyte Install a CF card or USB memory on the GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card or USB memory K gt Hardware 8 3 2 E CF card Hardware 8 5 2 Install USB peripheral devices 2 Touch A Standard CF Card in Select drive 3 If touch the Download button the screen Special data download now mentioned left is displayed Downloading is executed when the OK button is touched The special data has already downloade 4 fthereisa project data of the same name in the Current Target C drive the screen shown left is displayed Built Version 215k f215R If touch the OK button the project data is aH i i downloaded and the project data in the C drive Author f is overwritten Downloading is canceled when the Cancel button is touched Downloading continue T 5 When the downloading is completed the dialog Download is completed box mentioned left is displayed Restart now Touching the OK button restarts the GOT DATA CONTROL 6 2 Various Data Control 6 2 Operator information E Operator management 1 Operator management function The function e
180. d to 9 for the USB interface 1 Cannot be assigned with Ethernet I F Assignment 2 The same device cannot be used for ChNo 5 to Ch No 8 simultaneously For restrictions on external devices refer to the following manual lt gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 3 7 Communication Interface Setting Communication Settings 5 Driver display BOX The name of communication driver assigned to the channels or the driver set with the Communication Setting of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 is displayed For details of drivers to be displayed refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface eGT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 3 7 Communication Interface Setting Communication Settings Display None in the driver display BOX in case of the followings e The communication driver is not installed lt gt 6 3 1 OS information e In channel number specification menu BOX 0 is set e The communication unit type and the communication driver are mutually not corresponding at the extend interface side When the channel number for the standard F 1 is set to 9 the communication driver Host PC or Host Modem can be selected When the channel number for the standard F 2 is set to 9 the c
181. ded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Before touching the unit always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Replace battery with GT15 BAT or GT11 50BAT by Mitsubishi electric Co only Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion Dispose of used battery promptly Keep away from children Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION For the analog resistive film type touch panels normally the adjustment is not required However the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs execute the touch panel calibration When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs other object may be activated This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction BACKLIGHT REPLACEMENT PRECAUTIONS WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply of the GOT and the PLC CPU in the case of a bus topology and remove the GOT from the control panel before replacing the backlight when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user Not doing so can cause an electric shock
182. der or file name Other than folder file name is automatically printed Example CSV file Path in CF card or USB memory t 2 characters 1 character Extension i 4 characters rive name 1 character eet Max 78 characters If folder is assigned the hierarchy The mark is displayed between folder name and folder name folder name and file name The mark is also counted as one character b Character strings that cannot be set to folder file The following character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name Even small characters of those cannot be used e COM1 to COM9 e LPT1 to LPT9 e AUX e CON e NUL e PRN e CLOCK In addition the folder file name showed below cannot be used e The folder name which begins with G1 e Folder name and file name which begin with period e Folder name and file name which finish with period e Folder name and file name which have only one period or two periods c For deleting the folder The folder in which the file exists cannot be deleted Delete the folder after having deleted the files In addition on the advanced recipe information screen the file other than that for advanced recipe is not displayed on GOT When the folder in which there is no file displayed on the screen cannot be deleted confirm whether there is other file in CF card or USB memory by using personal computer etc 6 36 6 2 Various Data Control 2 Precautions for oper
183. ding Date descending in the list to switch the Program Data Control Operation Log Information Operation Log Data List File Name A Project1 OPELOG OPELOG_20101023_0001 610 A D 2010 s Date Ti S No O ti Chi T d p y d f p g ai Se Se isplay order of operation logs 10 23 09 09 52 Switch app ications f PON Utility i A a ee Date ascending and Date descending 10 23 09 09 51 Switch app ications Moni tor A A e th splits ports Lae are switched every time the button is 10 23 09 09 25 Switch applications Utility 10 23 09 09 25 B 1 Touch switch Applicati itchi d 10 23 09 09 22 B 1 Karic inut A 123 touche 10 23 09 09 16 Screen switching Base BASE_1 10 23 09 09 16 Switch icati Moni ti vs 0 8 20 Sith applications sader editor The buttons show the current display order 10 23 09 08 30 B 1 Touch switch Application switching 10 23 09 08 29 S itching B BASE_1 P LI 10 23 09 08 28 Switch applications Honi tor e Date ascending Data IS displayed in 10 23 09 07 21 Switch applications Ladder monitor 10 23 09 07 21 B 1 Touch switch Applicati itchi F 10 23 09 06 58 Sereen switching Base Base ch ronological order as collected 10 23 09 06 58 Station No switching Common ST_0 FE 10 23 09 06 58 Display system language ENG a a 10 23 09 06 58 Switch appl ications Moni tor Date descending Data IS displayed InN 10 23 09 06 56 Switch applications
184. dit button 3 The Operator information edit screen is displayed and then touch an item to be edited a Level b Password c Make a permanent password d Use ext auth ID e Ext auth ID For how to edit operator information refer to the following gt 4 a Add operation 6 2 Various Data Control DATA CONTROL l 4 Touch the OK button after all items are input The operator information editing and then the dialog box shown left is displayed process 1s completed oo and the input operator information is changed 5 Touch the Cancel button or the XI button If you close the screen before area OR button the changed and then the dialog box shown left is displayed data will be discarded Do you want to proceed c Delete operation Delete the operator information stored in the GOT Beacon afore on eraser m 7 Select the operator information to be deleted Administ ministrator P0001 1001 10 2009 08 25 P0007 1o02 3009 06 2 al with touching the operator information ses i a Add Edit Delete Undo Drive in use Import Export Save 2 Touch the Delete button and then the dialog ae operator box shown left is displayed Do you want to delete the operator Touch the OK button and then the selected operator information is deleted Touch the Cancel button and then the delete operation is canceled 3 When the delete ope
185. dot standard font Gothic At installation select Mincho or A G1SYS 16 dot standard font Mincho Gothic for the 16 dot standard font 16 dot standard font Gothic 7 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation 7 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Z O Standard Monitor OS 5 S E For the installation using GOT the CF card or USB memory storing BootOS or standard monitor OS is required I For the method of writing BootOS and standard monitor OS in the CF card or USB memory the following three methods 5 are available 1 To Memory Card from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 2 L gt eGT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Lu 7 2 Transferring Data to Memory Card 7e 2 eGT Designer2 Version L Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual z lt h aige 8 9 Transferring Data Using a Memory Card PC memory card GOT a6 2 2 Uploading from other GOT BootOS or standard monitor OS has been installed f O gt 6 DATA CONTROL f OG 3 Using CF card that stores data with OS boot drive set to A drive F T O L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 525 o eGT Designer2 Version L Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Precautions on writing BootOS standard monitor OS in CF card or USB memory When writing BootOS standard monitor OS etc in the CF card or USB memory be sure to execute by the utility of faa other GOT GT Designe
186. ds to be used for login and l mPassword change change logout in out of the GOT Function Enables setting the automatic logout time and password a Function setting setting expiration date 6 80 6 2 Various Data Control 2 Display operation of operator management Main menu Data control dE 1 3 Utility Display Touch Data control Data control Operator information management Jperator information management 1 Update Data control 2009 08 25 2009 08 25 2009 08 25 Add Edit Delete Undo Drive in use Import Export Save Touch Operator information 6 2 Various Data Control DATA CONTROL 3 Display example of operator management a Operator information management screen b c d Jperator information management Dperator Name Cd er pda A Admi ni strator 1001 2009 08 25 a DPOOO 1 DPOQOO2 1002 2009 08 25 i 9P0003 1003 2009 08 25 Add Fdit Delete f Drive in use a Import Export Displays and sets the storage location for imported and exported operator information f Drive in use Touch the item and then the display switches A Built in CF card B Memory card The display switches only when a memory card or USB drive is installed on the GOT No Description a Displays operator names b I Displays operator IDs c Displays security levels for operators d Displays the last updated dates of the operator information
187. e USB drive can be installed in 2 Installation operation the C drive Built in flash memory All OS files in the C drive Built in flash memory can be uploaded to Upload the A drive Standard CF card B drive Extended memory card 3 Upload operation and E drive USB drive Displays the property file name data size type version and P rt 4 P rty displ t Ope R creation date of the file ATOPE Y AEREE Data check Data check of files is possible Ca l o 5 Data check operation 1 Precautions for installing OS Installing Boot OS and OS will delete project data in the GOT After installing them install or download necessary data again 2 Precautions for operating OS files When the OS boot drive is set to A Standard CF Card installing and uploading OS files are not available 6 106 6 3 OS Project Information E Display operation of OS information Main menu Data control OS project information gt gt 1 3 Utility Display Touch Data control Thick OS project information OS information OS information Data control 0S project into 0S into pe dri rer nays size Date Time A Built in CF card DIR Of 25 08 14 52 H 07 26 08 14 04 E USB drive Operate BootOS and OS file Instal Upload Property Data check 6 3 OS Project Information 6 107 l ag _ Z O lt a lt m E Display example of OS information Data contr
188. e format a WO ee 2 Debug Memory ate l l Displaying the available memory of the GOT x lt xX information ses USB device status displa status display a x x x x 2H Be Confirming the SRAM user area usage backing TE SRAM control up or restoring the data in the SRAM user area x 292 C and initializing the SRAM user area TF OS kien cecal Starting the motion program SV43 I O 9 SV43 editor j me i A i A 7 System alarm Displaying the system alarm Po ofx jo x Write read check of the CF card or USB memory Memory check Bi x x and built in flash memory is gt Drawing check Checking the drawing e lel x ie i x ii N pa Apane Checking the touch panel Self unctions ey g p x x check x I O check Checking the I O of RS 232 interface olol x jo xX O Network status 5 Displaying the network status x ma display T Y Ethernet status Checking the connection status of Ethernet X x X x check Executing various diagnostics collectively and Batch self check X lt x x x copying the result to a CF card or USB memory gt H Alarm Converting alarm log files in G1A format gt information CSV TXT format x x x ep Converting advanced recipe files in G1P format Ze O ep Data Data CSV TXT format 5c z contral Sontiol Deleting copying moving advanced recipe files S O creating a new advanced recipe file Ja Advanced l 296 Deleting or moving advanced recipe folders PES h i x x x 285 changing advanced recipe folder
189. e The graph displays the alarm within up to 26 lines in one screen Tally graph display Data control Data control Alarm info Summary graph display quipment A fai lure ine A stop Material shortage in Ta ll x 5 l0 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 H 65 B gt e Displays the generated frequency of each alarm by the sideways bar chart e By the name of each alarm the contents set for the message of the general alarms by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 are displayed with up to 12 characters of full size character up to 24 half size characters The 13th of full size character and after the 25th and after for half size character are not displayed e The graph displays the alarm within up to 26 lines in one screen Graph display Multiple files cannot be displayed by the graph operation When multiple items are selected in the check boxes the file selected at last in the file list is displayed in a graph 6 12 6 2 Various Data Control 6 2 2 Advanced recipe information zZ O O POINTI m Before using advanced recipe information For writing reading into from a controller with this function or editing of advanced recipe file on the personal computer refer to the following manual 7 Specifications and operating procedure are described S ke GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions gt ui T 24 3 Advanced Recipe Function lt 6 L1 eGT Designer2 Version L
190. e VNC server z O ald function 46 SE e E License management function a9 For the remote personal computer operation function Ethernet and the VNC server function the license registration and the cancellation of the license registration are available The GT1675 VN GT1672 VN and GT1662 VN do not support the remote personal computer operation function Ethernet For details of the remote personal computer operation function Ethernet and the VNC server function refer to the following LW N Z O q zZ Q 2 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING L GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions E Display operation of license management Main Menu GOT setup GOT main unit setup gt 1 3 Utility Display m l Q GOT setu l P GOT main unit setup lt O U ae License management U op License management a GOT setup GOT main unit setup License management gt PC Remote Operation function Ethernet License number rs Eo Regist gt lt E YNC server function 2 License number E Fas Regist INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 2 35 E Setting operation of license management 1 When registering a license number for the GOT 7 Touch the license number input area on the ea license management screen and then the me keyboard appears on the bot
191. e binary file Logging file CSV file F Logging infomation Logging file TXT file aad screen Logging file binary file a 4 The user created screen data comment data and font data are displayed as project data 2 Each folder is created automatically when a file is installed downloaded or uploaded 3 The USB memory cannot be activated directly from the E drive It can be used only for data storage lt 3 6 3 1 OS information 4 The folder names and file names can be set at System Settings in System Environment of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 Ts eGT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 1 GOT Type Setting Project data GT Designer2 Version L Screen Design Manual 3 1 GOT Controller Type Setting 5 A serial number is automatically added to file names 6 Each function does not provide direct storage to the E drive 6 1 Data Storage Location 6 5 UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DEBUG SELF CHECK X m za 8 lt x m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 6 2 Various Data Control 6 2 1 Alarm information WE Function of alarm information The extended alarm log file or alarm log file held by each drive A Built in CF card B Extended memory card C Flash Memory E USB drive is displayed The functions below can
192. e delete operation again L gt 6 2 3 m Precautions DATA CONTROL 6 2 Various Data Control 4 Copy operation Folder to be used in logging is copied Data control Data control Logging information A PROJECTI LOGOO0 el GIL LOGOO001_ ae E USB drive 512 2KB 07 30 09 13 42 E CSV LOGOO00 1 0002 18 09 02 09 18 42 O CSV LOGO0001_0001 18 7KB 09 02 09 18 43 Free space 953 OMB Drive capacity 955 0MB 1 files are selected 512 2KB in_total Number of selectable files in this folder 5 files Select all files GIL gt CSY GILSTXT Cancel selection Copy Move Rename CreateFolder Del Data control Data control Logging information JA PROJECT 1 LOG0001 elect drive OJECT1 QQ KindName A Built in CF card Size Date Time DIR GIL LOGO0001_0001 512 2KB 07 30 09 13 42 M GIL L0G00001 0002 512 2KB 07 30 09 13 42 a GIL LOGO0001_0000 E USB drive 512 2KB 07 30 09 13 42 Ol CSV LOGOO00 1 0002 18 7KB 09 02 09 18 42 Ol CSV LOGO0001_0001 18 7KB 09 02 09 18 43 Free space 949 3MB Drive capacity 955 OMB 1 files are selected 512 2KB in_total Number of selectable files in this folder 5 files tee pec cmt hz ee ee Invalid destination folder Failed to copy the file LOGO0OO 1 0002 G1L This folder already contains the file LOGOO00 71 0002 61L Do you want to replace the existi
193. e into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit Plug the QnA ACPU Motion controller A series bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it clicks After plugging check that it has been inserted snugly Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS WARNING Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen Such as turning ON or OFF bit device changing the word device current value changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter and changing the buffer memory current value read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method During test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system False output or malfunction can cause an accident STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS WARNING When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction Correctly connect the battery connector Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit solder or throw the battery into the fire Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat explode or ig
194. e tenon A 6 106 Display operation of OS information 6 107 Function of OS information ccccceeeees 6 106 Operation of OS information 0008 6 109 P PACKING WISH Peces ae a A 23 Project information fcserte rts co vetereetccteeslenocess 6 113 Display operation of project information 6 114 Functions of the project information 6 113 Operation of project information 0 6 116 Q Q L QnA ladder monitor setting 0ccceee 4 3 S Security Level Change ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 2 53 Displaying the security level change 2 53 Index 2 security level change functions 006 2 53 security level change operation 008 2 54 SeN CINCO CIC oani io ened nese diette dard dctemea eos seve 5 1 SoftGOT GOT Link Function Setting 2 63 Special data information c cccceeceseeeeeeeeeeees 6 74 System alarmi acros a EN 5 1 Display operation of system alarm 0 5 2 Operation of system alarm display 0 5 3 System alarm function cccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaees 5 2 System MONO seh each eee 4 1 T MME SSUNO moenda auatcarntdanteudasmeedcetatenades 2 2 Display operation of time setting 08 2 2 Operation of time setting cccceeceeeeeeeee ees 2 3 Time setting functions cccceeceeeceeeeee
195. e the CF card extension unit as the B drive of the GOT Use the unit when a CF card interface is needed on the control panel E Example of how to use CF card unit Infrequently used data including project data are saved to a CF card and frequently used data including alarm histories and operation logs are saved to another CF card The data can be saved in each CF card CF card q m The first CF card Project data E Ol The second CF card Alarm history operation log GOT CF card unit E Example of how to use CF card extension unit The CF card extension unit can be used in the same way as the above Example of how to use CF card unit For using the CF card extension unit there is no need to open the control panel s door when a CF card is inserted or 4 GOT CF card extension unit Alarm histories and operation logs are CF card extension unit saved to the second CF card APP 5 UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK DEBUG INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS N W S Q z W A A lt Appendix3 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series For the functions added by version upgrade of the GT Designer2 refer to the following s GT Designer2 Version 2 Screen Design Manual For the functions added by the version upgrade of GT Works3 con
196. ead write Write ol protect write write protect P protect protect protection rotect ES p cancelled Monitoring devices T C set value and __ file register D1000 Changing and the following ps devices Other than the aoe o Difference between all online operations prohibition and all operations prohibition When specifying All online operations prohibited displaying devices and inputting data with a programming tool or GOT are all prohibited When all operations are prohibited displaying devices and inputting data with the GOT are enabled while all operations using a programming tool are prohibited 3 2 Communication Detail Setting 2 Deletion Delete a registered keyword 1 Touching the Delete key pop up displays the keyboard for inputting a keyword 2 Input a key word and touch the Enter key and the keyword is deleted Please input keyword PLC connected Setting FX CPU compatible with 2nd keyword Input a keyword to delete Input the keyword to delete only into the keyword FX CPU not atible with 2nd keyword EE 7 The 2nd keyword will be ignored 3 Protection delete Delete the protection by key word in order to access to a FX PLC to which a key word is registered 7 Touching the Clear key pop up displays the keyboard for inputting a keyword 2 Input a keyword and touch the Enter key to delete the protection PLC connected Setting FX CPU compatible with 2nd keyword Input a key
197. ebug Memory data control Memory information lash memory empty area size A Built in CF card 498420 K byte C Flash Memory 15155 K byte Check memory information E USB drive 1759104 K byte Boot drive empty area size 58127 K byte 4 3 Memory Data Control UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES E Memory information display example Debug Memory data control Memory information ash memory empty area size A Built in CF card 498420 K byte C Flash Memory E USB drive Boot drive empty area size 58127 K byte Indicates the memory space of each drive available for the user to store files or folders The A Standard CF Card and B Memory card are not displayed when CF card is not installed If USB memory is not installed E USB drive is not displayed 2 Boot drive empty area size Indicates the empty area size of boot drive specified by the user 1 Flash memory empty area size 4 20 4 3 Memory Data Control 4 3 7 USB device status display zZ O WE Function of USB device status display O This function displays a list of the USB peripheral device connection status in the GOT T Also this screen is used to remove the USB peripheral device from GOT E E Display operation of USB devi
198. ect the file gt Built in CF card ral Size Date Time a OPELOG_20090730 0000 KB 730509 15 54 m 10 OPELOG_ 00 09 15 50 G10 JOPELOG_20090730 0002 E USB drive 0 2K 07 30 09 CSV JOPELOG_20090730 0001 8 iK 09 02 09 CSV JOPELOG_ A 0002 1 0K 09 02 09 G10 JOPELOG_ puna pon 0 2KB 09 02 09 Drive capacity 955 OMB 1 files are selected re ee aa 2 0KB in_total eee of selectable files in this folder 6 files 3 Select the target folder Pata control iData control rerat ion los Information Selecting a folder is not needed for moving Select drive A x TEEI m me directly below the drive 8 7KB 09 02 09 G10 JOPELOG_20090730 0000 i o 02KB 07 30 09 15 54 a 09 15 50 G10 JOPELOG_20090730 0002 CSV JOPELOG_20090730 0002 1 0KB 09 02 09 G10 JOPELOG_20090902 0000 E USB drive 0 2KB 07 30 09 CSV JOPELOG_20090730 0001 3 0KB 09 02 09 Free space 948 9MB Drive capacity 955 OMB 1 files are selected 2 0KB in total Number of selectable files in this folder 6 files Please select Hest ination ee ot doo Vv Continued to next page l O ag _ 2 lt a lt m 6 2 Various Data Control 6 60 Target file OPELOG_20090730_0007 610 Do you want to move the file This folder already contains the file OPELOG_20090730_0007 610 De you want to replace the existing file Modified 07 30 09 15 50 with this one Modified 07 30 09 15 50
199. ed e The User s Manual of the CC Link system master local module to be used E Displaying the network status display Main menu Self check Diagnostic functions 2 1 3 Utility Display e Touch Self check Diagnostic functions Touch Network status display Network status display Self check Diagnostics Network status T15 J7 1LP23 25 NETWK No l 1 STL 2 lt LED status gt lt Loop Info gt lt Transient Status gt F loop Norma Transmission Err 0 Rloop Norma ErrCode 1 FLoopBK Sta No per 2 RLoopBK Sta No per Loop Back Wo per lt D Link Info gt ai Ow w Com Status D Link in prog Cause of Ssp Normal Comm Cause of Stop Norma C i sin T lili alii Tail dll a sali T a 1 ai T onli 1 alii DOF OPI DOO IMO1FS Ne Ne ee Ne ee ee Se ee Sie S Me See eee F LOOP R LOOP 5 19 5 1 Diagnostic Functions E Display example of the network status display 1 MELSENCNET H communication unit 1 self check Diagnostics Network status GT 15 J71LP23 25 NETWK No 1 lt LED status gt F LOOP R LOOP GT15 J71LP23 25 STL 2 lt Loop Info gt Floop Rloop FLoopBK Sta 3 RLoopBkK Sta Loop Back lt D Link Info gt G lt Transient Status gt Self check Diagnostics Network status GT 15 J 1BR13 lt LED status gt NETWK No 1 GT15 J71BR13 ST 2 lt Loop Info gt F loop Rloop
200. eeeeeeees 2 2 Touch PANGCIICNECK casccol eck civaroantsmodncshcieeceiwad eee 5 13 Display operation of Touch panel check 5 13 Touch panel check function cceceeeeeees 5 13 Touch panel check operations 0000 5 14 Transparent setting Transparent mode setting 2 6 U Usage condition of utility function APP 1 USB device status display cccccceeeeeeeeeee es 4 21 USB mouse keyboard Setting ccceeceeeeee ee 2 61 Utility basic configuration cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 12 Utility call key Setting cccccccseeseeeeeeseeeeeeees 2 55 Utility call key display operation 00 2 55 Utility call key setting function ee 2 55 Utility call key setting operation 000 2 56 GUNY GIS DIG Y airaenasttinwas duce NE 1 6 Display operation of main MeNUu ce 1 9 Main MENU seiis ean EE 1 6 FASS WONG setsi ence a nRa e 1 11 System message switch button cce 1 7 OUV CXECULION s ea 1 1 TIDY TUN CTLON NSU ea a A 1 2 V VNC R server function setting ceeeee 2 66 REVISIONS For the software functions refer to the product specific screen design manual Print Date May 2010 Jun 2010 Oct 2010 Jan 2011 Apr 2011 Jul 2011 Oct 2011 Jan 2012 Manual Number The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover
201. electing Do not maintain a network connection the GOT is disconnected from the network at the addition of a device with the same IP address as the GOT Therefore there is a possibility that the running GOT cannot be communicated by IP address setting mistakes or intended actions by malicious users and the system control may be influenced by those errors Please change the setting of Behavior of duplicate IPs after carefully examining the necessity Precautions for using a switching hub compatible with the spanning tree protocol For the switching hub port connected with the GOT configure the setting PortFast or others that makes the GOT be ready for communications forwarding state The setting is required to make sure that the delay right after the connection by the spanning tree protocol does not occur Without the setting the Ethernet IP address duplication is not correctly detected Additionally the GOT may not be connected to Ethernet correctly For the setting that makes the GOT be ready for communications forwarding state refer to the user s manual for the switching hub used 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings UTILITY FUNCTION O Z Lu N Z 2 z Lu a Q _ Zz5 LO gt Ww LIN l a Na O aog COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK DEBUG INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 2 Display Settings 2
202. emory card A n Data save Select the ladder data storage location of the Biitn GF CardNotstore Q location Q L QnA ladder monitor _ O E lt Default A Built in CF card gt 9 g STe Whether to automatically read sequence Eos Automatic program when the ladder monitor starts from YES NO 3 2 2 o program read a touch switch or Advanced Alarm Display lt Default YES gt O ES can be selected gt If both Common comment and Each program Priorit comment are set for the same device in a Common comment Each program oe sequence program select either of the comment O comments to be displayed in the ladder lt Default Common comment gt monitor Select if monitoring local devices are executed or not when monitoring devices with Local device YES NO the ladder monitor O monitor lt Default NO gt Applicable to only the MELSEC Q series ladder monitor x Drive for device Select the drive to be used for reading A Built in CF card B Memory card i comment comment data for the ladder monitor lt Default A Built in CF card gt O z Hide comment Display comment 32 L Comment Select if the comment data used in the ladder pie a he l char comment x O setting monitor is displayed hidden lt Default Hide comment gt Select Save a ladder program Save ladder Save ladder programs Save a ladder Setting to save ada programs for the save setting of ladder data program x O to be used in the ladder monitor lt Default Save a ladder program g
203. en COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING 2 If touch the upper left part returns to the self check Upper left touch position DEBUG Checking the upper left part of the screen Only the upper left part of the screen cannot be filled with yellow lt LL L LL If returnes to the self check by touching the upper left part judge that the upper left area operates normally aT p COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS DATA CONTROL INSTALLATION OF APPENDICES 5 1 Diagnostic Functions 5 14 5 1 7 I O check W 1 0 check function The I O check is a function which checks whether GOT and PLC can communicate with each other If 1 O check ends normally the communication interface and the connection cable hardwares are normal To execute I O check the communication driver has to be installed in GOT in advance from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 Note that the GOT restarts when this function is performed Refer to the following for the details related to the installation of the communication driver GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 7 COMMUNICATION WITH GOT e GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 1 Communication drivers inapplicable to I O check When the following communication drivers are used the I O check cannot be executed Connection type Communication driver MELSECNET H MELSECNET H connection MELSE
204. en NTSC format is selected the resolution is fixed to 640 x 480 3 When PAL format is selected the resolution is fixed to 768 x 576 Input signal settings Set the input signal as follows according to the output format for the video camera or the like connected If the settings made differ from these video images may not be displayed correctly Output format for video camera or the like Input signal setting NTSC format NTSC PAL format PAL EIA format NTSC CCIR format PAL 2 18 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 2 Displaying the video unit setting Main Menu L gt 1 3 Utility Display GOT setup Communication setting gt 3 1 Communication Setting Touch Multimedia Multimedia setting menu Video Unit Settings GOT setup GOT main unit setup GOT main unit setup Touch Multimedia setting Video Unit Settings Input Signal NTSC Resolution 640x480 WARNING Y Changes are valid after rebooting the GOT Touch an item to be set _Confirn 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings UTILITY FUNCTION Oo Z W N a 2 z W a O an _ zz5 40E gt Ww LIN l Q Onana O aog COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK DEBUG INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 20 3 Operating the video unit setting Input Signal NTSC Resolution 640x480 WARNING Chan
205. en data or alarm data which is written in the GOT CF card or USB memory can be displayed and data can be transferred between GOT and CF card or USB memory The format of the CF card or USB memory is also possible 6 1 Data Storage Location 6 1 1 Data type and the storage location E System The data storage location and transferring write read route for each data type are shown below Also the data storage locations are shown below o W GOT main unit Project Install data Download C drive Built in flash memory Upload PC Project GT Designer3 or Install ag GT Designer2 data q Copy files on Write Windows Project Proiect rojec A drive E drive data data OS Standard CF card USB drive B drive Extended memory card a o Ff e o CF card CF card USB memory when installed in GOT CF card USB memory when installed when installed unit CF card extension unit when installed in GOT in PC in PC A Inserting Removing Item Data type Storage location BootOS BootOS e Built in flash memory C drive Standard monitor OS 4 PLC communication driver e Standard CF card A drive Extended function OS Built in flash memory C drive 2 Option OS Piolecta e Standard CF card A drive e Ext B Including recipe setting alarm conditions time action and GOT setup xtended memory card ae e Built in
206. en input the file name to be renamed By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol If touch the Enter button displays the dialog box shown left If touch the OK button starts renaming file While executing Processing message appears on the screen When renaming is completed completion dialog box is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog box 6 2 Various Data Control DATA CONTROL 7 Folder create operation An operation log folder is created 7 Touch the Create Folder button PELOG pee 0 2KB PELOG_20090730 0001 8 7KB 09 02 09 PELOG_20090730 0002 1 0KB 09 02 09 PELOG_20090902 0000 0 2KB 09 02 09 07 30 09 E USB drive ree space 954 5MB Drive capacity 955 OMB 1 files are selected 2 0KB in_total Nurber of selectable files in this folder 6 files Select all files 610 08 610 TXT Latest List Cancel selection Copy Move Rename CreateFolder Del 2 The input key window shown left appears x Fath Mame 1 FROJECT 1 OPELOG File Name LO A A lt AC DEL QIWJER IT Y UY 1 Ope AISIDIFIG IAI JI RIL LIXICIVIBINIH Enter Create new folder Process completed 6 2 Various Data Control then input the file name to be created By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z
207. ening screen time 5 Sec Screen save time 0 Min O None Screen save backlight OFF Battery alarm display oN Brightness contrast Setting Human sensor Sensor detect level Sensor detect time Sensor off delay 0 Min 70 Sec English Opening screen time 3 Sec Screen save time LO Min O None Screen save backlight OFF Battery alarm display OFF Brightness contrast Setting Human sensor Effective Sensor detect level 1H CMAX 10 Sensor detect time 0 0 Sensor off delay 0 Ca 1 2 46 2 2 Display Settings Setting item is changed if setting item is a touched ON lt gt OFF If touch the OK button the GOT restarts and operates with the changed settings If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Main Menu Setting item is changed if setting item is touched Effective a Invalid If touch the OK button the GOT restarts and operates with the changed settings If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Main Menu If touching the setting numerical keyboard is displayed Input numeric with the keyboard To move the cursor touch the El or gt button If touch the OK button the GOT restarts and operates with the changed settings If touch the Cancel button the changed
208. ent g 2min trator password nig setting Contents regi fy Administrator password setting 6 2 Various Data Control 6 97 UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DEBUG SELF CHECK X m Z O oO lt x m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 6 98 3 Administrator password setting operation Set the administrator password for fingerprint ID zerp ormat ion manag 7 Touch Administrator password setting in the IR Adninistrator password Fingerprint information management screen setting IR contents registered list 2 The dialog box shown left is displayed Input the pre registered administrator password and touch the Enter key l Pascunr ee Up to 16 alphanumeric characters Touch the key to return to the Fingerprint information management screen l Enter your current password 3 Touch the Enter key to display the dialog box shown left Input a new administrator password and touch the Enter key Up to 16 alphanumeric characters Touch the X key to return to the Fingerprint information management screen 4 Touch the Enter key to display the dialog box shown left Input a new administrator password again and E Nen password touch the Enter key Up to 16 alphanumeric characters Touch the XI key to return to the Fingerprint inform
209. entific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued CO N O O1 gt 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior
210. er backup setting operation 4 2 Debug Setting Touch a setting item for the trigger type and No Backup setting Type Detail G then the setting is changed 1 SYS1BKUP Time 02 00 Mon Wed Fri oO D S AmA 2 SYS2BKUP None i 3 SYS3BKUP Rise x0004 None Rise Time 4 SYS4BKUP Time y Tha Sat i ed 5 E 6 1 S va None The GOT does not execute the 7 JE A trigger backup k Rise The GOT backs up data when Check the file register changes gt the trigger device turns on E Execute E Not execute g Time The GOT backs up data at the specified time xe Cancel 2 Toucha setting item for Check the file register changes and then the setting is changed Execute When the backup is executed the GOT checks if data stored in file registers are changed after the previous backup When the data are changed the GOT backs up the changed data Not When the backup is executed execute the GOT does not back up data stored in file registers even if the data are changed after the previous backup UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP 3 When the trigger type is changed a password input window appears by touching the OK button Input the password for the backup restore When the password is verified the settings are reflected and then the screen returns to the trigger backup setting screen When the trigger type
211. er connection 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection OK Cancel 2 Communication setting Ethernet I F assignment ChNo Ethernet standard 1 F CRNo Ethernet standard 1 F l E71 i Connect ion 2_ Ethernet YASKAWA ChNo rnet standard I F ChNo J Ethernet standard I F L3 et OMRON 0 None 2 Definition of ChNo O None 5 8 External device Other connection 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection n Cancel 15 6 La 8 19 eL al 0 Lt 2 13 14 s Canel Enter oA Communication setting Ethernet F assignment Ethernet standard I F E 1 Connection Ethernet standard I F None ChNo J Ethernet standar ChNo Ethernet standard I F 0 None 0 None 4 Definition of ChNo 0 None 5 8 External device Other connection 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection 0K Cancel 3 1 Communication Setting After the screen shown left is displayed touch the channel number specification menu BOX when changing the channel number Ea EChannel number setting operation in this section For changing the parameter settings touch the driver display BOX lt 3 3 2 Communication Detail Setting If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the Communication Setting screen If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Commun
212. er than logging files are not displayed on GOT When the folder in which there is no file displayed on the screen cannot be deleted confirm whether there is other file in CF card or USB memory by using personal computer etc X m Z O oO lt x m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 6 2 Various Data Control 6 49 6 50 2 Precautions for operation a Precautions during folder file operation Create Delete Copy File output etc Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is processing folders and files the processing continues to be executed Example Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is creating a folder the folder is created Therefore do not pull out the CF card while the Processing message is on the screen after CF card access switch has been turned OFF While GOT is accessing to other file Alarm data etc When folder file processing for the logging is excecuted while the GOT is in access to other files CF card access LED ON the GOT executes folder file processing for the logging after the processing for other files is completed Therefore it may take some time to finish the process of the logging folder file The Processing message is displayed on the screen 6 2 Various Data Control 6 2 4 Operation log information zZ O f f W Function of operation log information O Operation log fil
213. eration Verifies weather selected record matches to the device value of the controller After executing loading saving with advanced recipe verifies weather its contents are reflected 7 Touch the check box of the recipe file to Data control Data control Advanced Recipe information x select the file earn size Touch the Execute button 7 E USB drive Free space 477 0MB Drive capacity 483 0MB 1 files are selected 0 9KB in m Number of selectable files in this folder 1 files 2 As the Advanced Recipe Record List screen rogram Data Control Advanced Recipe Information Advanced Recipe Record List J is displayed select the record comment for Eine lb E G1P matching the device value Name Recipe No 1 Ye Record Comment Process 2 setting Process 3 setting Process 4 setting 3 If touch the button dialog box Record No 1 shown left is displayed Record Comment Process 1 setting 4 f touch the OK button starts matching record Execute record matching Vv Continued to the next page 6 2 Various Data Control 5 When matching is completed completion Matching sreeressed dialog box is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog box 6 If selected record does not match to the Matching error device value of controller the dialog box shown left is displayed 6 34 6 2 Various Data Control 13 Device value delete operation
214. ernet status CHECK sccacascennartedaticntecesdecntsacensseenievenddadsensebeeeanedeqeateciadosdaceessteadedeadteedeceedade 5 31 g2 210619 ve lt 1 1 Geena ne en E E ee ee EA E eee 5 32 oie I 2 181 o gt 61 8 lt 1 Coenen nee en ee en en nee ne ee eee 5 32 5 2 2 Display operation of batch Self check ccc cccccc cece eeeceeeeseeeceeeseeeeaeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeesaeesaeeseees 5 33 5 2 3 Operation of batch self check ccccccccccceccceecceeeceeeceeeeceeecaeeseeecaeecaueeseeesseeseeesseeeaeesseeess 5 34 DATA CONTROL 6 1 Data Storage LOCAUOM was ee erccctssste ss ettsnd neneiia ea aeaa e Ea aaia de aa 6 1 6 1 1 Data type and the storage location ccc ccccccccseceseeeeeecceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeesaeeeseeeseeesaeetaes 6 1 6 1 2 OS version confirmation cccceccceeccceeecececeeecaueceeecacecauecsueceueesessaeecsusssueesueeseeesaeesaeeeeses 6 3 6 1 3 Capacity confirmation of the project data downloading location ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 4 CLT DEPAY IG ri E EE EEE E eee ee eee 6 5 De VA DaT CONTO eie E E A E A EE 6 6 OAN Alarm NONNA O eeaeee ie iee EE E EE EE E S E E EE E a 6 6 6 2 2 Advanced recipe information ccceccceccceeeceeecee cece eeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeseeeeseeeaeeeseeess 6 13 D23 LOGGING INFOMATION sarren E a E E E E E E 6 38 6 2 4 Operation log information aneonneannennennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnsrrsrrrnrnnrnrrrsrrsrreninnrnnrnnrrnrrerrnr
215. error message is displayed 4 f OK button is touched it returns to the password input screen again Password error 5 f gt lt button is touched it returns to security setting screen About forgetting to return to the original level after changing security level temporarily When use GOT after temporarily changing the security level do not forget to return the security level to the original level 2 54 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation 2 3 5 Utility call key setting W Utility call key setting function The key position for calling the main menu of the utility can be specified For the key position the specification of 1 point from 4 corners on the screen or no specification can be set No specification can be set when GT Designers is used By keeping pressing the screen a setting to switch the screen to the utility is available This prevents a switching to the utility by an unintentional operation Operation settings by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 Set the utility call key at GOT set up in Environmental Setting of GT Designers or in System Environment of GT Designer2 When change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting by Display screen of the GOT UTILITY FUNCTION O Z W 2 a 2 z W a O Q _ Zz5 LOL gt Ww LIN l a Na O aog L gt eGT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 9 GOT Di
216. erted to Unicode text file C i E TXT conversion G1L TXT conversion Del File or folder is deleted 3 Delete operation Create Folder New folder is created d o d oo 7 Folder create operation WE Display operation of logging information Main menu Data control lt gt gt 1 3 Utility Display Touch Data control Data control Logging information Data control Logging infomation Da g a elect drive PROJECTT LOGOOOT lt i ndName i olze USB drive CSV LOGO0001 18 7KB LOGO0001_0001 18 7KB 09 02 09 e space 953 OMB ive capacity 955 OMB Operate Logging file 1 files are selected 512 2KB in_total Number of selectable files in this folder 5 files Select all files GIL gt CSY GILSTXT Cancel selection Copy Move Rename CreateFolder Del 6 38 6 2 Various Data Control E Example of logging information display Data control Data control Logging information A PROJECT I A Built in CF card is Bi 1L ILOGO0001_000 14 07 30 909 13 42 31L LOGO0001 00C 07 30 09 3 42 E USB drive a 07 30 09 09 02 09 09 02 09 ree space 953 OMB Drive capacity 955 OMB 1 files are selected 512 2KB in_total Number of selectable files in this folder 5 files Select all files GILCSY GILSTXT Cancel selection Copy Move Rename CreateFolder Del Number Item Description 1 Drive The target drive can be selected Eve
217. es created with the operation log function can be copied deleted or renamed etc T f gt Without using a personal computer you can manage operation log files on the GOT For details of the operation log function refer to the following manual X gt eGT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 22 OPERATION LOG FUNCTION p eGT Designer2 Version U Screen Design Manual 15 2 Operation Log Function Q D oa For GT For GT lt 6 es ee or Lu na 9 Displaying file The file folder name data size and creating date amp time BExample of operation log information ao f folder data are displayed display 2 Operation of G10 CSV ion S ee G10 file of operation log file is converted to CSV file APATO Sale Z CSV conversion G10 TXT conversion E OG G10 G10 file of operation log file is converted to Unicode text 2 Operation of G10 CSV conversion Z 5 TXT conversion file G10 TXT conversion q D q z9 Del File or folder is deleted File or folder is deleted folder is deleted 3 Delete operation TE OEQ ozo Create Folder Cae 2 7 Folder create operation 5 Switching display T ader Display order of operation log is switched 8 a Display order switching operation Q Search Operation logs are searched logs are Operation logs are searched b Search operation Latest Displays the latest operation log in a list 9 Latest display lt O Lu T O LL l Lu o X
218. eseeeseeeseeesseeseeeeseeeseeeseeesseeeseeeseeeeaees 2 2 2 ee TE S N eere E a E A E N eee 2 2 2 1 2 Transparent setting Transparent mode setting cccceecceecceecceeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeaeeeseeseeesaees 2 6 2 1 3 Cleaning of display section Clean cc ceccccecccceeceeeeeeceeeeceeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeesaeeesaeeess 2 8 Nee WACOM RGB SEUN eaen e e e des EO EE E aes a a 2 10 Mea SIV UIIIN NS CNS CIN Ose sheme ernest mciecrmeisiesaeetecestieeninc ata raa sa wiave E sen ctenen ssc aaeasiareannestecieeaaeneasiader Sane 2 18 2 1 6 License MANAGEMENT ccccecccecccececeeeceeeceueecaeeceueceeescaeesauecsueeaueesaeecaeessueseuessaeeseeeseeeeas 2 35 2 1 7 Behavior of duplicate IPS sass edscuioscrceldinnninantsod meccismedeadanacan dag saatonbiedintncbaied Syeaeanduadagaanjodsonenaadeeenaaelen 2 37 2 BUPA IN E E des seer ba E EE EE EE E EE eee 2 40 2 2 1 Display setting TUN CUOMS sesiecactencatscninavexcecescarcsaanisan sd danke aax Ea Aa AENEA ATAARE aaa 2 40 2 2 2 Display operation of display setting ccccccccccceeeceeeeseeeceeeseeeseeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeeseesseeeseeeseeess 2 43 2 2 3 Display setting OPEratiOns cccccscccsecccececeeecseeceeceueesucecueecauecseecsueeeueeseeesaeeseeeseeesseneess 2 44 2 2 4 Brightness Contrast adjustment cccccccceecceeeceeeceecaeeeceeeceeeceuesaueceueesaeeceuecegeseueeaeeeaas 2 47 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation cccccc
219. etails of battery lt Hardware 8 OPTION Maintenance Item Description Setting range Unit oints 5 sees Designer2 Designer3 r Reference Set vaton time orte Hardware ets energization time fo Backlight maint int i tification output 0 to 100 Ao ight maintenance maintenance notification output o a ane ae 1000 Shutoff time notification period When 0 no message notification lt At factory can hours Detection O to 100000 hour The time is counted only when shipment 0 gt wr backlight is lit in every ten minutes a Replacement Sets energization time for the Display section oe ae maintenance notification output O to 100 4000 hours maintenance time a l When 0 no message notification lt At factory notification period The time is counted only when shipment 0 gt O to 100000 hour energized in every ten minutes Touch key Sets touch key touching count for the 0 to 200 maintenance time maintenance notification output 10000 tg ihe lt At factory notification count When 0 no message notification times shipment 0 gt 0 to 2000000times Counts by every screen touch sa Sets built in flash memory writing count Built in flash memory for the maintenance notification output 0 to 200 maintenance time 1000 times When 0 no message notification lt At factory notification count Counts by every writing in built in flash shipment 0 gt 0 to 200000times Y ENY WIRING p memory E
220. f copy destination The copied file cannot be copied to its own folder Select the different folder If touch Exec button the dialog box shown left is displayed Touch OK button lf there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the screen shown left is displayed without starting to copy If touch the OK button overwrites the file If touch Cancel button cancels to copy When the copy is completed the dialog of completion is displayed If touch OK button the dialog box is closed 4 Rename operation Rename the selected file 09 02 00 13 00 002 469 8KB 13 03 E USB drive 469 8KB 13 07 BMP SNAPOOO4 469 8KB 13 09 Free space 952 8MB Drive capacity 955 OMB 1 files are selected 469 8KB in total Number of selectable files in this folder 4 files IMGOOOH Aloo _ lt lt aC DE AIVIETRI TTI UIT OP AISIDIFIG H JIRIL AVXICIVI BNI AY Eater The file name will be changed Current name SNAPOOO1 BMP New name IMGO001 BMP Do you want to proceed Process completed 1 Select the check box of the file to be renamed by touching 2 Touch the Rename button and then the screen shown left is displayed Input the file name to be changed Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol 3 Touch the Enter button and then the dialog b
221. f you close i the window before pressing Confirm Do you want to proceed O QO 4 After completing the settings for all the items x you want to change close Long time recording i settings with the gt lt button a I Lu 5 When closing Multimedia Setting or 2 Communication Setting with the gt lt button the new setting contents are reflected ma H Z O O lt x QO INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 2 25 WE Version control Version control is executed when the software version of the multimedia unit is upgraded 1 Display operation of multimedia setting version control By installing a CF card in which the updated program is stored the program can be updated Prepare the updated program from either of the followings e CD ROM of GT Works3 or GT Designer2 Contact your local distributor Main Menu GOT setup GOT main unit setup lt gt gt 1 3 Utility Display GOT setup GOT main unit setup Touch Multimedia setting Communication setting gt 3 1 Communication Setting Multimedia Version control Version control Multimedia Unit version 00 setting menu Unit software version 01 01 00 Unit software Update menu While updating unit S W the Touch Version control Touch the unit software update menu to switch to the software update screen
222. files are selected 512 2KB in total Number of selectable files in this folder 5 fil 3 Select the target folder PATENO TOEP TANE Bii i Selecting a folder is not needed for moving EEE directly below the drive fn LOGO0001_0001 Bal 2KB 07 30 09 13 42 22KB 130 L0G00001_ n E USB drive 512 2KB 07 30 09 g CSV LOGOO00 1 0002 18 7KB 09 02 09 3 CSV L0G00001_ 000 18 7KB 09 02 09 Free space 947 OMB y Drive capacity 955 0MB E 1 files are selected 512 2KB in Pie Number of selectable files in this folder 5 fil Please select destination Vv Continued to next page 6 2 Various Data Control 6 46 Target file LOGO000 71 0002 61L Do you want to move the file This folder already contains the file LOGOO00 17 0002 61L Do you want to replace the existing file Modified 07 10 07 10 10 with this one Modified 07 30 09 13 42 Completed the process Succeeded Failed 0 6 2 Various Data Control If touch the Exec button the dialog box shown left is displayed Touch the OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen When only file with the same name exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the movement Touching the OK button overwrites the file If touch the Cancel button cancels moving When moving is completed completion dialog box is displayed If touch the OK b
223. firm button the setting contents are determined If you touch the Default button the setting contents can be returned to the initial values 4 if you touch the Confirm button without l l touching the lt button the dialog box on the Changes are discarded if you close left is displayed the window before pressing Confirm Do vou want to proceed 5 After completing the settings for all the items you want to change in Network settings when touching the sa button the display returns to Multimedia setting menu 2 30 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings E Multimedia screen 1 Display operation of multimedia screen Create the multimedia screen switch used to display the multimedia screen on the project screen Touch the multimedia screen switch so that the screen is switched to the multimedia screen The video image play video and file selection menu can be switched on the multimedia screen For details of the procedures for creating the extended function switch used to display the multimedia screen refer to the following manual eGT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 2 6 Setting Special Function Switch GT Designer2 Version L Screen Design Manual 6 2 5 Setting items of special function switch OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP Play video position display function For using the video playing position display function on the play video screen the software version
224. for the installing BootOS and standard monitor OS methods GT Designer3 1 GOT or GT Designer2 SE GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 GT Designer3 g _ CFcardor _ or GT Designer2 VSB MeMOLy OS file write 2 Sc GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 3 GOT gt CF card or GOT Via USB interface or RS 232 interface or Ethernet interface 1 It m I s le BootOS or standard OS installation GOT BootOS or standard monitor OS installation gt lt gt ae CF card or Install the CF card or USB USB memory memory in GOT e Installed directly from the GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 e When GOT is remote installed easily using the CF card or USB memory USB memory OS file BootOS standard Z upload monitor OS installation Ve Install OS f GOT to GOT DLN e Insta rom O GOT P lt gt l 2 GOT using CF card or USB memory CF card or Install the CF USB memory card or USB memory in GOT When installing the BootOS and standard monitor OS standard monitor OS has to be installed in GOT in advance Refer to the following for the installation which uses GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 lt gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals eGT Designer2 VersionL Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Refer to the following for the installation which uses GOT
225. g COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING Video Unit Settings Input Signal NTSC Resolution 640x480 Touch WARNING Changes are valid after Touch an item to be set Video Unit Settings rebooting the GOT Confirm DEBUG DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 2 11 2 12 3 Operating the video unit setting Video Unit Settings Input Signal Resolution WARNING Changes are valid after rebooting the GOT Confirm Changes are discarded if you close s the window before pressing Confirm Do you want to proceed 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings When you touch the setting item the setting contents change Input signal PAL NTSC Resolution 720 x 480 768 x 576 640 x 480 When you touch the Confirm button the setting contents are determined If you touch the Xa button without touching the Confirm button the dialog box on the left is displayed After completing the settings for all the items you want to change in Video Unit Settings when closing Video Unit Settings and Video RGB Setting Communication Setting with the X button the GOT is restarted and the new setting contents are reflected WE Video Display Setting 1 Functions of the video display settings The target for the video settings and the preview channel can be selected and the captive area
226. g file or Alarm log file Free space 481 6MB Drive capacity 483 0MB 1 files are selected 0 1KB in total Number of selectable files in this folder 1 files Select all files GIA gt CSY G1A gt TXT Graph Cancel selection Copy 6 2 Various Data Control W The display example of alarm information Z O Data control Data control Alarm info x 3 a a Built in CF card Size Date Time iL mes AAMOOO0 1 SS 0 1KB 09 03 09 13 14 p _ JIleoo iu 08 03 09 13 14 E USB drive op ke ke LU 525 Op LU ioe nS aog Space 481 6MB Drive capacity 483 0M T selected 0 1KB in total Z C le files in folder 1 files ey N Select all files G1A gt CSY B1A gt TXT T E Graph Z Z zZ ote Cancel selection Copy Del S 7 5 z253 pi JE Number Desorption E OES ozo The drive which displays file or folder can be selected When CF card or USB memory is not installed the following drives are not displayed CF card A Built in CF card B Memory card USB memory E USB drive 2 Check box If the check box is selected up to 512 files can be selected 3 Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR 1 Select drive O Displays the file name or folder name TT For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed Q
227. ges are valid after rebooting the G Confirmn Changes are discarded if you c lose the window before pressing Confirm Do vou want to proceed 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings When you touch the setting item the setting contents change Input signal PAL NTSC Resolution 720 x 480 640 x 480 Resolution automatically switches to 640 x 480 when NTSC is selected and to 768 x 576 when PAL is selected When you touch the Confirm button the setting contents are determined If you touch the gt lt button without touching the Confirm button the dialog box on the left is displayed After completing the settings for all the items you want to change close Video Unit Settings with the gt lt button When closing Multimedia Setting or Communication Setting with the gt lt button the new setting contents are reflected E Video setting 1 Function of Video setting The captive area and image quality can be set i D ot Seti For GT For GT em escription etting range P siei Designer2 Designer3 Captive area Horizontal 100 to 100 UTILITY FUNCTION lt At factory shipment 0 gt Vertical 100 to 100 lt At factory shipment 0 gt The captive area in the horizontal direction Image Quality and Color Tone 100 to 100 and vertical direction for the video and the lt At factory shipment 0 gt Video setting 6 zZ z anT lt 8 gt 558 image quality color tone
228. hannels Communication drivers installed in the GOT can be assigned to channels Even without setting Controller Setting on GT Designer3 or Communication Setting on GT Designer2 communication with controller is available by assigning channel No with this function DEBUG 3 1 4 Channel Driver assign operation b Changing the assignment of communication drivers to channels Without using GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 the assignment of communication drivers to channels can be changed When change a communication driver the alternative communication driver has to be installed in GOT in advance SELF CHECK 2 Standard interface display BOX Display the communication interface included as standard in GT16LIL There are the following 4 types RS232 06 For communicating with PC GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 controller RS 422 485 For communicating with controller USB For communicating with PC GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 Ethernet For communicating with PC GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 controller DATA CONTROL 3 Extend interface display BOX The name of the unit installed in the extend interface is displayed Displays None when any unit is not mounted For details of each uint refer to the following lt 3 Hardware 8 1 Communication Unit Extend interface Ethernet interface Standard interface RS 232 interface Standard interface INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND S
229. he mark is also counted as one character Mm LU QO b Character strings that cannot be set to folder file The following character strings cannot be used as a folder name or a file name Even small characters of those cannot be used e COM1 to COM9 e LPT1 to LPT9 e AUX e CON y e NUL e PRN e CLOCK T In addition the folder file name showed below cannot be used 5 e The folder name which begins with G1 a o e Folder name and file name which begin with period e Folder name and file name which finish with period e Folder name and file name which have only one period or two periods c For deleting the folder The folder in which the file exists cannot be deleted Delete the folder after having deleted the files In addition on the operation log information screen the file other than that for operation log is not displayed on GOT When the folder in which there is no file displayed on the screen cannot be deleted confirm whether there is other file in CF card or USB memory by using personal computer etc X m za 8 lt x m 2 Precautions for operation a Precautions during folder file operation Create Delete Copy File output etc Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is processing folders and files the processing continues to be executed Example Even if CF card access switch has been turned OFF while GOT is creating a folder the folder is created
230. he OK button 6 2 Various Data Control 6 21 l O ag _ 2 lt a lt m 6 22 4 Delete operation Folder and file to be used on advanced recipe are deleted 1 Touch the folder to delete or the check box of the file to delete to select the file GIP ARPOOOO1 0 9KB 07 04 08 14 21 E CSV ARPOO001 E TXT JARP00001 0 7KB 07 04 08 14 32 E USB drive 1 4KB 09 03 09 09 23 Free space 482 5MB Drive capacity 483 0MB 1 files are selected 0 9KB in_ total Number of selectable files in this folder 3 files Select all files GIPSCSY GIPSTXT Create61P Execute Cancel selection Copy Move Rename createrotder Del 2 If touch Del button the dialog box mentioned left is displayed ep If touch OK button the file folder is deleted aea e While executing Processing message Do you want to proceed appears on the screen If touch Cancel button the deletion is canceled 3 When the deletion is completed the completion dialog box is displayed If touch OK button the dialog box is closed Deletion has been completed 4 When it cannot be deleted the dialog box showed at left appears Only when deleting The folder cannot be deleted because folder is executed fil fold ist i le i nee i aly ae athe GOT Verify that there is no file in the folder and execute the delete operation again L gt 6 2
231. he FG terminal LG terminal and protective ground terminal of the GOT power to the protective ground conductors dedicated to the GOT Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction Terminal screws which are not to be used must be tightened always at torque 0 5 to 0 8 N m Otherwise there will be a danger of short circuit against the solderless terminals Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque If any solderless spade terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire offcuts from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation Plug the communication cabl
232. he changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the GOT maintenance screen If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the GOT maintenance screen Displays the present value of Backlight maintenance time notification period Display section maintenance time notification period Touch key maintenance time notification count and Built in flash memory maintenance time notification count which are additioned for the maintenance time notification respectively and resets these values For maintenance time notification setting refer to the following 2 4 1 Maintenance time setting WE Addition times reset function Resets the value which is additioned by the 2 4 1 amp Maintenance time setting to 0 no For GT For GT Item Description Designer2 Designer3 Backlight power on addition time reset Function to reset the power on addition times to 0 a O Display power on addition time reset Function to reset the power on addition times to 0 _ 6 O Touch key pushing addition times reset Function to reset the pushing addition times to 0 Se O Build in flash memory writing addition times reset Function to reset the writing addition times to 0 O O 2 70 2 4 Maintenance Function WE Display operation of Addition times reset Main menu GOT setup gt gt 1 3 Utility Display GOT setup Touch GOT maintenance Addtion times reset GOT setup GOT
233. he drive where the data is stored and gt then touch the Backup all area button gt 2 The dialog box shown left appears The SRAM data will be backed up to Check the description of the dialog box To back At up all data in the SRAM user area touch the OK button iw pee Tere in eS ene To cancel the backup touch the Cancel EG process ends Do not turn off the GOT gt W until the process is completed button af Do you want to execute backup Boo oy eine Rak 3 When touching the OK button in step2 the Sus Do you realir uant to aeae dialog box shown left appears for recheck si ozog To start the backup touch the OK button To cancel the backup touch the Cancel button 4 When the file whose name is the same exists A in the destination folder the dialog box shown The backup file already exists left appears without starting the backup O Created date 09 31 10 16 14 To overwrite the file touch the OK button z Do you want to overwrite the file To cancel the backup touch the Cancel i button H a Z O O 5 The completion dialog box appears when the QO backup is completed To close the dialog box touch the OK button 4 3 9 Motion program SV43 I O This function is available for a motion controller OS SV43 special model For details of this function please contact our company INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 4 3 Memory Da
234. he human sensor detects no human movement until the Human Sensor Detection Signal System Signal 2 1 65 turns OFF can be set Only selectable languages are displayed EE Japanese English English Ha Chinese Simplified Hre Chinese Traditional EEN Korean Deutsch German lt At factory shipment User s selection gt 0 to 60 seconds 2 lt At factory shipment 5 seconds gt 0 to 60 minutes lt At factory shipment 0 minutes gt ON OFF lt At factory shipment OFF gt lt At factory shipment OFF gt Effective Invalid lt At factory shipment Effective gt O to 10 lt At factory shipment 10 gt 0 to 4 lt At factory shipment Osec gt OMin 10Sec to 60Min OSec lt At factory shipment 0Min 10Sec gt The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For details of the fonts refer to the following manual po MEg GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 5 Specifications of Applicable Characters GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 3 Specifications of Applicable Characters If setting O the title screen is not hidden The title screen is always displayed for 4 seconds or longer which changes depending on the project data contents The monitoring time corresponding to the sensor detect level 0 to 10 is as follows As the sensor detect level becomes greater the sensitivity of the human sensor becomes h
235. he initialization touch the Cancel Do you really want to execute button lt O Lu T O 4 The completion dialog box appears when the initialization is completed z To close the dialog box and restart the GOT 5 touch the OK button x QO INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 4 3 Memory Data Control 4 25 4 26 2 Operation to restore data Ai Created date 05 31 10 16 14 The above data will be restored After completion of restoration GOT will be rebooted Do you want to execute restoration Will be rebooted Do you really want to execute 4 3 Memory Data Control To restore data in the SRAM user area to a drive Select the drive where the data is stored and then touch the Restoration button The dialog box shown left appears Check the description of the dialog box To restore all data in the SRAM user area touch the OK button To cancel the restoration touch the Cancel button When touching the OK button in step2 the dialog box shown left appears for recheck To start the restoration touch the OK button To cancel the restoration touch the Cancel button The completion dialog box appears when the restoration is completed To close the dialog box and restart the GOT touch the OK button 3 Operation to back up all data in the SRAM user area zZ O 1 To back up data in the SRAM user area to a T drive 5 Select t
236. he left is displayed DEBUG 10 After completing all the items to set if you touch Changes are discarded if you close the XI button the display returns to the ea ue tee ea preview screen stept 11 After completing the settings for all the items you want to change in the video display settings when closing Video Display Preview with the gt lt button the display returns to Video RGB Setting SELF CHECK DATA CONTROL Precautions for setting Incorrect settings may disrupt or stop the video image If this happens returning the settings to their default values restores normal display This phenomenon depends on the video camera or other device connected Use setting values that provide proper display INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 2 15 E RGB Display Setting 1 Functions of the RGB display settings The RGB clock phase and screen position can be set it D a A For GT For GT m escription etting range j x ie Designer2 Designer3 Channel 1 2 The target for the RGB settings and the SAN ao SOIPMEnE IA l ClockPhase 100 to 100 preview channel can be selected and the l RGB Display M 7 lt At factory shipment 0 gt 4 RGB clock phase and screen position Settings l Display position Horizontal 100 to 100 O horizontal direction and vertical direction lt At factory shipment 0 gt paneer Vertical 100 to 10
237. he x 2 1 7 duplicate IPs network afterwards Switching message languages oo lo Setting the startup screen display time and screen saving time Setting the backlight to ON or OFF during screen 2 2 Display saving Satna me vatov aom aseron o o Setng the buzzer voume ardindan morenza 0 o Sarono ruens Setting the VNC server function al o 2 3 9 Setting the maintenance notification times for the Maintenance backlight and display TE timing setting Setting the number of maintenance notifications for B touch keys and the built in flash memory GOT Addition Resetting accumulated hours and counts for TE maintenance times reset maintenance time notifications d GOT start Displaying the GOT start date and time current time 243 time and accumulated operating hours i Displaying the GOT information information Continued to next page 1 2 1 2 Utility Function List Supported A Partly supported x Not supported For GT For GT Item Functions overview Reference Designer2 Designer3 Assigning channel numbers and communication 31 drivers to communication interfaces l Setting communication parameters setting or deleting sequence program protection key words 39 canceling sequence program protection status When connecting to FX series CPU Z O Ee 8 Z LL gt H gt Communi Commu Commu cation setting nication nication setting setting 2 zZ Displa
238. heck box of the G1A file to display in a graph to select the file If touch Graph button displays the historical graph or tally graph according to the setting of the extended alarm watch When move a graph operate as follows e If touch A V button moves the graph up down line by line e If touch 4 X button moves the graph up down by one screen e If touch lt P button moves the graph to left right by one column e If touch 44 gt gt button moves the graph to left right by one screen If touch gt lt button closes the graph 6 2 Various Data Control i e l ag H Z O lt m lt m a Historical graph display Data control Data control Alarm info Historical graph display Occur quipment A failure ine A stop Material shortage in Tan Major error in Conveyance quipment B fai lire e Displays the generated time confirmed time W and restored time of each alarm e Displays the time scales by 30 minutes interval in the bottom of the graph e The alarms generated in the order of registering alarm are displayed e By the name of each alarm the contents set for the message of the general alarms by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 are displayed with up to 12 characters of full size character up to 24 half size characters The 13th of full size character and after the 25th and after for half size character are not displayed
239. hernet connection and then the communication detail setting screen of Channel No 1 is displayed E Assign Ethernet I F Several drivers are assigned to the same Ethernet interface However only one GOT IP address is assigned per interface By changing the settings of one interface the GOT IP address GOT port No download default gateway and subnet mask settings of other drivers which are assigned to the same interface are also changed 7 Touch the Assign Ethernet I F button in Communication setting 7 Communication Setting Standard F Setting Assign Ethernet F Channe l Dr iver assign ChNo RS232 5V suppl ChNo USB 1 A nA L QCPU L OS7 1024 9 Host PC ChNo RS4227485 i ChNo Ethernet 0 None None Extend I F Setting Extend F 1 Extend F 2 Ist ChNo GT15 75QBUSL ChNo None 2 Q BUS 0 None 2nd ChNo None ChNo None 0 None 0 None 3rd ChNo None ChNo None 0 None 0 None Definition of ChNo O None 8 External device 0ther connection 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection OK Cancel 2 Touch the driver display BOX of the Communication setting Ethernet I F assignment communication parameter to be set in the ChNo Ethernet standard F a Tiere gt Ethernet I F assignment screen b Ethernet standard I F Ee Ethernet standard 1 F 0 None f None Definition of Ch
240. hipment Turn off the CF card access switch before installation If You do not install the Cores turn off the GOT and remove a CF card 7 5 CoreOS 4 Turning the CF card access switch off executes Core OS installation Z O Cores Install Wer 02 01 00 E 2 a z LL Be MOG eel ig EE by RIVE REBT OEE z amp fio not turn o he power supply Do not push the reset button Sapaded Writing data Es O Fhase Z i 225 Progress ZUG Es ae W Sime a A 5 When the installation is completed the dialog as shown below is displayed The POWER LED of the GOT blinks green orange at the installation completion Confirm that the message is displayed and power the GOT off Cores Install ver 02 01 00 E COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING T LEL Ie Hoe Re J Fh FER oT SEEL Installation is completed Turn OFF GOT and remove CF card Phase SSS S faa Progress A 6 Remove the CF card after powering the GOT off lt O l Powering the GOT on again displays the screen as shown below The GOT goes to the status of factory shipment L Install OS Standard monitor OS communication driver etc or download project data as required D For how to install each OS or download project data refer to the following manual lt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 7 COMMUNICATION WITH GOT eGT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual z
241. his folder 0 files Select all files Cancel selection Copy Rename Del 6 2 Various Data Control If touch a drive of select drive the information of the touched drive is displayed If touch a folder name the information in the touched folder is displayed If touch a name of the folder of the information in the folder of one higher hierarchy is displayed If touch A button of the scrollbar scrolls up down line by one line If touch Al l button the screen scrolls up down by one screen Touch a check box to select the file For the operations of the delete copy and rename refer to the following Delete 05 KX gt 2 Delete operation CODY cccseeeeeeeeees 3 Copy operation Rename 4 Rename operation If touch gt lt button closes the screen 2 Delete operation Deletes the selected file 1 Touch the check box of the file to delete to select the file Data control Data control Hard copy info Belect drive A 469 8 59 8KB BMP SNAP0002 469 8KB BMP SNAP0003 469 8KB BMP SNAPOOO4 469 8KB BMP SNAPOOO5 469 8KB 09 02 09 09 02 09 09 02 09 09 02 09 E USB drive Free space 952 8MB Drive capacity 955 OMB 1 files are selected 469 8KB in total Number of selectable files in this folder 4 files 2 If touch Del button the screen
242. ialog box is displayed Deletion has been completed If touch OK button the dialog box is closed 4 When it cannot be deleted the dialog box showed at left appears Only when deleting The folder cannot be deleted because folder is executed files or folders exist Verify that there is no file in the folder and Hidden files may exist in the GOT execute the delete operation again 6 2 4 Precautions DATA CONTROL 6 2 Various Data Control 4 Copy operation An operation log file is copied Data contr Belect drive Built in CF card E USB drive Drive capac 955 0 ity MB ol Data control Operation log information At PROJECT 1 OPELOG ndName Size OPELOG_20090730 0000 2 OPEL 0 2KB 07 OPELOG_20090730 0001 8 7KB 09 02 09 OPELOG_20090730 0002 1 0KB 09 02 09 OPELOG_20090902 0000 0 2KB 09 02 09 1 files are selected 2 0KB in_ total Nurber of selectable files in this folder 6 files Select all files 610 03 Latest Data contr Drive capac 955 0M Cancel selection PEI l OPELOG_2 5 50 610 OPEL E USB drive W OKE 07 E CSV Jor etos_20090730 0001 S K 09 02 09 15 24 E CSV 0PELOS_20090730 0002 10KB 09 02 09 16 17 E 610 oPELOS_2009090 0000 2 IK 09 02 09 16 19 Free space 950 8MB ity B Copy CreateFolder ol Data dest inati
243. ication Setting screen In the Communication Setting screen touching the OK Cancel gt lt button restarts and operates the GOT with the changed settings 3 2 Communication Detail Setting Zz O O 3 2 1 Communication detail setting functions gt Fe For GT For GT Function Description Designer2 Designer3 Communication Set various communication parameters of communication devices k parameters setting The settable parameters differ according to the communication device O S For the FX series PLCs key word for protecting program in the PLC can be E m Keyword setting O ZZ zet For the FX series PLCs key word for protecting program in the PLC can be ak Key word deleting ated O Do z For the FX series PLCs the program protection status in the PLC can be Key word protection cancel O cancelled For the FX series PLCs the cancelled program protection status in the PLC Keyword protection l O can be returned to the protection status again 3 2 2 Communication detail setting display operation zZ H Lu n z O q lt 2 zZ Oo oO zZ SE p u gq oO ul 30 lt DL l oz E Communication settings 7 Touch the driver display BOX of the Communication setting i communication parameter to be set in the D Standard F Setting Assign Ethernet F Channe1 Dr ive
244. ice of 10 Record load operation GOT PLC controller P Advanced Save record The device of controller is saved in selected 11 Record save operation Recipe PLC GOT record Record List Match records Selected record is verified to the device value of screen 12 Record match operation GOT PLC controller Delete Device The device value contained in selected record is 13 Device value delete Value deleted operation X m za 8 lt x m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 6 2 Various Data Control 6 13 W Operation of advanced recipe information display Main menu Data control Data control gt 1 3 Utility Display Touch Data control Touch Peon Advanced Recipe infomation Advanced Recipe infomation E USB drive Free space 482 5MB Prive capacity 483 OMB JA PRE ipe information O 0 9KB 07 04 08 4 2 V JARPO000 0 7KDNSNO7 04 08 Mhi ARPOOOO 1 1 4KB gt Operate advanced recipe file files are selected 0 9KB in total 1 Number of selectable files in this folder 3 files Select all files G1P gt CSV GIP TXT CreateGIP Execute 6 14 6 2 Various Data Control E Example of advanced recipe information display 1 Advanced recipe information screen Data control Data control Advanced Recipe information elect drive A SPROJECT 1 i eo Se _ rae F TATAE D is f 31P ARPOO
245. ideo RGB setting E Video unit setting 1 Functions of the video unit settings The video input signal and resolution can be selected Ae For GT For GT Item Description Setting range Designer2 Designer3 Input signal NTSC format PAL format lt At factory shipment NTSC format gt Video Unit PIE The input signal and resolution can be selected Resolution 640 x 480 O ettings 720 x 480 768 x 576 lt At factory shipment 640 x 480 gt 1 GT1675 VN GT1672 VN GT1662 VN GT1655 V cannot be used 2 Can be selected only in PAL format For GT1675M V or GT1665M V the resolution is 640 X 480 Input signal settings Set the input signal as follows according to the output format for the video camera or the like connected If the settings made differ from these video images may not be displayed correctly Output format for video camera or the like Input signal setting NTSC format NTSC PAL format PAL EIA format NTSC CCIR format PAL 2 10 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 2 Displaying the video unit setting Main Menu GOT setup GOT main unit setup En 1 3 Utility Display UTILITY FUNCTION GOT setup GOT main unit setup Touch Video RGB Setting Communication setting lt 3 1 Communication Setting Oo Z W N a 2 z W a O an _ zz5 40E gt Ww LIN l Q Ona O aog l Video Unit Settings Video RGB Video RGB settin
246. igher Sensor detect level Sensor detect time s 2 2 Display Settings POINT 1 Display setting by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 Set title display period screen save time and screen save backlight at GOT set up in Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 or in System Environment of GT Designer2 When change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting by Display screen of the GOT UTILITY FUNCTION GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 9 GOT Display and Operation Setting eGT Designer2 Version L Screen Design Manual 3 8 Setting of the GOT display and operation GOT setup 2 Screen save time Using the system information function can compulsorily switch the controller to the screen saving status Forced Screen Saver Disable Signal or disable the screen save time Automatic Screen Saver Disable Signal set with Utility O Z Lu N Z 2 z Lu a O Q _ zz LO gt Ww LIN a nn O aog GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 6 System Information Setting GT Designer2 Version L Screen Design Manual 3 6 Setting System Information COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING 3 Screen save backlight When Screen save backlight is set to ON using the system information function Backlight OFF output signal can switch the backlight OFF from the controller When
247. ight notifying that it is on checking untill the connecting target Executing now confirmation communication ends normally 2 When the connecting target confirmation communication ends its result is notified by dialog box CPU eS check If the connecting target confirmation communication ends normally the dialog box notifying of the normal termination mentioned right is displayed If touch OK button after confirming the result returns to I O check ok 5 1 Diagnostic Functions UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DEBUG x O LLI I O LL l LLI 2 COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS DATA CONTROL INSTALLATION OF APPENDICES lf the dialog box mentioned right is displayed after selecting connecting target confirmation or during CPU communication CPU communication check check confirm the following Error The following cause e No misconnection with CPU Connection error H l error L gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual parameter setting error for GT Works3 and a controller used 1 5 Verifying GOT recognizes controllers e GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 OK 3 3 6 Verifying GOT recognizes controllers e No missettings of parameter L 3 2 Communication Detail Setting e No hardware error gt Hardware 10 TROUBLESHOOTING If touch OK button in the dialog bo
248. ign Manual 2 5 Clock Function Adjust the time of controller clock data to the clock data of GOT S IG rr at SES ea we Su S50Z Broadcast l l l l l l l l Sis It is same as set in the GOT setup in Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 or in System Environment of GT a 2 Designer2 050 ko eGT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 9 2 How to match clock data between the GOT and controllers eGT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 2 5 Clock Function Adjust the GOT and controllers to the controller whose clock data is used as a base O 1 mM E Lu A Q Adjust Broadcast l It is same as set in the GOT setup in Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 or in System Environment of GT Designer2 MEg eGT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 9 2 How to match clock data between the GOT and controllers 5 eGT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 2 5 Clock Function O None No adjustment of clock data L WW 7 O ma H zZ O O lt x QO INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 2 3 Clock setting Adjust ime setting 10 18 2010 13 15 34 MON If touch the setup item the setup contents is changed Adjust GOT internal battery Norma l 1 voltage status l Broadcast l Adjust Broadcast l None 2 If touch the OK button the GOT restarts and operate
249. ile APPENDICES 6 2 Various Data Control 6 7 E Alarm information operation 1 The display operation of alarm information Data control Data control Alarm info Belect drive A Free space 431 6MB Drive capacity 483 0MB 1 files are selected 0 1KB in total Number of selectable files in this folder 1 files Select all files G1A gt CSV GIA gt TXT Graph Cancel selection Copy Del If touch a drive of select drive the information of the touched drive is displayed If touch a folder name the information of the touched folder is displayed If touch a folder of the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy is displayed If touch A button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch Ag button the screen scrolls up down by one screen Touch the check box to select the file Refer to the following for G1A gt CSV G1A gt TXT delete copy graph operations G1A gt CSV G1A gt TXT L 2 G1A CSV conversion operation G1A TXT conversion operation Delete 0000 3 Deletion operation CODY esiicetetiec emacs 4 Copy operation Graph 006 ea 5 Graph operation If touch gt lt button the screen is closed 2 G1A CSV conversion operation G1A TXT conversion operation The selected G1A file is converted to CSV file or TXT file
250. ill not be saved The system status log is for manufacturer investigation only Customers cannot view it 2 Touch the Start button to start Batch self check Export system status log Touch the button to return to the main Batch self check menu Start batch self check W View self check results menu After completion of Batch self check the following screen is displayed Touch each item to display the details screen Touch the Stop button to return to the Batch self check screen 5 2 Batch Self Check 5 34 5 35 1 Display example of details screen Touch the items to display the following screens Touch the button to return to the View self check results menu Self check Batch self check System status 1 Installed OS OS_name Version OSBTOS OUT 04 00 65 U OSMONT OUT 04 00 65 i F1I6STG FON 04 00 52 F12STG FON 04 00 52 OSMONT G1D 04 00 65 OSMONT G1 FTTNMG CMABUS 04 00 65 0 04 00 52 U 04 00 64 CMAQDR CMaC24 OSBKUP P P UT 04 00 64 UT 04 00 64 UT 04 00 65 G G Fi 0 CME71 0UT 04 00 64 0 0 0 OSBKU OSBKU GID 04 00 63 G 04 00 63 DDDDDDNDDADADADDDD D Startup information lt p gt System status 2 Touch the button in the left bottom of the screen to display the previous screen Touch the button in the right bottom of the screen to display the next screen 5 2 Batch Self Check 6 DATA CONTROL OS project data scre
251. in the A drive the screen shown left is displayed without starting uploading In this case touching the OK button overwrites the project data of the A drive with the project data with the same name of the A drive Touching the Cancel button cancels uploading When the uploading is completed the dialog box mentioned left is displayed Touching the OK button restarts the GOT b Setup cancel operation By setup cancel setup is canceled This item explains using the A drive 7 Touch A Standard CF Card in Select drive Disable setup 2 Execute now 7 If touch the Upload button the screen mentioned left is displayed 3 If touch the OK button setup cancel is executed 4 When the setup cancel is completed the Disable setup is completed dialog box mentioned left is displayed Restart now Touching the OK button restarts the GOT After restart the GOT monitors with the project data in the C drive l ag _ 2 lt a lt m 6 3 OS Project Information 6 123 6 124 6 3 OS Project Information Meg 7 INSTALLATION OF COREOS zZ O BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR 2 Z m LL gt OS m H 5 op gt For executing the GOT utility install the BootOS and standard monitor OS on the C drive built in flash memory of the E GOT or set the OS boot drive to A Standard CF Card and insert the CF card with OS files into the GOT
252. ination to GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card Hardware 8 3 2 E CF card Hardware 8 5 2 E Install USB peripheral devices 2 Touch A Built in CF Card of Select drive Size Date Time 07 25 08 14 52 ES eee i 3 Touching Upload starts the uploading 7 ro Install Upload Property Data check 4 When the upload is completed the dialog box shown left is displayed Upload leted RGR ESSE Rees Touching OK closes the dialog box l ag _ 2 lt a lt m 6 3 OS Project Information 6 111 4 Property display operation Displays the property of the file stored in the selected folder If touch Property button after selecting the Data control 0S project info 0S into Property display ane ne Size Kind Version Date Time property displaying target folder the Property GTOSMONT OUT Basic 04 00 65 f i j Standard monitor OS GIFI6SIG FON Basic 04 00 52 display shown left IS displayed 6 poar Standard Gothic Font Japanese T 2 i gt J 25TG FOI asi 04 00 e eier In Property display the following information is G10SMONT 61D l Basic 04 00 65 BINT peen Information cic 04 00 05 displayed for each file selected by step1 System Screen Data IS 1FTTNMG FON Basic 04 00 52 True Type Numerical Font G 0SL 08 OUT 92K Option 04 00 63 08 01 08 05 39 Item Descrip
253. input Valid byte count input Function setting 0 Byte 0 1998 Byte 2 16 OK Cance 6 94 6 2 Various Data Control 3 Function setting operation zZ 7 Touch Function setting in the operator setting 2 menu and then the Admin password 2 authentication dialog box is displayed T a H 5 op zZ tu 225 lt 6 dmin pasevord authentication x 2 Input the administrator password iia Character types to be input can be changed with Passvord ee touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital Z OG a z Alphabet small letter oF ez 4a One fZ a 2 0 9 _ feal aC DEL 0 9 Numeric te QIELEIR ITED T 0 When the input is completed touch the Enter z AUSIDIFI GIA IIRL key eee AVRSCIVIBINIM Enter z 3 When the administrator password is correctly FZ Ene operator rams rond authentication input the Function setting screen in displayed ads EE Touch an item to be set A R input Valid byte count input a Automatic logout time 2 0 Byte 0 1998 Fi Byte 2 16 b Auth method ir c Password expiration date d Initial position input e Valid byte count input NM O Lu Ai O dutomatic logout time edit a Touch Automatic logout time and a Input automatic logout time then the Automatic logout time edit oh dialog box is displayed Input the time Automatic logout time When the input is
254. is not changed touching the OK button reflects the settings If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Backup restoration screen COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING 4 When the trigger type is set to Time touch a setting item for Detail and the screen is switched to the trigger time setting screen In the screen specify the days and time that the GOT executes the backup Target data SYS4BKUP Specify the day and time to make backup copies 12 00 Day Select days that the GOT executes x the backup by touching displayed a items z Multiple days can be selected m Time Set the time that the GOT executes the backup by touching the o displayed item a ma H Z O O lt z Precautions for setting When the trigger type is set to Rise set the trigger device with GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 in advance Failure to do so disables the backup setting with Rise set INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 4 2 Debug Setting 4 9 4 3 Memory Data Control 4 3 1 Functions of memory data control Use the CF card or USB memory to backup restore the OS data special data project data screen data and alarm data stored in GOT The format of the CF card or USB memory is also possible The following describes the functions available as the memory data control one For GT For GT Item Des
255. isplay operation of Font check Main menu Self check Diagnostic functions 1 3 Utility Display Touch Self check ie Diagnostic functions Touch Font check Font check T When you want to abort When you want to continue T Font check Notel In amount pages 20 Starts font check If touch the Font check of Diagnostic function the screen for drawing check is displayed Notes on Font Check Judged as normal if the following characters are correctly displayed UNICODE Alphabetic characters etc O x 0000 to 0 x 04F9 From basic Latin to Kirill Hangul characters O x ACOO to 0 x D7A3 Hangul Hangul auxiliary Kanji O x 4E00 to 0 x 9FA5 CJK integrated Kanjis If the characters above are not displayed correctly the fonts may not be installed Install the standard monitor OS again 5 11 5 1 Diagnostic Functions E Font check operation Font check starts by touching Font Check in the Display check screen The character data of the built in font in the built in flash memory can be checked visually to confirm the font drawings by displaying the character data serially on the screen 1 Before execute font check Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the next check in each step during Font check Touching the upper left part of the screen returns to the Display check screen Upper left touch Upper right touch position position The installed font data is displ
256. isplaying OS OS information j j j jki x lt property checking OS data OS project normato Project Downloading uploading deleting copying project files displaying project file property x lt lt Information checking project file data 1 The screen saving time cannot be set 2 The following display and operations are not allowed with the GT11 e Chinese Traditional cannot be displayed e Japanese and Chinese Simplified cannot be selected on the GOT screen Japanese and Chinese Simplified fonts cannot be installed at the same time 3 Applicable to only GT1595 X GT1585V S and GT1585 S 4 Applicable to only GT1595 X 5 Inapplicable to GT1555 Q and GT1550 Q 6 Applicable to only GT1585V S and GT1575V S 7 Available for only GT16 8 Applicable to only GT1595 X GT1585V S GT1585 S GT1575V S and GT1575 S 9 Applicable to only GT1695M X GT1685M S GT1675M S and GT1665M S 10 Inapplicable to GT1555 V GT1555 Q and GT1550 Q 11 Applicable to only GT1695M X and GT1685M S 12 GT1655 V cannot be used APP 4 Appendix2 How to Choose Drive For using a CF card select the A or B drive according to the following 1 Adrive The CF card interface built in the GOT is used as the A drive 2 Bdrive The following two units can be used as the B drive e CF card unit When an additional drive is used use the CF card unit as the B drive of the GOT e CF card extension unit When an additional drive is used us
257. isplaying the VNC server function setting Main menu GOT setup Operation GOT setup Operation Touch VNC server func setting VNC server function setting GOT setup Operation VNC server function setting Operating priority guaranteed time 0 SEC OK Cancel 2 66 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation E VNC server function setting operation 1 Operating priority guaranteed time GOT setup Operation VNC server function setting x 1 Touch the input field for Operating priority ai ei ree guaranteed time to display a keyboard SEC ae Input the authorization guarantee time with the keyboard 2 If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the Operation screen If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Operation screen OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP oe 3 Inthe Operation screen touching the OK i E A HINID maA Cancel gt lt button restarts and operates the LY Lt Led La GOT with the changed settings 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation 2 4 Maintenance Function 2 4 1 Maintenance time setting Energization time touch count and writing times used as a standard for the maintenance time are set For using the maintenance time notification a battery is required Refer to the following for the d
258. itor Starting the CNC monitor ee St x screens1 Debug FX list editor Starting the FX list editor Po x fo x A List editor Starting the A list editor eS X SFC Monitor Starting the SFC monitor CME aE X Ladder editor editor Starting the ladder edit X Starting the MELSEC L troubleshooti arting the roubleshootin troubleshooting j i i X x 0 ERE Motion SFC Starting the motion SFC monitor x monitor Log viewer Starting the log viewer Step pot x x move ela Starting the motion program SV43 editor screens2 SV43 editor ACANA ladder Setting the data storage location for the MELSEC Q L QnA ladder monitor function po Bicbud Setting the storage locations for backup data Debug esting Backup and backup settings setting the maximum X number of backup data and setting whether to specify the backup CPU No or not restoration setting Ea a EIK Trigger backup setting Continued to next page APP 2 Applicable X Not applicable Not required GT 6 Refe Item Functions overview GT16 GT15 SoftGOT GT11 O rence 1000 L gt Backup l Excuting the backup restoration function x O restoration E DA gala Copying the OS special data and project data package g to a CF card or USB memory a A i E acquisition S ke Q 8 a CNC data I O Starting the CNC data I O function Other se O o h T Memory card 5 Sein Formatting a CF card or USB memory x x e
259. ity guaranteed time a keyboard is displayed Enter the operating priority guaranteed time with the keyboard If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the Operation screen If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Operation screen In the Operation screen touching the OK Cancel gt lt button restarts and operates the GOT with the changed settings Relation between the authorization obtained time and the operating priority guaranteed time When the followings are set the authorization obtained time is prioritized After the authorization obtained time is elapsed the GOT automatically obtains the authorization e 1sec or more is set for the authorization obtained time e The authorization guarantee time is set longer than the authorization obtained time 4 Operation status popup notification GOT setup Operation SoftGOT GOT link function setting Operating priority obtained state Not obtained Obtain SoftGOT GOT link function setting Operating authority obtained time SEC 0 Invalid Operating priority guaranteed time SEC Operation status popup notification 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation Cancel If the setting item is touched the Language screen is displayed 7TA YES lt NO If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen retu
260. ive e Delete 2 Delete operation e Property gt 3 Property display operation e Data check 3 gt 4 Data check operation Download gt 5 Download operation SRE Fils 3 Touching the gt lt button closes the screen Delete Property Data check Download 2 Delete operation Deletes the selected file TORE 1 Touch and select the file to delete Belect drive l l ndi IN Size Date Time A Built in CF card 08 08 08 10 15 DIR 08 07 08 22 38 4666K 07 08 08 13 27 E USB drive 2 If touch the Delete button the screen Delete special data mentioned left is displayed G1SPC Check if the deletion target file is specified Do you want to delete correctly Touching the OK button deletes the file Touching the Cancel button cancels the deletion 3 When the detection is completed the dialog Delete is completed mentioned left is displayed If touch the OK button the dialog box is closed 6 76 6 2 Various Data Control 3 Property display operation Displays the property of selected special data Data control Special data information Property Date 08 01 08 Author Drawing S W version GT Designer2 Version 84N B 400 Q68ADV Q68AD Q64AD Op Monitor B 401 Q68ADV Q68AD1 Q64AD 1 0 Monitor B 402 Q68ADV Q68AD Q64AD Graph Mon B 403 Q62DA Q64DA Operation Monitor
261. l 2010 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION REVISIONS 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty six 36 months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be forty two 42 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified If requested by the customer Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or its representative firm may carry out the primary f
262. lecting Dialog at data check normal the file for data check The data check is executed and the result is displayed by the dialog box shown left Data normal 2 If touch OK button the dialog box is closed Dialog at data check abnormal Data error 6 Download operation setup operation a Download operation Transfers the project data stored in the A drive Standard CF Card B drive Extended memory card or E drive USB drive to the C drive Built in flash memory The GOT monitors using the data in the C drive This item explains using the A drive Before download operation 1 Setup cancel When the project data in the A drive or B drive is set up the project data cannot be downloaded to the C drive Execute setup cancel 3 gt 7 b Setup cancel operation before downloading the project data 2 Project data to be stored in a CF card When storing the project data from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 to CF card select C Built in flash memory for Project Data in the Boot Drive l ag H Z O O lt E lt m Communicate with Memory Card Memory Card Write OREA Core OS Write Write Data Project Data OS Special Data Boot OS Destination Memory Card D v Write Check GOT Type GTI 6 V 640x480 v Data cannot be written into the memory card since the capacity of the Boot destination memory card is short by Project Data C Built in Flash Memory vi 4702Kb
263. left Touch pane calibration x O U T O LL LW Press on the X mark to calibrate the touch panel 69 ger is released Note 3 C g y j for 10 seconds O aa H Z O O lt x O INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation 2 59 2 60 4 Touch panel calibration Press on the X mark to calibrate the touch panel is released or 10 seconds Touch panel calibration Completed adjustment of coordinates on touch panel Touch the x button in the upper right If the x button does touch the button below fo Read justment 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation Touch the gt lt point displayed on the lower right Touching the XI button displayed on the upper right returns to the previous screen When the precise touch could not be made touch the Readjustment button to make the setting from step1 again 2 3 7 USB mouse keyboard setting E USB mouse keyboard function To install and use the USB mouse keyboard on the GOT set the USB mouse keyboard UTILITY FUNCTION E USB mouse keyboard setting display operation Main menu GOT setup Operation 1 3 Utility Display 9 weg EE ES Ee ED x T Touch GOT setup OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP Operation Touch USB mouse keyboard zZ E OH
264. low Data type Storage location T 3 Alarm data Extended alarm log file and alarm log file Recipe data Advanced recipe file Recipe file Loagaina Loaaina fil e Standard CF card A drive ogging Logging file Logging gging Logging file USB drive E drive Operation Log Operation log Operation log file Hard copy Image file Hard copy function 4 The USB memory can be used from Utility Cs 7 3 2 Installing using the data control function Utility 6 1 Data Storage Location 6 1 2 OS version confirmation zZ O Confirm the OS version carefully when install BootOS and standard monitor OS O When OS is installed GOT checks and compares the OS version automatically 5 1 When install BootOS When the BootOS to be installed has the older major version GOT displays the installation disapproving message to cancel the installtion so that the older version may not be written Even when the version of the BootOS to be installed has the same or later version the version information and the dialog box for selecting continue not continue will be displayed O Depending on the Installation method the dialog box to be displayed varies e When installing from the standard CF card the dialog box is displayed by the main unit o A T e When installing from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 via USB RS 232 or Ethernet the dialog box is R displayed by the GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 TT aeS 2 When install standard monitor OS com
265. ltimedia 0 None lo None ChNo None None 0 None lo None ChNo None None 0 None Definition of ChNo 5 8 External device Other connect ion None 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection OK Cance 3 1 Communication Setting E Channel number setting operation Touch channel number specification menu BOX to be set Communication setting Standard I F Setting Assign Ethernet I F Channe l Dr iver assign 2 ChNo RS232 5V suppl ChNo USB 1 A QnA L OCPU L OJS7 1024 9 Host PC The cursor for the channel number specification RS422745 Co Ethernet menu BOX is displayed None None Extend I F Setting Simultaneously the keyboard for a numerical Extend 1 F 1 Extend I F 2 os Cha OT T5 7S0BUSL Chto None input is displayed bA i 0 1 F None ChNo None 0 None None 3rd ChNo None ChNo None eejo epee None 0 None Definition of ChNo 0 None 5 8 External device Other connection 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection Lim Cancel 5 6 Lero Lill lt gt o 12 3 TA e Carcel Enter J Keyboard 3 Input the channel number from the keyboard o and touch Enter key and the value is defined Standard I F Setting Assign Ethernet I F Channel Driver assign Simultaneously the name of the communication ChNo R5232 W
266. m za 8 lt x m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 6 2 Various Data Control 6 51 WE Display operation of operation log information Main menu Data control Data control lt 1 3 Utility Display Touch Data control Operation log Information formation era Eae information t ree space 954 5MB Drive capacity 955 OMB iles are Nurber of selectable files in this folder 6 Select all files 610 gt C5V 610 gt TXT Latest List Cancel selection Copy Move Rename CreateFolder Del selected 2 0KB in total files Default display drive when displaying the operation log information screen When Save to of the Environmental Setting dialog box is set in GT Designer3 the default display drive for displaying the operation log information screen is the drive set in GT Designers GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 22 OPERATION LOG FUNCTION In the following cases the default display drive is A drive e Save to is not specified in GT Designers e The drive set as Save to in GT Designer3 is not found 6 52 6 2 Various Data Control E Example of operation log information display Z O Data control Data control Operation log information 3 Belect drive Ri ndpame gt ai z D 0 00 z H 5 E USB drive Oo Z ke Lu 225 6 JE A E On O aoe ree space 95
267. mber of times A m N 2 For registering operator e When selecting Finger 2 in the Select total count in Contents registered list 4 of this section register two fingerprints consecutively To execute Finger 2 do not register the same finger twice It may cause malfunction of the device 3 For registering operator again e When the fingerprint registration is completed another fingerprint cannot be registered To register another fingerprint delete the existing fingerprint ID and start to register another fingerprint ID X m za 8 lt x m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 6 2 Various Data Control 6 105 6 3 OS Project Information 6 3 1 OS information E Function of OS information Each file name folder name of BootOS and OS Standard monitor OS communication driver and optional function OS by which each drive A Standard CF card B Extended memory card C Built in flash memory E USB memory holds can be displayed in lists Installation and uploading of the files are also possible Function Description Eon Bo Reference 5 P Designer2 Designer3 Inf ti Display example of OS ae n Displays the kind name data size creation date and time of the file ap ai P display of files oFtolder information and folders l Operation of OS information All OS files written in the A drive Standard CF card B drive Install Extended memory card and E driv
268. modem Touch the Disc button to disconnect the line Modem operation The maximum number of characters of the AT command depends on the specifications of the modem When the maximum number of characters of the AT command which can be used for a modem is less than 255 the initializing command is set according to the specifications of the modem 3 1 Communication Setting 3 11 UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP zZ H W 79 z O lt 2 zZ Oo 2 z SE p u q oO ul 30 lt DL ti oE oz DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK DEBUG INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES E Assign Ethernet I F operation The following describes how to operate the Ethernet I F assign The setting operation is same as that of the communication setting screen 7 Touch the Assign Ethernet I F button in Communication Setting Communication setting Standard I F Setting Assign Ethernet I F ChNo RS232 5V_supply ChNo 1 A QnA L QCPU L OJ7 1024 9 RS422 485 QO None Extend I F Setting Channel Driver assign Extend F 2 ChNo None 0 None Extend F 1 Ist ChNo GT15 5QBUSL None 3 12 ChNo None ChNo None 0 None 0 None ChNo None 0 lone ChNo None 0 lone Definition of ChNo O None 8 External device 0th
269. mory and E drive USB drive 5 l For GT For GT Function Description Designer2 Designer3 Checks whether the memory CF card of the A drive can be read written A drive memory check a normally E ALa E R CHEE whether the memory Extended memory card of the B drive can be read written normally IH Ow ae Checks whether the memory Built in flash memory of the C drive can be read aie C drive memory check written normally Checks whether the memory USB drive of the E drive can be read written E drive memory check normally olf n aa WE Display operation of memory check FE Sue 828 Main menu Self check Diagnostic functions gt 1 3 Utility Display ee f N f gt J J Diagnostic functions Batch self check Touch Self check i ee Diagnostic functions Touch Memory check DEBUG Memory check Self check Diagnostics Memory check belect Drive A Built in CF card x LLI I O LL l LLI 2 E USB drive Select the memory to check and touch Check DATA CONTROL INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 5 1 Diagnostic Functions 5 4 E Memory check operation Carries out write read check of memory When drive is not displayed When the drive memory to check is not displayed confirm the mounting procedure or memory type with reference to the following L gt Hardware 8 3 2 m CF Card Hardware
270. mouse keyboard install USB mouse keyboard of the extended function OS to the GOT 4 22 4 3 Memory Data Control 4 3 8 SRAM control zZ O E Function of SRAM control O The SRAM user area usage can be confirmed data in the SRAM user area can be backed up or restored and the T SRAM user area is initialiized For the available functions in the SRAM user area refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions E Display operation of SRAM control g Q T oa ea Main menu Memory data control SoG 3 1 3 Utility Display ao na Oo ae 2 g o Touch Sus SRAM control ss SED ozg USB device status display Debug Memory data control SRAM control Function name Setting I0 Setting name ize pienes sys alarm 24 5KB 05 31 10 16 02 ii user alarm 1 Advanced User Alarm No 1 6 4KB 05 31 10 16 07 iii user alarm 2 Advanced User Alarm No 2 4KB 05 31 10 16 07 XxX O LU T 0 item s has have been selected 0 0KB in total SRAM Free space 464 8KB Initialize all Initialize l SRAM capacity 500KB selected area TT Backup restoration c op drive Free space 480 6MB ect Backup Drive capacity 487 98 el 4 D Restoration ei eE O X zZ O O lt lt Q INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 4 3 Memory Data Control 4 23 WE Display example of SRAM control Debug Memory data control SRAM control PE cha i
271. mputer GIP ARPOOOO1 ARPOOO01 TXT JARPOOOO1 07 04 08 0 9KB 04 0 22 0 7KB 07 04 08 14 32 1 4KB 09 03 09 09 23 E USB drive Free space 482 5MB Drive capacity 483 0MB 1 files are selected 0 9KB in_ total Number of selectable files in this folder 3 files Select all files GIPSCSY GIPSTXT Create61P Execute Cancel selection Copy Move Rename CreateFolder Del GIP ARPOOOO ARPOOOO1 al TXT JARPOOOO 1 0 9KB 07 04 08 2 0 7KB 07 04 08 14 32 E USB drive 1 4KB 09 03 09 09 23 Free space 481 6MB Drive capacity 483 0MB 1 files are selected 0 9KB in_ total Number _ of selectable files in this folder 3 files Herat pec crei hz ee ee ee ee ee File conversion from GIP to CSW Source File ARPOOOOT GIP Change to ARPOOOO COSY Change file format Example Dialog box if the G1P gt CSV button is touched Vv Continued to next page 6 2 Various Data Control Touch the check box of the G1P file which is to be converted to a CSV file or Unicode text file to select the file Touch the following button in accordance with destination file type e CSV file G1P CSV button e Unicode text file G1P TXT button Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive If touch the Exec button the dialog box
272. munication driver option OS When standard monitor OS communication driver or option OS has already been installed the version information of the OS which has been installed and the dialog box for selecting continue not continue will be displayed Moreover when the different versions will coexist amoung all OSs standard monitor OS communication driver and option OS by installing OS the installation disapproving dialog will be displayed and the installation process is canceled COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING 3 When download project data GOT automatically compares the version between the project data to be downloaded and the installed OS When the versions are different the dialog box confirming whether to install the OS together is displayed When downloading the project data from the CF card or USB memory storing the project data and OS beforehand is recommended The version of each OS installed in the GOT can be confirmed by Property of OS information screen m Data control 0S project info 0S info Property display Lu ame Size Kind Version Date Time Q Basic 04 00 65 G1F 16STG FON Basic 04 00 52 dot Standard Gothic Font Japanese G1F 12STG FON sic 04 00 52 PL aa Gothic Foritiapanese ree System Screen Information g gt sia ee Explanation of OS version Sys em Screen ata ie Ean x BAe Basic 04 00 52 01 00 00 A T True Type Numerical Font BootOS version O Appears only when the property L
273. n Manual 3 6 Setting System Information APPENDICES 2 2 Display Settings 2 41 5 When setting the human sensor to invalid Even if setting the human sensor to invalid by the utility the Human Sensor Detection Signal System Signal 2 1 65 turns ON when the human sensor detects human movement Unintended operation may result therefore if controlling the Forced Screen Saver Enable Signal System Signal 1 1 61 and Human Sensor Detection Signal associating them with each other by a sequence program etc When setting the human sensor to invalid review the related sequence program etc 2 42 2 2 Display Settings 2 2 2 Display operation of display setting Main menu GOT setup 1 3 Utility Display GOT setup _ Touch Display OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP Display GOT setup Display Language Opening screen time Sec Screen save time 0 Min O None Screen save backlight Battery alarm display Br ightness contrast Touch an item to Human sensor change settings Sensor detect level MAX 10 Sensor detect time 0 0 Sec Sensor off delay o Min 10 Sec 2 2 Display Settings 2 2 3 Display setting operations E Language 2 44 GOT setup Display Language Opening screen time Screen save time Screen save backlight Battery alarm display Brightness contrast Human sensor Sensor detect level Sensor detect time Sensor off delay English w _ 5 Sec 0 Min
274. n if CF card is not installed this message appears 2 Check box If the check box is selected up to 512 files can be selected Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR Displays the file name or folder name For the long file folder name entire part may not be displayed 4 Name Confirm the nondisplayed part with the Rename button etc L 6 Rename operation After confirmation touch the Cancel button to cancel the operation 3 Kind 5 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 6 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name The date and time when each file was created are displayed Multiple files can be selected or canceled at once 8 Select all files Cancel selection Touch the Select all files button to select all files If the number of the displayed files exceeds 513 the first 512 files are selected 9 Drive size Displays the used entire size of drive selected by select drive 10 Operation switch Execution switch of each function 11 Number of folders and files Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders About the displayed file The files other than that for logging are not displayed on the logging information screen oe Folders and files displayed For the folders and files displayed refer to the following gt 6 1 4 Displa
275. n mode 7 Setting items are changed if setting item is touched GOT setup Operation Buzzer volume OFF Window move buzzer OFF 1 sane 2 Iftouch the OK button the GOT restarts and Uti lity call key operates with the changed settings Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 PTE E E If touch the Cancel button the changed Teel paa calibration Sete settings are canceled and the screen returns to Touch detection mode USB mouse keyboar d Setting the Main Menu SoftGOT GOT link Setting VNC server func setting Setting OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP WE Security setting Refer to the following for the security setting operation 3 2 3 4 Security level change W Utility call key Refer to the following for the utility call key operation gt gt 2 3 5 Utility call key setting 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation WE Key sensitivity setting GOT setup Operation Buzzer volume Window move buzzer Security setting Utility call key Key sensitivity Key reaction speed Touch panel calibration Touch detection mode USB mouse keyboar d SoftGOT GOT link VNC server func setting Avoid input error Cance E Touch panel adjustment Refer to the following for touch panel adjustment operation If touching the setting items keyboard is displayed Input numeric with the keyboard The key response speed corresponding to the Key se
276. n parameters eh setting a Gb Na O ae oe For GT For GT Function Description Reference Designer2 Designer3 oo The setting contents of the communication interface can be Communication setting 3 1 checked or changed The contents of the Ethernet setting can be checked and the Ethernet setting x 3 3 host can be changed 3 1 Communication Setting oO H Lu n zZ O lt q 2 z Oo oO z SF p u q oO ul 30 lt DL ti l oz 3 1 1 Communication setting functions For GT For GT a Function Description LW Designer2 Designer3 Q Channel Driver assign Change the assignment of channel No and communication driver name O Change the assignment of channel No and communication driver name of the Assign Ethernet I F O device connected using the Ethernet interface y O Channel no Ch No Set the channel numbers of the communication interface Standard interface m setting Extend interface O I Communication oa l D Set communication parameters of communication devices O parameters setting O X H Z O O lt lt m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 3 1 Communication Setting 3 1 3 1 2 Communication setting display operation Main menu 3 1 3 Utility Display Communication setting Communication setting Communication setting Communication setting Standard I F Setting Assign Ethernet I F Channel Dr i
277. n tries to release the GOT from this mode by touching the display section which may cause a touch switch to operate Note that the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight goes out e GT1655 V The POWER LED blinks green orange and the monitor screen appears blank e Models other than GT1655 V The POWER LED blinks green orange and the monitor screen appears dimmed The display section of the GT16 is an analog resistive type touch panel If you touch the display section simultaneously in 2 points or more the switch that is located around the center of the touched point if any may operate Do not touch the display section in 2 points or more simultaneously Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction When programs or parameters of the controller such as a PLC that is monitored by the GOT are changed be sure to reset the GOT or shut off the power of the GOT at the same time Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main circuit power or other wiring Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm 3 94in apart Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network the available
278. nables displaying a list of the operator information and adding changing or deleting the operator information to be used A password for operator authentication can be changed when the password is out of date Functions for the operator authentication automatic logout time authentication method password expiration date etc can be set For details of operator authentication functions refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 7 Security Setting eGT Designer2 VersionL Screen Design Manual 3 5 Security Setting For GT For GT Function Description Reference Designer2 Designer3 2 Display operation of Operator Enables adding editing deleting importing and exporting operator management management the operator information 4 Operator management operation Add operation Adds operator information to the GOT Oo Oo a Add operation Edit operation Edits the operator information stored in the GOT olo b Edit operation Delete Deletes the operator information stored in the GOT ofo c Delete operation operation Restores the current operator information to the previous Undo d Undo operation saved one Import Imports the operator information that is already exported e Import operation operation to a CF card to the GOT Export Exports the operator information stored in the GOT to a f Export operation operation CF card Password Enables changing passwor
279. nced recipe file is displayed Attribution of record is displayed Attribution of record can be changed with GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 V Record can be loaded saved Record whose value is selected 2 Attr VP Record only for loading Record whose value is selected and cannot be changed Blanc Record only for saving Record whose value is deleted or not selected P Record unusable reserved area Record whose value is not selected and cannot be changed 3 Record Comment is displayed Path and name of recipe file are displayed 4 Recipe No is displayed Recipe name is displayed 5 Date and time when record comment is updated are displayed 6 Execution switch of each function 6 16 6 2 Various Data Control E Advanced recipe information operation 1 Display operation of advanced recipe information E USB drive Free space 482 5MB Drive capacity 483 0MB GIP ARPOOOO ARPOOO01 E TXT JARPOOOO 1 U IKB 0 7KB 1 4KB 07 04 08 07 04 08 09 03 09 14 32 09 23 l 1 files Number _of selecta are selected 0 9KB in_total ble files in this folder 3 files Select all files GIP CSY GIPSTXT CreateG1P Execute Cancel selection Copy Move Rename CreateFolder Del l If touch a drive of select drive the information of the touched drive is displayed If touch a folder name the information of the to
280. ne Offline 0 Offline test Testing offline 7 gt Initialize Error error code F101 F102 F105 2 2 Change Ctrl Sta Error error code F104 F106 OS 5 Testing Online Baton Missing Baton Duplicated Dup Sta No Dup Ctrl Sta Rev Retry Err Send Retry Err Time Out Err Abnormal Line Cause of Ssp Disconnection No Own Sta Baton Other error code C f St eee ere No Shared Param Bad Shared Param Bad Self Sta CPU Com Aborted FError error code F103 F109 F10A Error error code F107 Error error code F108 Error error code F10B Error error code F10C Error error code F10E Error error code F10F Error error code F110 Error error code F112 Error error code F11B Error error code F11F Error error code displayed lt Displays the cause of disabled data link cyclic transmission of the host 2 Normal Communicating normally 5 StopOrder Cyclic transmission of all stations stopped from host or g T other station Parameters cannot be received Set parameter error A medium critical error occurred in the host CPU Host data link error occurred O faa LU Q d Transient status Displays the number of transient transmission errors and the error code DATA CONTROL No Item Description 7 Transmission Err 8 ErrCode Displays the number of transient transmission errors Error histories of 16 errors are displayed in 16 lows from the latest INS
281. ng file Modified 07 10 07 10 10 with this one Modified 07 30 09 13 42 Continued to next page 6 44 6 2 Various Data Control 7 Touch the check box of the file to copy to select the file 2 Touch the Copy button Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders If touch Exec button the following dialog box shown left is displayed Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy If touch the OK button overwrites the file If touch Cancel button cancels to copy 6 When the copy is completed the dialog box Completed the process of completion is displayed Succeeded 1 If touch OK button closes the dialog box Failed Q 5 Move operation An operation log file is moved 1 Touch the check box of the file to be moved Data control Data co ntrol eer ging information to select the file LOGOO01 Select drive A Built in i Date 2 Touch the Move button 0001 512 2KB 07 30 09 13 42 07 30 09 13 42 E USB drive 512 2 07 30 09 09 02 09 CSV L0G00001_ 001 18 7KB 09 02 09 Free space 953 0MB Drive capacity 955 OMB 1
282. ng 3 9 UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP zZ H W 79 z O lt 2 zZ Oo 2 z SE p u q oO ul 3 iS lt DL ti oE oz DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK DEBUG INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES Communication setting RS232 5Y power supply F 5Y power supply 2 3 10 Cancel Communication setting Standard I F Setting et Ethernet I F Channel Dr iver assign ChNo RS232 ihe USB 1 A QnA L QCPU L rede Host PC pon farses ttle Etherne None None ee 7 Setting Extend F 1 Extend F 2 Ist ChNo GT15 5QBUSL ChNo None 0 Q BUS 0 None 2nd None ChNo None 0 None 0 None 3rd None ChNo None Q None Q None Definition of ChNo None 5 8 External device O0ther connection 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection OK 3 1 Communication Setting Cancel 4 Select whether 5V power supply is supplied or not If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the Communication Setting screen If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Communication Setting screen After setting completion is displayed indicating that 5V power supplying setting is on If touch the OK Cancel S lt button the GOT restart
283. nge numbers 1 to 7 digits 5 g Ext auth ID l 4 Np External authentication ID setting range alphanumerics 4 to 32 digits m Fai ae Function setting 1 Since the key window is for hexadecimal format the setting range can be input in the range of A to F or 0 to 9 X m za 8 lt x m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 6 2 Various Data Control 6 83 4 Operator management operation tdmin pageword authentication Password ae blaz _ a aC DEL QITIEIRITITITITI Of AJSIDIFIG H JIRILI AVX CIUI BRINN Enter OperatorName a ID Level Update Administrato E P0001 1001 10 2009 08 25 P0002 1002 11 2009 08 25 P0003 1003 12 2009 08 25 Add Edit Delete Drive in use Import Export If you cloge the screen before pressing Save button the changed data will be discarded lo you want to proceed 6 84 6 2 Various Data Control Touch Operator management in the operator setting menu The Admin password authentication screen is displayed and then input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key When the administrator password is correctly input the Operator information management screen in displayed
284. nite resulting in injuly and fire Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify this unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Do not drop the module or subject it to strong shock A module damage may result Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit Doing so may damage the battery causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery If the battery is dropped or given an impact dispose of it without using Before touching the unit always touch groun
285. nnection 5 16 E 18 19 olila 14 Le Canel Keyboard 3 Input numeric with keyboard e 0 to 9 Key Input the numeric e Enter Key Complete numeric input and close the keyboard e Cancel Key Cancel numeric input and close the keyboard al gt Key Moves the cursor to the right or left side Available only if any selectable item is at the right left side of the cursor e Del Key Cancel the input by 1 character e key and the key which is not mentioned do not function 4 f Enter key is touched numeric input is completed and keyboard is closed 1 1414 1 3 Utility Display 2 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP UTILITY FUNCTION Setting screen for display and setting screen for operation can be displayed from the GOT utility screen In the setting screen for display and the setting screen for operation the following settings can be set Designer2 Designer3 Setting the GOT operation when a device with the same IP Behavior of duplicate IPs x 2 1 7 address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards Language opening screen time screen save time screen save backlight battery alarm display sensor detect level sensor detect 2 2 1 Display ime Adjusting the brightness and contrast ol 2 2 4 e Oo Z W 2 zZ e 3 Lu ou O a zz5 LO gt Ww LIN l a Oa O aog COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING O
286. nput Set the valid byte count for external authentication ID Only available when the external authentication general is set as the authentication method 4 Touch the OK button after all items are input and then the dialog box shown left is displayed and the input setting is saved 5 Touch the AX button without touching the OK button and then the dialog box shown left is displayed 6 2 8 Fingerprint information For executing the operator management using the fingerprint unit fingerprint information must be registered to the fingerprint unit This section describes how to get a fingerprint ID from the fingerprint information of the utility function Refer to the following manual for details of drawing settings L GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 7 Security Setting eGT Designer2 Version L Screen Design Manual 3 5 Security Setting E Administrator password setting 1 Administrator password setting function For registering or deleting fingerprint IDs the administrator password must be set 2 Administrator password setting display operation When the administrator password is not set the password input window is displayed before the selection of the administrator password setting and the setting for password is required Main menu Data control Data control L gt 1 3 Utility Display Touch Pala Conve Data control Fingerprint information Fingerprint information managem
287. nsitivity setting is displayed If touch the OK button the GOT restarts and operates with the changed settings If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Main Menu mes 2 3 6 Adjusting the touch panel position Touch panel calibration setting E USB mouse keyboard setting Refer to the following for the USB mouse keyboard setting 2 3 7 USB mouse keyboard setting E SoftGOT GOT link function setting Refer to the following for the SoftGOT GOT link function setting operation E VNC server function setting 2 52 Refer to the following for the VNC server function setting operation 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation 3 2 3 9 VNC R server function setting lt gt 2 3 8 SoftGOT GOT link function setting 2 3 4 Security level change W Security level change functions Changes the security level to the same security level set by each object or screen switch To change the security level input the password of the security level which is set in GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 UTILITY FUNCTION Security level setting 2 Ea eGT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 7 Security Setting eGT Designer2 Version L Screen Design Manual 5 8 Security function Password Setting c ccccccsccssesseeee ew GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 7 Security Setting eGT Designer2 Version
288. nual Extended Functions Option Functions for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual for GT Designer2 GT Works2 4 3 5 Memory card format E Function of the memory card format Format the CF card or USB memory WE Display operation of memory card format Main menu 3 1 3 Utility Display Memory data control CS Ea etic tet Memory data control Touch Memory card format Memory card format Debug Memory data control Memory card format Be lect Drive A Built in CF card E USB drive 4 3 Memory Data Control E Operating the memory card format I Caution lf execute format operation all data on the CF card will be initialized Please do not remove CF card while formatting Format the CF card 7 Format now Y Format is complete Install the CF card or USB memory to GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card or USB memory C gt Hardware 8 3 2 WCF card Hardware 8 5 2 Mlnstall USB peripheral devices Touch and select the drive to format by drive selection If touch Format button the password input screen is displayed Type 1 1 1 1 and touch the Enter key The dialog box shown on the left will appear The password is fixed to 1111 Confirm the contents of the dialog box and touch OK button when execute the format of CF card or USB memory When cancel the memory card format touch Cancel button If touch
289. o of the OUT side loopback station T OUT LoopBK Sta ie 7 abe No loopback station value 1 to 120 225 Displays the cause of the loopback No LoopBK Sta IN cable disconnection IN ZED OUT LoopBK factor j j j l j ai cP connecting a line IN wrong cable connection Da 9 aog c Data link information a Displays the data link information Com Status Cause of Ssp Cause of Stop of the CC Link IE Controller pe n Network communication unit z 6 Ea No Item Description gy 2 Displays the communication status of the host station z i z ozo D Link in prog D Link stopped 4 Com Status B Pass exec B Pass stopped Testing Offline Offline Displays the cause of the interrupted communication transient transmission of the host station DEBUG Normal Comm Cable disconnection Wrong cable connection Cause of Ssp Checking cable IN OUT Disconnecting returning to system Offline Offline test Self check mode x O LLI IT O LL l LLI 2 Displays the cause of the interrupted data link cyclic transmission of the host station Normal Comm StopOrder D Link observation timer time up Testing Line Param not rcvd Host out of range Host reservation Dup Host No Dup CtrlSta Sta No not set DATA CONTROL tein O1 Cause of Stop Invalid Network No Param Err Params in comm CPU stop error INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS CPU pwr stp err APPENDICES
290. o select the advanced recipe setting is displayed Select the advanced recipe setting to be used for new file After selecting touch the Next button 3 As the input key window is displayed input the file name for new file By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol Target file AS ARPOGOG1 G1P Do you want to create the fi le Target file AS ARPOGOG1 G1P Da you want to Overwrite the file Process completed 4 If touch the Enter button the dialog box shown left is displayed Touch the OK button 5 When the file whose name is the same exists in the destination folder the dialog box shown left appears without starting the creation Touching the OK button overwrites the file If touch the Cancel button cancels creating 6 When creating is completed completion dialog box is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog box 6 2 Various Data Control 6 29 l O ag _ 2 lt a lt m 6 30 10 Record load operation Selected record value is loaded in the device of controller Data control Data control Advanced Recipe information AS PROJEC Select drive JECT indName A Built in CF card Size Date Time DIR iv GIP ARPOOOO1 IER TR Pe E USB drive Free space 477 OMB Drive capacity 483 0MB 1 files are selected 0 9KB in total Number of selectable
291. of the CC Link IE Field Network communication unit 28 OHO Description bs COZ Displays the connection status of the host station S Normal PORT1 communicating PORT2 communicating 558 Normal PORT1 communicating PORT2 cable disconnected Normal PORT 1 in loopBK communication PORT2 cable disconnected i Normal PORT1 cable disconnected PORT2 communicating onnection Normal PORT1 cable disconnected PORT2 in loopBK communication No 9 Disconnect PORT1 cable disconnected PORT2 cable disconnected Disconnect PORT1 cable disconnected PORT2 connecting a line DEBUG Disconnect PORT1 connecting a line PORT2 cable disconnected Disconnect PORT1 connecting a line PORT2 connecting a line 0 No error 1 or more Number of accumulated errors 0 No error 1 or more Number of accumulated errors 0 No error 1 or more Number of accumulated errors 0 No error 1 or more Number of accumulated errors x O LLI AG O LL l LLI 2 COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS DATA CONTROL INSTALLATION OF APPENDICES 5 1 Diagnostic Functions 5 28 5 29 4 CC Link communication unit self check Diagnostics Network status ST 15 J61BT 13 ST 1 lt LED status gt lt D Link Info gt RUN E D Link Boot Status ERR D Link in prog 2 STL S MST Error Status 1 a Kk Norma 3 SW M S PRM RES LINE GOT R ME LED status Displays the CC Link c
292. og into the GOT using the fingerprint authentication For details of the procedures for creating an extended function switch that displays a login button on the user created 6 104 screen refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 2 6 Setting Special Function Switch eGT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 6 2 5 Setting items of special function switch Extended function switch Login 6 2 Various Data Control 4 When the fingerprint is correctly recognized 7 Touch the Login button created in the user created screen 2 The dialog box shown left is displayed Touch the Password button to display the login screen of Operator name password For the display method of the Password button refer to the following lt gt 6 2 7 Operator information Touch the Cancel button to return to the screen in step1 3 Putthe registered finger on the fingerprint unit the dialog box shown left is displayed Touch the OK button to return to the user created screen E Precautions zZ O 1 For installing fingerprint unit 6 e The fingerprint unit complies with the protective structure IP4X 5 The unit cannot be used with wet fingers or oil fingers gt The protective structure of the fingerprint unit differs from that of the GOT IP67 When using the GOT do not use with wet fingers or oil fingers zs e Use the fingerprint unit
293. ol 0S project info 0S in Select drive Us E eT z A Built in CF card G1B00T HAG ISYS C Flash Memory E USB drive 6876KB Pf Install Upload Property Data check Number Item Description The target drive which displays file or folder can be selected When the CF card is not installed A Built in CF Card B Memory card are not displayed If the USB memory is not installed E USB drive is not displayed 1 Select drive Indicates whether the displayed name is for file or folder 2 Kind Ge In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR The file name or folder name which is stored in the selected drive or folder is displayed 3 Name When the file name or folder name exceeds 20 characters the exceeding characters the 21th character or after are not displayed 4 Path name The path name of the currently displayed drive folder is displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time The date and time when each file was created are displayed Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive which is selected by drive 7 The size of drive i o se aes selection Only the size in use is displayed when selecting the C drive 8 Operation switch Execution switch of each function Number of folders and iles Displays the total number of the displayed files and folders 7 N Displayed folders and files F
294. ommunication driver Host PC is automatically assigned For how to set the communication driver refer to the following 3 1 4 BHost PC Host Modem settings 6 Assign Ethernet I F The communication settings for the Ethernet connection can be made Ethernet I F Assignment can assign up to four channels per interface gt 3 1 4 BAssign Ethernet I F operation 3 4 3 1 Communication Setting Precautions for communications between GOT and controller 1 Installing communication driver and downloading Communication Setting The followings below are required for the communication interface to communicate with the controller 1 Installing communication drivers Up to 4 communication drivers 2 Assigning the channel number and communication driver for the communication interface 3 Downloading the contents project data assigned in 2 Perform 2 3 by GT Designer3 or GT designerz2 LF Extend L F 1 4st w Driver AnA La CPU LIT C24 QJT1C24 w paal sainz SUEY eMC ats AOnA LQ GPU LJ71G24 QU71G24 Refer to the following for details e GQOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 3 7 Communication Interface Setting Communication Settings e GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 7 3 7 Reading project data e GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual
295. ommunication driver s 2 O O Optional function OS 2 O O Optional function OS 2 O O L J Please match the number Checking method of BootOS standard monitor OS version 1 Check the version of BootOS or standard monitor OS installed in GOT at OS information of the utility Refer to the following for details L 36 3 1 OS information 2 Check the version of BootOS installed in GOT at product shipment on the rating plate on GOT rear face Aa MITSUBISHI GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1675M VTBA IN _100 240VAC 50 60Hz POWER MAX 90VA MAC ADD SERIAL 0000009701 AA00001 D a AA BootOS version In case that the BootOS is two digits only the first digit is written BACKLIGHT GT16 70VLTTA 7 10 7 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS 7 5 CoreOS Install CoreOS only when the GOT will not be the status of factory shipment even when BootOS is installed Normally the CoreOS has not to be installed Precautions for installing CoreOS When executing the CoreOS installation once it cannot be canceled on the way Do not attempt the followings to cancel the installation on the way The GOT may not operate e Powering the GOT off e Pressing the GOT reset button If the GOT does not operate please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative If the GOT does not recover even when installing the CoreOS the error may be caused by a ha
296. ommunication unit GT15 J61BT13 operation status WDT error occurred or unit RUN Green Running normally peingreset All station ERR are communication error No responses from all stations due to cable TIME breakage or Responses from all stations transmission path affected by noise Gren Operating as master Operating other than as station master station Sw sf Red O Switch setting error No switch setting error LNE Red Cable breakage error No cable breakage error as standby Operating other than as S MST Green master station standby master station Duplicate master station No duplicate master station error error Operating as local Operating other than as LOCAL Green station local station PRM Rea Parameteremor No parametereror GOT R W Accessed from GOT Not accessed from GOT a There is a communication No communication error error station or duplicated occurred or unit being reset station numbers 5 1 Diagnostic Functions b Data link information Displays the CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 data link startup status and error No Description 5 Displays the data link startup status 5 D Link in prog Data link being executed D Link Offline Data link being stopped E Initialize Set to the initial status Parameter wait Parameter not received Disconnect No Polling In cut off status with no inquiry from G master station E 2 D Link Boot Status Disconnect Line Er
297. ompatible with GT Works3 Version 1 31H e CC Link IE Field Network supported e Motion program SV43 editor supported e Setting to save ladders for the Q L QnA ladder monitor supported Compatible with GT Works3 Version 1 37P e Motion program SV43 I O supported e VNC server function supported Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 40S e Compatible with the long time recording setting in the multimedia function REVISIONS 1 Print Date Manual Number Revision Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 45X e The backup restore function supports the backup CPU No setting Apr 2012 SH NA 080929ENG I The multimedia function supports displaying the file name and the shooting time of the video being played e Items of Size Date and Time are added to the file menu display screen for the multimedia function Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 54G e The company name of Yamatake Corporation is changed to Azbil Jun 2012 SH NA 080929ENG J Corporation e For the drawing check function gray is added to the color displayed at the missing bit check and the color check Nov 2012 SH NA 080929ENG K SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manua
298. ompletion appears Touching the OK button closes the dialog box Copy is completed COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING LA Processing time reference The time required for the processing depends on conditions such as OS data capacity and file structure Reference values e When the capacity is 4 Mbytes Around 6 seconds x e When the capacity is 12 Mbytes Around 18 seconds 4 2 Precautions for operation D a Copying project data lf the Boot source drive and copy destination drive for project data is the same the project data cannot be copied z If the drives are the same cancel the setup fe b When project data are copied to the GOT 6 If OS or project data is copied to the GOT using the CF card or USB memory created with GOT data lt package acquisition the utility setting is also copied A Check each utility setting after copying to the GOT and change the setting according to need c CF card or USB memory to be used When performing GOT data package acquisition do not store other data to the CF card or USB memory If doing so the previous data will be unavailable INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 4 3 Memory Data Control 4 15 4 16 4 3 4 CNC data I O function Machining programs parameters and others of the CNC connected to the GOT can be copied or deleted Refer to the following manuals for details of CNC data I O GOT1000 Series User s Ma
299. on Please select in_total are selected 2 0KB i i folder 6 files 1 files Number of selectable files in this Exec Cancel The target file to copy OFELOG 20090730 _ 0001 610 Do you want to copy the file This folder already contains the fi le OPELOG_20090730_0007 610 Do you want to replace the existing file Modified 07 30 09 15 50 with this one Modified 07 30 09 15 50 Completed the process Succeeded Failed 0 6 2 Various Data Control Touch the check box of the file to copy to select the file Touch the Copy button Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive At this time it cannot be copied into the same folder where the file exists Select other folders If touch Exec button the following dialog box shown left is displayed Touch OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy If touch the OK button overwrites the file If touch Cancel button cancels to copy When the copy is completed the dialog box of completion is displayed If touch OK button closes the dialo 5 Move operation An operation log file is moved 7 Touch the check box of the file to be moved Data control Data contro IE E S Jeene to sel
300. onitored Intelligent unit Buffer memory in the intelligent function module can be monitored or the data can be monitor changed on the dedicated screen And the signal status of I O modules can be monitored O Servo amplifier Various monitor functions parameter change test operation etc of the servo amplifier are monitor available O i The servo monitoring and parameter settings of the motion controller CPU Q series are Motion monitor O available ENeaioniter Functions equivalent to the MELDAS dedicated display such as Position Display Monitor Alarm Diagnosis Monitor Tool Offset Param and Program Monitor are available O A list editor The sequence program of ACPU can be list edited S O FX list editor The sequence program of FXCPU can be list edited Oo O The GOT can monitor and display SFC programs of the PLC CPU in the SFC diagram SFC Monitor O format MELSAP3 or MELSAP L format Continued to next page 4 1 Monitor Screens 4 1 UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES it D f For GT For GT em escription 7 E Designer3 Ladder editor The sequence program of PLC CPU can be edited sequence The sequence program of PLC CPU can be edited of PLC CPU can be edited O MELSEC L The status of MELSEC L CPU and buttons for
301. or USB T memory e OS Boot OS standard monitor OS communication driver extended function OS option OS e Special data e Project data op 2 The copied data can be utilized for backup or creating the same GOT system by installing the data E For installation function of the GOT refer to the following Q A a lt 6 7 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card or USB Memory at OW Fe na Oo WE Display operation of GOT data package acquisition Bier Main menu Memory data control z gt 1 3 Utility Display i 22 uws o 7 7 EEDEEN TE 3 Z25 zy Debug See GOT data package acquisition Memory data control k GOT data package acquisition Debug Memory data control GOT data package acquisition GOT s OS project data special data are copied to the CF card This CF card can be use for installation when the GOT is turned on Please select a destination and push Copy button Select Drive A Built in CF card xX O W Ig O E USB drive TE m ep O or H Z O O lt H lt Q INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 4 3 Memory Data Control 4 13 E Display example of GOT data package acquisition Debug Memory data control GOT data package acquisition GOT s OS project data special data are copied to the CF card This CF card can be use for installation when the GOT is turned on Please select a destination and push Copy b
302. or the folders and files displayed refer to the following lt gt 6 1 4 Display file 6 108 6 3 OS Project Information E Operation of OS information 1 Display operation of OS information T If touch a drive in Select drive the information of the first folder of the touched drive is displayed Data control 0S project info 0S info Select drive Kind Nene Sized ate T A Built in CF card DIR GIBOOT 07 25 08 or m me 52 204 1 DIR FAIGISYS 07 26 08 1 2 If touch a folder name the information of the touched folder is displayed E USB drive 3 If touch a folder name of the information of the folder in one higher hierarchy is displayed 4 If touch al w button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch 4 button the screen scrolls up SEE Fi down by one screen Install Upload Property Data check 5 If touch a file name the touched file name is selected and inverted 6 Refer to the following for operation of installation upload property data check Installation K gt 2 Installation operation Upload lt 3 Upload operation Property lt 4 Property display operation Data check lt gt 5 Data check operation Touching gt lt button closes the screen o Z O O lt lt m 6 3 OS Project Information 6 109 6 110
303. oskilde Phone 45 0 46 75 76 66 Fax 45 0 46 75 56 26 Beijer Electronics Eesti OU P rnu mnt 160i EE 11317 Tallinn Phone 372 0 6 51 81 40 Fax 372 0 6 5181 49 Beijer Electronics OY Peltoie 37 FIN 28400 Ulvila Phone 358 0 207 463 540 Fax 358 0 207 463 541 UTECO 5 Mavrogenous Str GR 18542 Piraeus Phone 30 211 1206 900 Fax 30 211 1206 999 MELTRADE Kft Fert utca 14 HU 1107 Budapest Phone 36 0 1 431 9726 Fax 36 0 1 431 9727 Beijer Electronics SIA Ritausmas iela 23 LV 1058 Riga Phone 371 0 784 2280 Fax 371 0 784 2281 Beijer Electronics UAB Savanoriu Pr 187 LT 02300 Vilnius Phone 370 0 5 232 3101 Fax 370 0 5 232 2980 AUSTRIA BELARUS BELGIUM BELGIUM BULGARIA CROATIA CZECH REPUBLIC DENMARK ESTONIA FINLAND GREECE HUNGARY LATVIA LITHUANIA Aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ALFATRADE Ltd 99 Paola Hill Malta Paola PLA 1702 Phone 356 0 21 697 816 Fax 356 0 21 697 817 INTEHSIS srl bld Traian 23 1 MD 2060 Kishinev Phone 373 0 22 66 4242 Fax 373 0 22 66 4280 HIFLEX AUTOM TECHNIEK B V Wolweverstraat 22 NL 2984 CD Ridderkerk Phone 31 0 180 46 60 04 Fax 31 0 180 44 23 55 Koning amp Hartman b v Haarlerbergweg 21 23 NL 1101 CH Amsterdam Phone 31 0 20 587 76 00 Fax 31 0 20 587 76 05 Beijer Electronics AS Postboks 487 NO 3002 Drammen Phone 47 0 32
304. otOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card or USB Memory 7 4 1 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS standard Monitor OS BootOS installation When installing BootOS GOT compares the version of the BootOS to be installed with the version of BootOS which is already installed lf the major version of BootOS to be installed is old execute the following operations to prevent it from being rewritten When installing from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 a message is displayed on the personal computer screen Follow the instructions in that message a When only BootOS is stored in the CF card or USB memory The message indicating disabled installation is displayed Boot OS has been already installed Existing OS Yer 01 01 B Expected OS Ver 01 004 Because of version down GOT aborts installing Touch the OK button to cancel installation After canceling installation restart the GOT b When BootOS standard monitor OS and other OS are stored in the CF card or USB memory Skip the BootOS installation and install standard monitor OS and other OS If the standard monitor OS is already stored on the GOT the following message is displayed Boot OS has been already instal led Exsisting 05 Ver 03 00 00 Expected O05 Yer 03 00 00 Exsisting other OS and Special data and oro ject data will be deleted Do you want to install f Touching the OK button executes installation
305. otal count Finger 2 Continued to next page 6 2 Various Data Control D 6 Input the fingerprint ID of the operator to be registered Input the same ID as the external authentication ID registered in the operator information edit screen Touch the setting item of Select total count to switch in order of Finger 1 Finger 2 Finger 1 Enter all the items and touch the OK button 8 9 If the XI button is touched before the OK button is touched the ID is not registered and the screen is returned to the Contents registered list screen Touch the OK button follow the instruction which is displayed in the dialog box and register the fingerprint of the operator to be registered Touch the Cancel button to return to Contents registered list After Finger 2 is selected and one fingerprint is registered the screen is returned to Contents registered list even if the Cancel button is touched for registering the second fingerprint a 10 After registering to the fingerprint unit is pee completed the registration completion notice Select total count s dialog box is displayed Touch the OK button to return to the ein aenelestion viens Contents registered list screen X p Z O lt p lt m 6 2 Various Data Control 6 103 W Authentication operation This section describes how to l
306. ous Data Control 6 47 l O X Z lt m lt m 7 Folder create operation An operation log folder is created LOGOOO01_ 512 2KB LOG0000 1 0002 E USB drive CSV ILOG00001_0001 18 7KB Free space 953 OMB Drive capacity 955 OMB 07 30 09 18 7KB 09 02 09 18 42 09 02 09 18 43 1 files a Number _of selectab re selected 512 2KB in_total e files in this folder 5 files Select all files GIL gt CSV GILSTXT Cancel selection Copy Move Rename createrotder Del x Path Name PROJECT 1 LOG000 1 File Name LINE A lt AC DEL QIWEIRIT YI UI TIO P AISIDIFIGIAI JI RIL LIXICIVIBININ Enter Create new folder Process completed 6 2 Various Data Control 7 Touch the Create Folder button The input key window shown left appears then input the file name to be created By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol If touch the Enter button displays the dialog box shown left If touch the OK button starts creating folder When creating folder is completed completion dialog box is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog box E Precautions zZ O 1 Precautions for create delete O Z a When creating folder file Tt Number of characters set for folder or file name G
307. ox shown left is displayed 4 Touch the OK button and then renaming the file is started 5 When renaming the file is completed a completion dialog box is displayed Touch the OK button and then the dialog box is Closed 6 2 Various Data Control DATA CONTROL 6 2 6 Special data information W Special data information function Special data used in the intelligent unit monitor function or others can be copied deleted downloaded or uploaded For details of special data refer to the following manual K gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 7 5 Data Types and Sizes Transferred to the GOT eGT Designer2 VersionL Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 1 Data Types and Sizes Transferred to the GOT Function Description pene Pore Reference P Designer2 Designer3 Information Displays the name data size creation date and time of file or Special data information display display of files folder example and folders Delete Deletes a file or holder o eT 2 Delete operation Property Displays the property of special data fF oO oO 3 Property display operation Data check Copies a file fF oO oO 4 Data check operation Downloads the special data written in the A drive Standard CF Download Card B drive Extended memory card E drive USB drive to 5 Download operation the C drive Built in flash memory Precautions for operating special data When the OS boot drive is
308. p 0000 i 0 2KB 07 30 09 15 54 v K G10 OPELOG_ 07 30 09 15 50 I G10 JOPELOG_200 002 E USB drive 0 2KB 07 30 09 18 19 CS JOPELOG_ ame 0001 8 7KB 09 02 09 14 48 Csv OPELOG_20090730 0002 1 0KB 09 02 09 14 48 J610 OPELOG_20090902 0000 0 4KB 09 02 09 15 18 Free space 954 1MB 7 Drive capacity 955 0MB E files are selected 2 0KB in total Number of selectable files in this folder 6 files Please select festinat ion A ee ee J Ji File conversion from GIO to Cw Source file OPELOG_20090730_0007 610 Change to OPELOG_20090730_0001 CSY Change file format Example Dialog box if the 610 TXT button is touched Vv Continued to next page 1 2 Touch the check box of the G10 file which is to be converted to CSV file or Unicode text file to select the file Touch the following button in accordance with destination file type e CSV file G10 CSV button e Unicode text file G10 TXT button Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for outputting directly below the drive If touch the Exec button the dialog box shown left is displayed Touch the OK button While executing Processing message appears on the screen 6 2 Various Data Control i DATA CONTROL 6 56 This folder already contains the file OPELOG_20090730_0007 CSV Do you want to replace the existing file Modified 09 02 0
309. packages for FX3U 20SSC H SWLIDS5C FXSSC E Abbreviation of FX3U ENET L type Ethernet module setting software SW1D5 FXENETL E Abbreviation of robot program creation software 3D 11C WINE Abbreviation of MX Component Version O SWL D5C ACT E SWL D5C ACT EA Abbreviation of MX Sheet Version O SWLIDSC SHEET E SWL D5C SHEET EA Abbreviation of LCPU Logging Configuration Tool SW1DNN LLUTL E E License key for GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviations and generic terms License Description GT15 SGTKEY U GT15 SGTKEY P E License key for GT SoftGOT2 Abbreviations and generic terms License key License key FD Description A9YGTSOFT LKEY P For DOS V PC SW5D5F SGLKEY J For PC CPU module E Others Abbreviations and generic terms IAI AZBIL OMRON KEYENCE KOYO El SHARP JTEKT SHINKO CHINO TOSHIBA TOSHIBA MACHINE HITACHI IES HITACHI FUJI FA PANASONIC FUJI SYS YASKAWA YOKOGAWA ALLEN BRADLEY GE FANUC LS IS SCHNEIDER SICK SIEMENS RKC HIRATA MURATEC PLC Temperature controller Indicating controller Control equipment CHINO controller PC CPU module GOT server GOT client Windows font Intelligent function module MODBUS RTU MODBUS TCP Description Abbreviation of IAl Corporation Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation former Yamatake Corporation Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO LTD Abbreviation of Sharp Manufa
310. plays the controller status O E contents ag Ze Operation history Displays the operation history and execution time O O E m gt Q Screen switching history Displays the screen switching history and execution time O O 29 sre Clock change history Displays the time before and after clock change Le O E 5 O A System alarm history Displays the alarm and alarm occurrence time lo O CPU error history Displays the ChNo error messages and error occurrence time o O GOT start time history Displays the time GOT was powered on Ex O DEBUG x O LLI I O LL l LLI 2 COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS DATA CONTROL INSTALLATION OF APPENDICES 5 2 Batch Self Check 5 32 5 2 2 Display operation of batch self check Main menu Self check gt 1 3 Utility Display Touch Self check Touch Batch salf check Batch salf check Export system status log Batch self check 5 33 5 2 Batch Self Check 5 2 3 Operation of batch self check WE Batch self check 7 Each time the Export item on system status log is touched the displayed drive changes as Export system status log follows A drive gt B drive gt E drive Not pakchi exif h dk exported A drive When selecting A drive or B drive install the CF card When selecting the E drive install the USB memory lf Batch self check is started without installing the CF card or USB memory the system status log w
311. popup notificd 2 cw 7 x 2 64 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation me 3 Touch the Obtain button to display the dialog box Touch the OK button to obtain the exclusive authorization Touch the Cancel button to stop obtaining the exclusive authorization Touch the Release button to display the dialog box Touch the OK button to release the exclusive authorization Touch the Cancel button to stop releasing the exclusive authorization If touch the select button of the authorization obtained time a keyboard is displayed Enter the authorization obtained time with the keyboard When setting to 0 second the authorization is not automatically obtained by the GOT If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the Operation screen If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Operation screen In the Operation screen touching the OK Cancel gt lt button restarts and operates the GOT with the changed settings 3 Operating priority guaranteed time GOT setup Operation SoftGOT GOT link function setting Operating priority obtained state Not obtained Obtain Re lease SoftGOT GOT link function setting Operating authority obtained time SEC 0 Invalid Operating priority guaranteed time If touch the select button of the operating prior
312. pter Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT 1000 Abbreviation of GOT A900 series GOT F900 series Abbreviation of GOT 800 series Description GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE GT15 RS2T4 9P GT15 RS2T4 25P GT15 J71E71 100 GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z 2 GT15 J71GP23 SX GT15 J71GF13 T2 GT15 J61BT13 GT15 75J61BT13 Z GT15 75IF900 GT01 RS4 M GT10 9PT5S GT14 RS2T4 9P 1 A9GT QJ71LP23 GT15 75IF900 set 2 A9GT QJ71BR13 GT15 75IF900 set 3 A8GT J61BT13 GT15 75IF900 set WE Option unit Abbreviations and generic terms Printer unit Video input unit RGB input unit Video RGB input unit RGB output unit Video RGB unit Multimedia unit CF card unit CF card extension unit External I O unit Sound output unit Description GT15 PRN GT16M V4 GT15V 75V4 GT16M R2 GT15V 75R1 GT16M V4R1 GT15V 75V4R1 GT16M ROUT GT15V 75ROUT GT16M MMR GT15 CFCD GT15 CFEX CO8SET GT15 DIO GT15 DIOR GT15 SOUT 1 GT15 CFEX GT15 CFEXIF GT15 CO8CF set A 18 E Option Abbreviations and generic terms CF card Memory card Memory card adaptor Option function board Battery Protective Sheet Protective cover for oil USB environmental protection cover Stand Attachment Backlight Multi color display board Connector conversion box Emergency stop sw guard cover Memo
313. put an operator ID When the input is completed touch the Enter key DATA CONTROL 85 6 86 Operator level input Input operator level Level E eac 12 3 4 5 647 8 9 0 el i ty ft Rater vassword input Input a new password O blad _ lt gt AC DEL QITIEIRITITITITI Of New pageword ANSIDIFIG H JIRILI A RICIUI BRINN Eater pe information edit OperatorName OPO005 Operator ID 1 Level 1 Ext auth ID 123456 70000000 OK Cancel Vv Continued to next page 6 2 Various Data Control c Touch the level and then the Operator level input dialog box is displayed Input an operator level When the input is completed touch the Enter key When the level of the operator being login is changed during editing the operator information a new level is not reflected until you log out of the GOT once and log in the GOT again For changing passwords during editing touch the password The New password input dialog box is displayed and then input a password When the input is completed touch the Enter key When the password input is completed the New password input confirmation dialog box is displayed Input the same password For enabling the setting of Make a permanent password touch the check box for Make a permanent password and then the setting is switched
314. py If touch the OK button overwrites the file If touch Cancel button cancels to copy 6 2 Various Data Control 6 23 i e DATA CONTROL Completed the process Succeeded Fal led 6 When the copy is completed the dialog box of completion is displayed If touch OK button closes the dialog box g 6 Move operation Files to be used in advanced recipe are moved Data control Data control Advanced Recipe information At PROJECT1 Select drive A Built in CF card E USB drive Free space 477 OMB Drive capacity 483 0MB 7 Touch the check box of the file to be moved to select the file i al ize Date Time Ln 2 Touch the Move button ih eat 0 9KB 07 04 08 14 21 1 files are selected 0 9KB in total Number of selectable files in this folder 1 files Select all files GIPSCSY GIPSTXT Create61P Execute Cancel selection Select drive A Built in CF card E USB drive Free space 474 TMB Copy Hove Rename createrotder Del 3 Select the target folder Selecting a folder is not needed for moving PROJECT l me a directly below the drive DIR i GIP ARPOOOO1 0 9KB 07 04 08 14 21 Drive capacity 483 0MB 1 files are selected 0 9KB in total Number of selectable files in this folder 1 files Please select dest ination EE ee ee ee Contin
315. r In cut off status due to line error z z 5 Disconnect Other In cut off status due to other causes z z a Testing Line Line test being executed a a 3 Testing Pram Setup Parameter setting test being executed from master station f Auto Reconnecting Return processing being executed z automatically i 9 5 Reset in prgr gt CC Link communication unit being reset bne GOT reset status 2 2 Displays the status of the current error z i z Normal Normal status 2 Invalid TransPath Transmission path error detected Invalid Parameter Parameter error detected CRC Error Reception data error detected 3 Error Status Time Out Error Timeout error detected in data reception Abort Error Error detected in data communication Invalid station number station type TT Invalid Setup transmission speed or mode setting detected Other Abnormality Error due to some other cause detected x O LLI aE O LL l LLI 2 COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS DATA CONTROL INSTALLATION OF APPENDICES 5 1 Diagnostic Functions 5 30 5 1 9 Ethernet status check WE Ethernet status check function Ethernet status check is a function that sends a ping to check the connection status with the equipment on the Ethernet E Display operation of Ethernet status check Main menu Self check Diagnostic functions C 3 1 3 Utility Display ka If check setting Touch Self check l l Diagnostic functions Ethernet status
316. r assign z i F ce o OPA ME ANON Reng SETRA 7 ChNo RS422 485 _ ChNo Ethernet Q QO None None Extend I F Setting Extend F 1 Extend F 2 Ist ChN 5QBUSL ChNo a erho None O None h ae XY O Lu E Definition of ChNo O o Pett device a 6 fe sowee ion k E ance LL Cancel a munication sstbine Dota ssi 2 The screen switches to the detail setting screen ias Set communication parameters from this O Slot No n i STIN Communication parameter screen z Tineout Tine l Refer to the following for the setting change operation QO gt 1 3 3 Basic operation of settings change OK Cancel INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 3 2 Communication Detail Setting 3 13 1 Communication parameter setting by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 Set the communication parameters for each communication driver at Communication Settings in Controller Setting of GT Designer3 or in System Environment of GT Designer2 When change the communication parameters after downloading project data change the setting at communication detail setting of GOT lt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface eGT Designer2 Version L Screen Design Manual 3 7 Communication Interface Setting Communication setting 2 For the Ethernet multiple connection Touch the driver display BOX of the Et
317. r the details related to the password setting GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals eGT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 1 3 Utility Display 1 11 Z O k 8 Z LL gt H gt OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK DEBUG INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 1 3 2 Utility basic configuration The basic configuration of utility is as follows 1 12 Title display Close Return button Data_control 0S project info 0S_info belect dri is ind_N Size Date T A Built in CF card DIR 07 25 08 1 07 26 08 1 me i 4 4 52 04 C Flash Memory E USB drive Scroll button Install Upload Property Data check Screen 1 Title display The screen title name is displayed in title display part As the screen is composed of multiple layers the title including these layers is displayed GOT setup Operation Buzzer volume Title display Window move buzzer OFF security setting Utility call key GOT setup Operation Uti lity call key Title display Please select keys Pressing time 0 SEC 2 Close Return button When a middle screen of the layers is displayed if the XI Close return button in the right corner of screen is touched returns to the previous screen If this button is touched
318. r3 or GT Designer2 m The installation is not executed properly with the CF card or USB memory to which uploaded from the utility of GOT or copied by softwares other than GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 Note the available capacity of the CF card or USB memory The available capacity of BootOS and standard monitor OS can be confirmed by To Memory Card of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 5 E O LL Communicate with Memory Card T ep E Memory Card Write CE Core OS Write Write Data Project Data OS Special Data Boot OS Destination Memory Card D 7 eae Check GOT Type IGTI6 VG40x480 v Data can be written into the memory l Boot x 7 card O oe Oo Project Data C Built in Flash Memory v OS C Built in Flash Memory v 5 i Write Data Size O Project Data Pee lt Language of Special Data English Special ie Capacity of standard monitor OS a B C Untitled Project1 Total 0 Kbyte C Base Screen In addition to the above H C Common Settings use OKbyte GOT RAM C Communication Settings C Communication Settings with GOT IP List Standard monitor OS Write Memory Card Information C Communication driver n a roberta 0s Data Area 0 Kbyte Available space of the CF card i Intelligent module monitor data W Free Space 0 Kbyte or USB memory Q motion monitor data _ Servo amplifier monitor data Memory Card Write ad e 15 Ore OF fom O2 na ai O A we On On Wu
319. ration is completed a The operator information deletion completion dialog box is displayed process ig completed Touch the OK button and then the dialog box is closed 6 88 6 2 Various Data Control d Undo operation Restore the current operator information to the previous saved one Jperator ation management DperatorName ID Level Update dministrator P0001 1001 10 2009 08 25 P0002 1002 11 2009 08 25 P0003 1003 12 2009 08 25 Do you want to discard the unsaved operator information and restore the data to the state before editing Admin password authentication Fagevord baat lt gt aC DE Be 1 1 2009 08 25 7 Touch the Undo button The dialog box shown left is displayed and then touch the OK button The Admin password authentication screen is displayed and then input the administrator password Character types to be input can be changed with touching the following buttons A Z Alphabet capital a z Alphabet small letter 0 9 Numeric When the input is completed touch the Enter key When the administrator password is correctly input the current operator information is restored to the previous saved one 6 2 Various Data Control 6 89 l O ag _ 2 lt a lt m 6 90 e Import operation Import the operator information that is already exported to a CF card to the GOT u
320. rdware failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative 7 5 1 Installing the CoreOS Before installing the CoreOS 1 Installing procedure The CoreOS can be installed only when using a CF card Installation via USB memory USB RS 232 Ethernet is not available 2 CF card to be used CF card of 32MB or more is required 3 Boot OS When installing the CoreOS the latest BootOS is also installed automatically Operation by the user is not required 4 When installing the CoreOS When installing the CoreOS remove all the extension units installed in the extend I F For installing methods of the extension unit refer to the following Hardware 8 OPTION 7 5 CoreOS 7 11 UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING SELF CHECK DEBUG DATA CONTROL ad e 15 Oe OF om O2 na ai O A uz On On Wu e z e E m lt o zZ APPENDICES Installing the CoreOS 1 Write the CoreOS from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 to the CF card For details of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 operation refer to the following manual L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 7 COMMUNICATION WITH GOT eGT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA Communicate with Memory Card gt Memory Card write E E
321. ressing the key position Touch the time input area Touching the input area displays a keyboard Input numerical value from the keyboard If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the Operation screen If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Operation screen In the Operation screen touching the OK Cancel gt lt button restarts and operates the GOT with the changed settings 1 When the utility call key is not specified 2 The followings are the method for displaying the utility without using the utility call key a Changing the project data in GT Designer3 7 Read the project data in GT Designers 2 Set either of the followings in GT Designers e Set the utility call key in the Display Operation tab of the Environmental Setting dialog box e Seta special function switch to display the utility at the user created screen 3 Write the project data whose setting is changed to the GOT b Operating the forced start up of the utility with the GOT After powering on the GOT pressing the S MODE switch during Booting displayed on the upper left displays the utility in the screen When restricting the display of the utility set a password in GT Designers GT Designer3 Versioni Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 7 Security Setting Precautions on using the advanced alarm popup display When
322. rmal data check target file The dialog box mentioned left will be displayed Data normal after executing data check 2 Touching OK button closes the dialog box Dialog at data check abnormal Data error 6 112 6 3 OS Project Information 6 3 2 Project information E Functions of the project information The project data files stored in each drive A standard CF card B Extended memory card C built in flash memory E USB drive can be displayed by lists In addition the files can be downloaded uploaded deleted or copied etc Function Description pou pol P Designer2 Designer3 Information i Displays the kind name data size the creation date and time of the display of files file or folder and folders Delete Deletes project data o l Co Copies project data can copy between the A drive B drive E drive PY or in each drive Pronerv disol Displays the project data creation date author name and the Py SSRA version of GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 Data check Downloads the project data written in the A drive Standard CF card B drive Extended memory card E drive USB drive to C Download drive Built in flash memory Setup Uploads the project data written in the C drive Built in flash memory to the A drive Standard CF card B drive Extended USB drive Upload memory card E drive Cancels the item which is selected for the project data to be displayed Setup
323. rnnrnnrrerene 6 51 62 9 Hardcopy imona sses o aaie EE E TAa 6 68 6 2 6 Special data information cccccccccsccceccceecceeecseecceeeceeeseeeseeeeceeecueeceueceeeeauessueeseeessueseeeess 6 74 6 2 7 Operator information sisirain a ia aa EA EEEa E 6 80 6 2 8 Fingerprint information so piecncscestssdeoseenessatonsneccaednasadubeoacesisiuetvasdiieeidaaedstauseesetedssboavsancueenecened 6 97 63 el 70 21 610 01 9 002 2 6 eee nt ek te ee ene nse ee eee eee eens 6 106 OS TAU OI erect tcc neces R a E E E EE 6 106 D32 Project MOU sesa eE E EA ENEE EAE Aa 6 113 INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 7 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation 2 0 00 cceeccsececeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeseeetaees 7 2 7 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS 1 0 0 0 cece ecceseeeseeeeeeeseeeeees 7 3 7 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card or USB Memory cccceeceees 7 4 7 3 1 Installing when starting the GOT 00 00 ccccceccceeeee cece eeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseesaeeeaes 7 95 7 3 2 Installing using the data control function Utility ec ceeceeeeeeeeseeeeae esse eeseeeseeeeeeeeaees 7 7 7 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS ccceccceecseeeseeeeeeeeaees 7 9 To eS Os eer reer E ee re ee eee ee ee eee 7 11 7 0 1 WASTAIINING INE CONGO Sy csscce decay eeeseasanslacmbaneractvanscscncueaa
324. rns to the Operation screen If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Operation screen In the Operation screen touching the OK Cancel gt lt button restarts and operates the GOT with the changed settings 2 65 UTILITY FUNCTION O Z Lu N Z 2 z Lu a O an _ Zz5 40E gt Ww LIN l Q nn O aog COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK DEBUG INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 3 9 VNC R server function setting E VNC server function setting In the VNC server function setting the authorization guarantee time for the VNC server function can be set For the details of the VNC server function refer to the following K gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions l For GT For GT Function Description Setting range Designer2 Designer3 The time that the authorized equipment holds the Operating ai authorization after you operate the authorized 0 to 3600 seconds rio AE equipment can be set The unauthorized equipment lt At factory shipment 0 O j cannot obtain the authorization until the set time seconds gt ime elapses Authorization guarantee time cancel signal GS1792 b8 When the Authorization guarantee time cancel signal GS1792 b8 turns on the authorization guarantee time setting is disabled E D
325. rrect time Set the clock of GOT lt gt gt 2 1 1 Time setting When the clock has not been set the correct time is not displayed at Start Time and Current Time 3 Time displayed at Operating hours Operating hours is displayed irrespective of Start Time and Current Time When changing the clock of the GOT Operating hours does not match with the difference between Current Time and Start Time Operating hours is not the time calculated from Current Time and Start Time The time displayed at Operating hours is a reference for the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 4 Maintenance Function 2 73 2 4 4 GOT information E GOT information function GOT information is the function to display the following GOT information e Communication driver written in the GOT e Serial number e MAC address e H W version e S W version at factory shipment e Communication unit mounted on the GOT e Option unit mounted on the GOT e Capacity of the CF card mounted on A drive B drive WE Display operation of GOT information Main menu GOT setup GOT maintenance i GOT setup GOT maintenance Touch GOT information GOT information GOT setup GOT maintenance function GOT information Communication driver A QnA L QCPU L QU7 1024 Ver 05
326. rtical 000 E a ia ye N N gt Moves the Moves the Moves the captive area a captive area captive area a certain distance to the touched certain distance in the direction position in the direction Touching the Default button returns to the default status 3 When touching the Confirm button the setting contents are determined 4 Ifyou touch the X lt button without touching the Changes are discarded if vou close henni boe ee Scie on ni Confirm button the dialog box on the left is Do you want to proceed displayed 5 After completing all the items to set if you touch the gt lt button the display returns to the preview screen 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 6 The image quality color tone contrast brightness color intensity for the selected channel No can be changed UTILITY FUNCTION y Image Quality ColorTone 000 E samedi Seer pares Contrast 000 E Br ightnss 000 E F h hy h h Intensi ty 000 E sede H p D a y 3 k Z Changes the Changes the Changes the E number a number to the number a TA certain amount touched certain amount z in the direction position in the direction 2 TT A re GOT SET UP m Z lt gt lt A 7 m Touching the Default button returns to the default status When touching the Confirm button the setting contents are determined COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFA
327. ry Card format cccccceseceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 16 Display operation of memory card format 4 16 Function of the memory card format 4 16 Operating the memory card format 4 17 Memory COCK cccccccceeceeceeecceccseeceseeeesseeceeees 5 4 Display operation of memory check 0 5 4 Memory check function cccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 5 4 Memory check operation cccsccceeeeeeeneeeees 5 5 Memory information cccccecccseceeeeeeeeeseeeseeens 4 19 Memory data control cccccccseceseeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 4 10 Motion program SV43 I O 0 0 cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 27 Multimedia setting cccccscccseceseeseeceeseeeseees 2 18 Long time recording Setting cccceeeeeeees 2 24 Network Setting cccceccsecceesseeceeeeeeseseeenees 2 29 Version COMMON scetehcn start ianneeintan cies ae ceinads Nese 2 26 Video setting tii cci keds enh hccccttehontediauntaddaicacw heehee 2 21 Video Unit SettingS ccccccccseecsseeseeeeeeens 2 18 O Operation settings Settings regarding operadlo aor a a tacsmnentacataer stam 2 49 Display operation of operation setting 2 50 Operation setting functions ccecceeeee ees 2 49 Setting operation of operation ccceeees 2 51 Operator information ccccceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 6 80 OS INTOMMAU GN tees ccssadcuice
328. ry loader Memory board Panel mounted USB port extension Description GT05 MEM 16MC GT05 MEM 32MC GT05 MEM 64MC GT05 MEM 128MC GT05 MEM 256MC GT05 MEM 512MC GT05 MEM 1GC GT05 MEM 2GC GT05 MEM 4GC GT05 MEM 8GC GT05 MEM 16GC L1MEM 2GBSD L1MEM 4GBSD GT05 MEM ADPC GT16 MESB GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB GT15 QFNB16M GT15 QFNB32M GT15 QFNB48M GT11 50FNB GT15 MESB48M GT15 BAT GT11 50BAT GT16 90PSCB GT16 90PSGB GT16 90PSCW GT16 90PSGW GT16 80PSCB GT16 80PSGB GT16 80PSCW GT16 80PSGW GT16 70PSCB GT16 70PSGB GT16 70PSCW GT16 70PSGW For GT16 GT16 60PSCB GT16 60PSGB GT16 60PSCW GT16 60PSGW GT16 50PSCB GT16 50PSGB GT16 50PSCW GT16 50PSGW GT16 90PSCB 012 GT16 80PSCB 012 GT16 70PSCB 012 GT16 60PSCB 012 GT16 50PSCB 012 GT16H 60PSC GT15 90PSCB GT15 90PSGB GT15 90PSCW GT15 90PSGW GT15 80PSCB GT15 80PSGB GT15 80PSCW GT15 80PSGW For GT15 GT15 70PSCB GT15 70PSGB GT15 70PSCW GT15 70PSGW GT15 60PSCB GT15 60PSGB GT15 60PSCW GT15 60PSGW GT15 50PSCB GT15 50PSGB GT15 50PSCW GT15 50PSGW For GT14 GT14 50PSCB GT14 50PSGB GT14 50PSCW GT14 50PSGW For GT12 GT11 70PSCB GT11 65PSCB GT11 50PSCB GT11 50PSGB GT11 50PSCW GT11 50PSGW GT11H 50PSC GT10 50PSCB GT10 50PSGB GT10 50PSCW GT10 50PSGW GT10 40PSCB GT10 40PSGB GT10 40PSCW GT10 40PSGW GT10 30PSCB GT10 30PSGB GT10 30PSCW GT10 30PSGW GT10 20PSCB GT10 20PSGB GT10 20PSCW GT10 20PSGW GT05 90PCO GT05 80PCO GT05 70PCO GT05 60PCO
329. s 10 23 09 08 30 B 1 Touch switch Application switching 10 23 09 08 29 Screen switching Base 10 23 09 08 28 Switch applications 10 23 09 07 21 Switch applications 10 23 09 07 21 B 1 Touch switch Application switching 10 23 09 06 58 Screen switching Base 10 23 09 06 58 10 23 09 06 58 10 23 09 06 58 10 23 09 06 56 10 23 09 05 53 10 23 09 05 53 10 23 09 05 53 10 23 09 05 53 LevelO 1D 0 Station No switching Common Display system language Switch applications Switch applications Screen switching Base Station No switching Common Display system language Switch applications Touch the check box of the file to display the list to select the file Touching the List button displays the list In the list the following contents can be checked Display items Date Time Screen No Operation type Value after change For operation of operating switches refer to the following Date ascending descending ere a Display order switching operation Search b Search operation To display the details of an operation log touch the row for that operation log to select it The color of the row is inverted white black Touching the selected row again displays the detailed information for the operation log Touch the gt lt button to close the dialog box 6 2 Various Data Control DATA CONTROL a Display order switching operation Touch Date ascen
330. s and operates with the changed settings E Host PC Host Modem settings The following describes how to set Host PC and Host Modem When setting Host PC for PC connection type the following settings are not required Set as follows only when selecting Host Modem PC connection type Transmission Speed BPS Data Bit BIT Stop Bit BIT Parity Retry TIMES Timeout Time 5 SEC Init AT command AT amp FEORCORKORDOW2SO 1 Modem operation Init Disc Cance Item Description Setting range The connecting method to the personal computer can Host PC Host Modem be selected lt Default Host PC gt 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 PC connection type Transmission Speed Set the transmission speed for communication lt Default 115200 gt Data Bit Set the data bit for communication 7 8 lt Default 8 gt Stop Bit Set the stop bit for communication 1 2 lt Default 1 gt Set whether to check the parity for communication and Parity Odd Even None lt Default Odd gt select the format to check Retry TIMES Displays the number of retry times for communication lt Default 1 fixed gt Timeout Time SEC Displays the timeout time sec for communication lt Default 1 fixed gt English one byte characters within 255 Init AT command Set the AT command to initialize the modem characters lt Default AT amp FEO CO amp KO amp DOW2S0 1 gt Touch the Init button to initialize the
331. s displayed only for the selectable languages The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For the relation between the selectable languages and the fonts refer to the following L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 5 Specifications of Applicable Characters GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 2 3 Specifications of Applicable Characters 2 System language switching using the device The system language can be switched using the system language switching device set with GT Designers For the setting method of the system language switching device refer to the following GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 3 Language Switching Device Setting 1 3 Utility Display 1 3 1 Display operation of main menu The following three types of operation can display the main menu Display the main menu after installing the basic OS from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 to the GOT built in flash memory Z O m 8 Z LL gt a H gt 1 When project data is undownloaded If the power supply of GOT turns ON the main menu is displayed automatically after title display Main menu OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP GOT power supply ON 2 When touching menu call key If you touch the menu call key while user created screen is displayed the main menu is displayed The menu call key is set in the position on the GOT screen
332. s found by memory check the dialog box indicating the area in which the error occurred is displayed In case of error contact your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service If touch OK returns to the Memory check screen Internal Flush memory area writef read check Password error Internal Flush memory area wreitefread check Executing now Internal Flush memory area wr ite read check Mormaly completed Internal Flush memory area writef read check weite read error 5 1 Diagnostic Functions Qi 1 9 1 4 Drawing check E Drawing check function The drawing check function carries out display checks as missing bit check color check basic figure display check move check among screens E Display operation of drawing check Main menu Self check Diagnostic functions gt 1 3 Utility Display g ore DG TS Oe i ita cnt Soe ea d A A GOT main unit setup Display Touch Self check Self check Diagnostic functions Touch Drawing check Drawing check T When you want to abort When you want to continue T Drawing check Start Drawing check If touch the Drawing check of Diagnostic functions the screen for drowing check is displayed Notes on drawing check Missing bits is occurred in the following cases 1 There are parts drawn in different color with the filled color 2 There are parts of basic figure and drawing patterns which are not drawn a
333. s of the USB memory refer to the following lt 37 4 3 7 USB device status display 7 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card or USB Memory 7 3 2 Installing using the data control function Utility zZ O For details of data control function refer to the following O K gt 6 DATA CONTROL 5 Precautions on executing data control function G When execute data control function standard monitor OS has to be installed in GOT in advance Thus this E function cannot be used for the initial installation of BootOS standard monitor OS after purchasing GOT 7e Install standard monitor OS by the following two methods z5 m 1 GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 DEG 2 Installing when starting the GOT E Operation procedure 1 When installing with CF card 7 Power OFF the GOT After CF card access LED is off install the CF card in which BootOS standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the CF card interface of GOT COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING 2 Switch ON the CF card access switch of GOT 3 Display the data control function screen Utility on the GOT and install BootOS standard monitor OS from the CF card to GOT i 9 Fl M faa E USB LUI O U NE 204 72KB 4996 72KB OF i O U Upload Property Data check O LL m Touch Install D 4 CF card access LED is lit during install execution Do not pull out the CF card
334. s the function to display the following date and time e Start time of GOT e Current time of GOT e Operating hours of GOT WE Display operation of GOT start time Main menu GOT setup E 1 3 Utility Display Pee e Ie SOP GOT setup GOT maintenance GOT start time GOT setup GOT maintenance function GOT start time GOT Start Time Start Time 07 25 2008 FRI 13 57 06 Current Time 07 25 2008 FRI 14 06 46 Operating hours Oh 09m 38s 2 4 Maintenance Function GOT maintenance Touch GOT start time WE Display of GOT start time GOT setup GOT maintenance function GOT start time GOT Start Time Start Time 07 25 2008 FRI 13 57 06 Current Time 07 25 2008 FRI 14 06 46 UTILITY FUNCTION Operating hours i Oh 09m 38s O Z Lu N Z 2 z Lu a O a Zz5 IO gt Ww LIN l Q nn O aog Item Description COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING Start Ti Displays the time when the GOT was powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication art Time setting change Current Time Displays the current time Displays operating hours of the GOT The displayed operating hours is the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset restarted OS Operating hours Sa installation communication setting change When powering off or reset restarting the GOT the operating hours is cleared DEBUG To display co
335. s with the changed settings 2 If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Main Menu Cancel 1 2 3 4 When connecting to an external device which does not have clock function If set to Adjust or Broadcast for clock setting while the GOT is connected to external devices PLC or microcomputers which do not have clock function the clock data will not be adjusted Refer to the following for the list of PLC installed with clock function GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used eGT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 2 5 3 PLC CPUs with clock function Clock setting when using the multi channel function The channel No of a controller whose clock is used as a base or adjusted cannot be set by the utility The controller whose clock is used as a base or adjusted can be set by GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 For channel settings refer to the following GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used eGT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 2 5 1 Synchronizing clock data between GOT and PLC CPU Setting of clock setting and battery The connector of the GOT is not connected to the battery connector at purchase When selecting Broadcast or None in clock setting set the clock of the GOT once with connecting a battery to the GOT Operation setting by GT Designer3 or
336. sdens tarewusnuerenausteeesectinnedieiecsuuseutensniecs 2 70 Zee ROT SUA WN ego secece naan ssece dont E E EE EE 2 72 244 GOT MOE MAN OM ite croc ccnceconaaresatesdenuceotecodseteatseiencangenesectudelnedanaioeste sor enncbeadadiendemneducedsscenesntece 2 74 3 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 3 1 COMMUNICATION Setti ennenen anaa Ta a S teesuensusseuddseeuadionsobudeederenveeiee 3 1 3 1 1 Communication Setting FUNCHIONS ccc cccccceeee cece eeeeae cece eeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseueeaeeeeeeeseeess 3 1 3 1 2 Communication setting display operation ccceccceecceecceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeees 3 2 3 1 3 Communication setting contents 22 ccc ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseueseeeeseeeseeeseeeseees 3 3 3 1 4 Communication Setting operation ccccccccsseccseeceeeceecceeeceeeceeceueeceeesaeesseecueeeeeseeenseess 3 7 3 2 Communication Detail Setting ce ccecccscccececeeeceeeeeeeeceeeceeeseeesaeecaeeteueeaueceueesaeesseesageseeesaeees 3 13 3 2 1 Communication detail Setting functions ccc cccccccececeeeeaeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeaeeeees 3 13 3 2 2 Communication detail setting display operation ccc cece ceccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeaees 3 13 3 2 3 Display contents of communication detail Setting ccc cccc cece eecceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeseeeseees 3 16 O28 PINECONE A arinst ucts A A E eebeeee tees 3 20 3
337. ses however Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application provided that the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention the application is clearly defined and any special quality is not required GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows Server Windows Vista and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Pentium and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd in the United States and other countries Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners SH NA 080929ENG K GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL T1000 GT16 User s Manual Basic Utility GT16 U UTILITY E 1D7MD4 SH NA 080929ENG K 1211 MEE a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of E
338. sfies the general specifications described in this manual Not doing so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration When mounting the GOT to the control panel tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT When loading the communication unit or printer unit to the GOT fit it to the extension interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit When mounting the option function board onto the GOT connect it to the corresponding connector securely and tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause malfunction due to poor contact Overtightening can cause malfunction due to screw or unit damage When inserting a CF card into the GOT push it into the CF card interface of GOT until the CF card eject button will pop out If not properly inserted a bad connection may cause a malfunction When inserting removing a CF card into from the GOT turn the CF card access switch off in advance Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card When removing a CF card from the G
339. signer2 to the CF card may not have been completed normally Execute the writing from the GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 to the CF card again The GOT main unit is broken Please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative The CF card is defective 1 Format the CF card and re execute 2 Replace the CF card Remove the extension unit installed on the GOT The GOT type selected at Core OS write of the GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 is not correct Confirm the GOT type and perform Core OS write again Install CoreOS from the latest GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 The CF card access switch is off Turn the switch on and restart the GOT APPENDICES Zz O 2 gt LL E E E age E E Appendix1 Usage Condition of Utility Function 2 pp g y z The function which can be used differs according to the GOT type 2 When the standard monitor OS is written from GT Designer3 of an old version or GT Designer2 some functions Z may not be used gt m Writing the standard monitor OS from GT Designer3 of the latest version is recommended 46r gt W Applicable X Not applicable Not required a aT nSt Refe Item Functions overview GT16 GT15 SoftGOT GT11 a 1000 ZE Time setting Displaying and setting the clock current time Po fo o pA EAR Ow S0Z O Q Transparent Setting the channel No to be used for the DEn mode settings communication for the FA transparen
340. sition may occur as the period of use elapses When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs correct the position with this function Before adjustment After adjustment Z Run e The Run will operate though you The Stop button can be touched intended to touch the Stop button without fail W Touch panel calibration setting display operation Main menu GOT setup Operation Eg 1 3 Utility Display GOT setup l Be mre tue Touch Operation Touch panel calibration Touch panel calibration Touch panel calibration Press on the X mark to calibrate the touch panel Perform touch panel adjustment 2 58 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation W Touch panel calibration operation Touch the XI point displayed on the screen with the finger one by one to make the setting 7 Touch the center of the gt lt displayed on the Touch panel calibration upper left precisely UTILITY FUNCTION ress on the X mark to calibrate the touch panel O Z Lu N Z 2 z Lu a O O a Zz5 IO gt Ww LIN l Q nn O aog 2 Touch the point displayed on the upper right Touch panel calibration COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING Press on the X mark to calibrate the touch panel ae 1S alley O a U O 3 Touch the gt lt point displayed on the lower
341. splay and Operation Setting GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 3 8 Setting of the GOT display and operation GOT setup COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING W Utility call key display operation Main menu GOT setup Operation Eg 1 3 Utility Display O i m Lu Q GOT setup ESN Touch Operation Utility call key X O LLI E O Utility call key 7p Please select keys a Pressing time ie Z 0 SEC O lt x Q Notel Pressing time is effective only in case one point Touch buttons to set for the utility call key OK Cancel INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation 2 55 W Utility call key setting operation 2 56 Please select keys Pressing time 0 SEC Notel Pressing time is effective only in case one point Please select keys Pressing time 3 a SEC 2 3 Operation Settings Settings Regarding Operation Touch O or displayed at the 4 corners of the setting screen The button repeats O ey with every touch Set the corner to be specified as a key position to For the key position up to 1 point can be specified When the key position is not specified displaying the utility with the utility call key is not available When setting 1 point specify the time to switch to the utility in case of keeping p
342. stallation Using CF Card or USB Memory 7 5 5 The GOT restarts automatically after the installation is completed When the standard monitor OS is already installed the GOT restarts by touching the OK button Reboot 6 After confirming normal restart switch off the CF card access switch of the GOT Confirm that the card access LED is not lit and remove the CF card from the CF card interface of the GOT 2 When installing with USB memory ip Power off the GOT and install the USB memory where the BootOS standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the USB interface of the GOT The BootOS cannot be stored in the USB memory where the standard monitor OS or project data is stored Power on the GOT Power on the GOT while pressing the install switch S MODE switch on the back of the GOT 1 point press installation function The BootOS and standard monitor OS are installed in the built in flash memory The USB memory access LED is lit during the installation execution Do not pull out the USB memory or power off the GOT while the USB memory access LED is lit Now installing BootOS The GOT restarts automatically after the installation is completed When the standard monitor OS is already installed the GOT restarts by touching the OK button Reboot After confirming normal restart confirm that the USB memory access LED is not lit and remove the USB memory from the USB interface of the GOT For removing method
343. station S MANAGER Green ee oe ee operation in operation Other than normal station in operation F LOOP ERR Red IN side error No IN side error RD ss Green Receiving data Not receiving data TOKEN PASS Baton pass being executed Baton pass not executed Data link being executed DATA LINK Green Cyclic transmission Data link not executed executed Offline or hardware test self loopback test internal self Online or circuit test bein GOT RIW Green j j loopback test or station to executed station test being executed R LOOP ERR Red OUT side error No OUT side error For monochrome display it is displayed as lit or O not lit 5 1 Diagnostic Functions Blink With communication error stations or duplicated station numbers Data link being executed Cyclic transmission stopped b Loop information Displays the loop status of the CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit No Description IN Loop Sts Displays the IN side connection status of the host station Normal Rev connect Displays the station No of the IN side loopback station IN LoopBK Sta e P z No loopback station value 1 to 120 Displays the cause of the loopback No LoopBK Sta OUT cable disconnection IN LoopBK factor 3 OUT connecting a line OUT wrong cable connection op OUT Loop Sts Displays the OUT side connection status of the host station Normal Rev connect S Displays the station N
344. t DATA CONTROL Ladder data to be saved a The ladder data to be saved is used by the GOT to execute ladder monitoring The ladder data can be saved in the CF card with this function however it cannot be copied in the PC to be referred edited with GX Developer etc The name of the ladder data to be stored can be checked with the project information For how to check the name of ladder data refer to the following INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS L gt 6 3 2 WDisplay operation of project information b The ladder data saved in the built in flash memory and CF card or USB memory file name CIRDAT can be deleted by selecting Project information in OS project information of Data control L gt 6 3 2 MOperation of project information APPENDICES 4 2 Debug Setting 4 3 E Display operation of Q L QnA ladder monitor Main menu Touch Debug setting Q L QnA ladder monitor Debug Debug setting Q L QnA ladder monitor setting Data save location Automatic program read Priority comment Local device monitor Drive for device comment Comment setting Setting to save ladders A Bui lt in CF card Debug setting Q L QnA ladder monitor Select the ladder data storage location of the A Bui lt in CF ca Hide comment Save a ladder program Q L QnA ladder monitor Caution Valid only when the data storage drive is A Built in CF card or
345. t function x O Displaying the screen for cleaning the display eo i c X Video RGB Setting the video display and RGB display o9 O 6 SX O Setting Multimideia Displaying the screen for setting the multimedia ojx fx O mA setting m License l management Setting the GOT operation when a device with the Behavior of same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the lt X X duplicate IPs x network afterwards T I Switching message languages alol o O 2 G I GOT Setting the startup screen display time and screen o 6 a setup saving time Setting the backlight to ON or OFF during screen Display saving O F O Setting the battery alarm display to ON or OFF oe oO oe 4 x Z Setting the detect level detect time of human sensor O x 8 lt H Adjusting brightness and contrast oO o amp 6 xX 2 Setting the buzzer volume and window move buzzer Po fo ofo 3 Setting the key sensitivity and key reaction speed olol fo x 29 lt 6 Setting the touch detection mode O oO X 505 ZO O0 Jon Operation Setting the utility call keys olaola O 5 na own Adjusting the touch panel G O 4 PREE xX Setting the USB mouse keyboard Po fx x x O Setting the SoftGOT GOT link function Pofofx x O Setting the VNC server function ojx xix x Continued to next page N W oO O Z m Q A lt APP 1 Applicable X Not applicable Not required GT Ref Item Functions overview GT16
346. t is displayed during the update of update program Do not pull out the CF card or power OFF the GOT while the dialog box shown left is displayed Do not turn off the CF card access switch of the multimedia unit The software is not updated properly When the update of update program is completed normally the dialog box shown left is displayed When the update program is not correct or the update of update program failed the dialog box shown left is displayed After restarting the GOT apply the steps starting from step1 again 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings E Network setting The network setting is executed when the network connection is made using the Ethernet I F of the multimedia unit 1 Functions of the network setting The following settings can be made in the network setting For GT Item Description Setting range Designer2 Designer3 MAC address Displays the MAC address oe O 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 IP Displ ts the IP address isplays and sets the IP address lt Default 192 168 3 51 gt ES O UTILITY FUNCTION Displays and sets the router address of the default 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Default gateway gateway lt Default 0 0 0 0 gt O For the connection via a router the setting is required Displays and sets the subnet mask 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Subnet mask ee a O For the connection via a router the setting is required lt Default 255 255 255 0 gt 2 Displaying the ne
347. t the GOT utility are displayed Touching a menu item in the main menu will display the setting screen or following selection screen for the item In this manual with a few special exceptions explanations are given primarily using the GT1685M S screens 1 3 Utility Display 2 System message switch button This button switches the language used for the utility or system alarms E When touching the button the Select Language screen is displayed z Language x A gt English zzo Deutsch op O 2 ke i 225 axe 2 a ce w O 7 Touch the button of the language to be displayed Z Touching the OK button restarts the GOT and the language on the utility is switched to the selected one If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Main Menu When starting the GOT without selecting any language or the selected language and the installed fonts are not matched COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING The following screen will be displayed gt Touching the button of a desired language restarts the GOT and the language is switched to the selected one A NM O Lu E O m D ma H Z O O lt x QO INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 1 3 Utility Display 1 7 V1 r a 1 Selectable languages The system message switch button i
348. ta Control 4 27 9 SELF CHECK The GOT can display the screen for self checking The following describes the functions available as the self checking function a For GT For GT Item Description Reference Designer2 Designer3 Diagnostic System alarm Memory check Drawing check Font check Touch panel 5 1 functions check I O check Network unit status display Ethernet status check Batch self Various start up information System status Communication setting atch se ace contents Operation history Screen switching history Clock change 5 2 chec history System alarm history CPU error history 5 1 Diagnostic Functions The following functions can be used in diagnostic functions sae For GT For GT Item Description l Reference Designer2 Designer3 System alarm Displays error code and error message when error occurs co lo 5 1 2 Carries out write read check of the CF card or USB memory and built in Memory check flash memory 5 1 3 Password 5 9 2 0 Drawing Check Carries out missing bit check color check and drawing check ollo 5 1 4 Font check Displays the character data on the screen to check visually Clo 5 1 5 Checks whether there are no dead zone area in the Touch key minimum Touch one pane unit 5 1 6 Check 16 dots x 16 dots Carries out RS 232 connecting target confirmation and self loopback I O check 5 1 7 check Displays the LED status error information etc of the
349. ta files deleting Operation log information Special data special data folders downloading special data stored 626 information in the CF card USB memory to the C drive Built in flash memory Adding editing deleting importing exporting operator Operator information changing passwords setting the 6 27 information automatic logout time password expiration date and external authentication ID j Fingerprint Adding deleting fingerprint information 6 2 8 OS project a eet rere g g tingerp 2 information Installing or uploading OS displaying OS property OS information 6 3 1 checking OS data Project Downloading uploading deleting copying project files l displaying project file property checking project file 6 3 2 Information data 1 2 Utility Function List 1 5 Z O 8 Z LL gt H gt OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK DEBUG INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 1 3 Utility Display To display setting screens fot each utility the main menu has to be displayed first 1 x Display Transparent mode GOT maintenance ere Lean o RGB setting 1 Multimedia setting License management Behavior of duplicate IPs 08 08 2010 02 44 02 yellow icon will reboot GOT Language jn 2 Time setting Main menu The menu items that can be set a
350. tact your local distributor APP 6 INDEX A PMS COMOM coreia a A A 4 1 Addition times reSet cccccccseeeseeeseeeeeeeeaeeeaees 2 70 Addition times reset fUnction ccceceeeees 2 70 Display operation of Addition times reset 2 71 Operation of addition times reset 0 2 71 Adjusting the touch panel position Touch panel calibration setting cceeee 2 58 Alarm information wisicisindu casks secawepinasenntvandsupennteneawwrs 6 6 Alarm information operation ccccccseeeeeeeeee 6 8 Function of alarm information cccceeceees 6 6 The display operation of alarm information 6 6 B Backup restoration Setting ccccceeccceeeeeeeeeees 4 5 Drive for backup data cccccccceceseeeeeeeeaeeeaees 4 5 Drive for backup setting ccceccceeeceeeeeeeeees 4 5 Max Of backup Cata ccccccecceceseeeeeeeeaeeenees 4 5 Trigger backup setting cccecseeeseeeeeeeeeeneees 4 5 Basic operation of settings change 0 1 13 BASIS re E E E 1 1 Batch Self Check cccccccceccescceecseeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 5 32 Battery status display cccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 2 2 GOT internal battery voltage status 2 5 Behavior of duplicate IPS ccccceccseeeeeeeeeees 2 37 POOO seen eee ene ne ne en ne rare ene 1 1 7 1 Brightness contrast adjustment
351. tart lt At factory shipment Invalid gt recording without the deletion can be set 2 Displaying the long time recording settings Main Menu GOT setup GOT main unit setup ic s 1 3 Utility Display room Touch GOT setup A GOT main unit setup Touch Multimedia setting Communication setting 3 1 Communication Setting Long time recording settings Multimedia Multimedia setting menu Long time recording settings Continuous save a eae from where you Set the saving method stopped previously Invalid of the file for the long Delete old files and record a Touch new file time recording Long time Confirm recording settings 2 24 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 3 Operating the long time recording settings 7 When you touch the setting item the setting contents change Continuous save Valid Invalid UTILITY FUNCTION 2 When you touch the Confirm button the Cont inuous save setting contents are determined Valid Start recording from where you stopped previously Invalid Delete old files and record a new file Confirm O Z W N a 2 z W a O O a Zz5 LO gt Ww LIN l a Oa O aog 3 Ifyou touch the gt lt button without touching the Confirm button the dialog box on the left is displayed COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING Changes are discarded i
352. the Default button returns to the default status When touching the Confirm button the setting contents are determined If you touch the button without touching the Confirm button the dialog box on the left is displayed 6 After completing all the items to set if you touch the gt lt button the display returns to the preview screen step1 The image quality color tone contrast brightness color intensity for the selected channel No can be changed Bl o Fi Image Quality ColorTone 000 E sume F A h h h h Contrast 000 E mpa Fl s a b UTILITY FUNCTION Brightnss 000 E cape F ye 5 Changes the Changes the Changes the f number a number to the number a Cony o _Default _Confire ie certain amount touched certain amount bA j K 2 i th in the direction position in the direction O Z Lu N Z 2 z Lu o O Q _ Zz5 LO gt Ww LIN l a Na O aog SSS i a Touching the Default button returns to the default status When touching the Copy CH1 button the image quality color tone contrast brightness color intensity for the selected channel No is matched with the image quality settings for Channel No 1 CH1 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 8 When touching the Confirm button the setting contents are determined 9 If you touch the gt lt button without touching the Confirm button the dialog box on t
353. the displayed file The files other than that for operation log are not displayed on the operation log information screen X Z O oO lt m lt m SL INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Folders and files displayed Refer to the following for the details of folders and files displayed LC gt 6 1 4 Display file APPENDICES 6 2 Various Data Control 6 53 E Operation log information operation 6 54 1 Display operation of operation log information eration log information JA PROJECT 1 OPELOG KindName Date PELOG_2009073 0 2KB UT G10 OPELOG_200 07 30 09 2KB 07 30 09 PELOG_20090730 0001 8 7KB 09 02 09 PELOG_20090730 0002 1 0KB 09 02 09 PELOG_20090902 0000 0 2KB 09 02 09 B PELOG_20090730 0002 ree space 954 5MB Drive capacity 955 OMB 1 files are selected 2 0KB in_ total Nurber of selectable files in this folder 6 files Select all files 610 gt CSV 610 TXT Latest List Cancel selection Copy Move Rename CreateFolder Del 6 2 Various Data Control If touch a drive of select drive the information of the touched drive is displayed If touch a folder name the information of the touched folder is displayed If touch a folder of the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy is displayed If touch A W button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls
354. tion 6108 06 GID 1K Option 04 00 63 08 01 08 05 39 stool og Option 04 00 63 08 01 08 05 39 G10SLOG G 3K ption 04 00 63 01 08 05 39 i i Loe irk Data i Name Displays the file name IS 10SOPLG OUT 78K Option 04 00 63 08 01 08 05 39 Operation Log np A p FOSOS GID 1K Option 04 00 63 08 01 08 05 39 Size Displays the file size Operation Log Information G10S0PLG G1 23K Option 04 00 63 08 01 08 05 39 Operation Log Data g p A ore 21K Option 04 00 63 08 01 08 05 39 Displays the following items according to the ver s G10SARCP OUT 80K Option 04 00 63 08 01 08 05 39 A Advanced Recipe a file type G OSARCP 61D sacs K Option 04 00 63 08 01 08 05 39 ji nrormation G OSARP GI 23K Option 04 00 63 08 01 08 05 39 Boot BootOS vanced Recipe Dat i 3 GIOSAU OUT O C 73K Extend 04 00 63 08 01 08 05 39 Type Basic Standard monitor OS Operator authentication Extend Extended function OS Option Optional function OS Comm Communication driver Version Displays the version of BootOS and OS Date and ime Displays the date and time of the file creation 2 If touch A button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch Al button the screen scrolls up down by one screen 3 Touching XI button returns the screen to the previous screen display 5 Data check operation Carries out data check of the selected system file 7 Touch Data check button after selecting a Dialog at data check no
355. tion setting Whether to reduce incorrect inputs responses of parts Continuous key input Avoid Touchdetection other than the touched part when more than 2 points input error mode are touched simultaneously on the GOT or to prioritize lt Default O Z O response can be selected Continuous key input gt m O USB mouse Set the setting items related with USB mouse L Lu keyboard keyboard O N setting 3 2 3 7 USB mouse keyboard setting The authorization of the SoftGOT GOT link function can SoftGOT GOT be set and the exclusive authorization can be obtained 5 link function Spraleased O us Zz setting O i l O KE 2 3 8 SoftGOT GOT link function setting lt a E E 0 to 3600 seconds S VNC server The authorization guarantee time for the VNC server lt At factory shipment 0 O function setting function can be set second gt 1 Relation between the Key sensitivity setting and Key reaction speed The larger the set value in Key sensitivity is the shorter the time taken from touching the touch panel until the GOT responds becomes E g decrease the value set for Key sensitivity when double touch is made when touching the GOT screen only once Decrease the reaction speed The relation between the Key sensitivity setting and Key reaction speed is as follows INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Quick response 4 Slow response Fo 8 te te se ts oe l Key reaction speed
356. tly input the following screen is displayed Contents registered list d ingerprint ID Number of registered fingerprints i 0000004 1 1 0000005 2 2 000006 1 0000007 2 0000010 1 0000011 2 Number Item Description Displays the fingerprint ID 1 Fi int ID 1 GET PRIN Maximum number of registrations 100 Number of registered a The number of fingerprints registered in the fingerprint ID is displayed fingerprints 3 REG Key for registering a fingerprint ID 4 DEL Key for deleting a fingerprint ID DEL ALL Key for deleting all the fingerprint ID G 1 Two fingerprints can be registered for each fingerprint ID If two different fingerprints are registered for each operator the fingerprint authentication can be executed even if one of the registered fingers cannot be used due to injury etc b Operator registration screen In the Contents registered list screen touch the REG button to display the following screen perator registration ERI 1 o eee e Number Item Description The fingerprint ID is displayed or input a fingerprint ID 1 Fi int ID 1 ng Pele Numbers 1 to 7 digits 2 Select total count Select Finger 1 or Finger 2 for the fingerprint ID 6 100 6 2 Various Data Control 4 Operation of Contents registered list For logging into the GOT using the fingerprint unit the fingerprint information of
357. to driver type This section explains setting items different from the communication detail setting of the GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 For setting items other than described in this section refer to the following manual lt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 3 7 Communication Interface Setting Communication Settings Communication setting Detai setting A QnA BUS Stage No Slot No Timeout Time w For bus A QnA 3 16 3 2 Communication Detail Setting E Key word registration deletion and protection delete MELSEC FX Communication setting Detail setting MELSEC FX Transmission Speed BPS Retry 0 TIMES Timeout Time SEC Delay Time o Jms Keyword Regist Delete Clear Protect COMMUNICATION SETTING INTERFACE SETTING Z O H lt 9 Z fe O 1 Registration Register key words 1 Touching the Regist key pop up displays the keyboard for inputting a keyword 2 Input a keyword and touch the Enter key and the registration completes Up to 8 characters can be set for keyword with using A to F and 0 to 9 Keywor d Please input keyword E stration cone lition ond M All Protect 0 We Del Enter Setting PLC connected When registering keyword and 2nd keyword When registering keyword only FX CPU compatible l l 04 with 2nd key
358. tom of the YNC server function License number m pesgi Regist screen Not reg 2 Touch the Regist button to register the input license number If the gt lt button is touched without touching the Regist button the license number is not registered After a license number is registered touch the gt lt button to close the license management screen 2 eal akel J cla SBA Q9 2 Touch the Cancel reg button to release the registered license number iis airea Bicckion 2 Touch the DX button to close the license e cael Pasist _ management screen Not reg How to acquire a license number For how to acquire a license number please consult your local Mitsubishi Electric System Service center or representative 2 36 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 2 1 7 Behavior of duplicate IPs E Setting function for Behavior of duplicate IPs The GOT operation can be set when a device with the same IP address as that of the GOT is added to the network afterwards oe For GT For GT Items Description Setting range Designer2 Designer3 Maintain a network connection rec Do not maintain a network connection O lt Default Maintain a network connection rec gt UTILITY FUNCTION Behavior when a device The GOT operation can be set of the same IP address when a device with the same IP as the GOT s address address as that of the GOT is joins the
359. ton the setting contents are determined 4 Ifyou touch the gt lt button without touching the Confirm button the dialog box on the left is displayed Z LW N Z Q lt 2 zZ Q 2 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING Changes are discarded if you c lose the window before pressing Confirm Do vou want to proceed faa Lu QO 6 5 After completing all the items to set if you touch the gt lt button the display returns to Video RGB Setting o POINT p g Precautions for setting Z If the value for Horizontal or Vertical is too large RGB display may not be performed or the display may be 7 disrupted or stopped q If this happens return the settings to their default values and make settings in the range where RGB display is possible INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 2 17 2 1 5 Multimedia setting WE Video Unit Settings 1 Functions of the video unit settings The video input signal and resolution can be selected oF For GT For GT Item Description Setting range Designer2 Designer3 Input signal NTSC format PAL format lt At factory shipment NTSC gt Video Unit The input signal and resolution can be selected Resolution 640 x 480 768x576 lt At factory shipment 640 x 480 gt Settings 1 1 GT1675 VN GT1672 VN GT1662 VN GT1655 V cannot be used 2 Wh
360. ts the GOT b Setup operation Sets the project data stored in the A drive Standard CF Card B drive Extended memory card or E drive USB drive to be used in the GOT The GOT monitors using the monitor data in the A drive or B drive This item explains using the A drive Before setup operation When storing project data from GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 to CF card select A Standard CF Card B Extended memory card or E USB drive for Project Data in Boot Drive Communicate with Memory Card E Memory Card Write OQ E Core OS Write Write Data Project Data OS Special Data Boot OS Destination Memory Card D v Write Check GOT Type GT16 640x480 v Data cannot be written into the memory card since the capacity of the Boot destination memory card is short by Project Data C Built in Flash Memory v 4702Kbyte OS C Built in Flash Memory v Write Data Size Project Data 3 Kbyte Special Data C Built in Flash Memory Install the CF card or USB memory in GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card or USB memory i Hardware 8 3 2 E CF card Hardware 8 5 2 E Install USB peripheral devices C Flash Memory E USB drive 2 Touch A Standard CF Card in Select drive 19528KB 4996 72KB IFile Delete Copy Property Data check Download Upload 3 If touch the Download
361. twork setting Oo Z W N A z z Lu a an _ 225 or gt Ww LIN l Q Ona O aog Main Menu GOT setup GOT main unit setup A 1 3 Utility Display COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING ae W Touch LOO T Setup GOT main unit setup Touch Communication setting PMENUE Ee cleee rung 2 3 1 Communication Setting ir Touch lt Multimedia rf T O Network settings E LL Multimedia settings Network Multimedia MAC Address 08 00 70 82 92 23B setting menu ipctdieeee KA I p O Default Gateway 0 10 W E Touch an item to 6 S Sibret ask 55 AN change settings lt Network settings S INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings 2 29 3 Operating the network setting The following shows the setting operation of the IP address The same setting operation is applied to the default gateway and the subnet mask 7 Touch the IP address display box MAC Address 08 00 70 B2 92 3B IP Address i92 168 3 51 Default Gateway 0 oa fa fifo Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 2 The keyboard appears Enter numerical values MAC Address 08 00 70 B2 92 3B IP Address 19 168 3 51 Default Gateway 0 oa fa fo Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 5 6 7 8 9 bel lt gt OYA 2 3 4 Cancel Enter 3 When you touch the Con
362. ty Function List 1 3 Debug data Memory Displaying the available memory of the GOT 4 3 6 control information a y gt Self check Item GOT data package acquisition Supported A Partly supported x Not supported Functions overview Copying the OS special data and project data to a CF card or USB memory For GT For GT Reference Designer2 Designer3 Backup Executing the backup restoration function 4 3 2 restoration ofo i CNC data I O l Starting the CNC data I O function 4 3 4 function Memory card Formatting a CF card or USB memory 4 3 5 Memory format USB device status display SRAM control Motion program SV43 I O System alarm Memory check Drawing check Font check Diagnostic Touch panel check functions 1 2 Utility Function List I O check Network status display Ethernet status check Batch self check Displaying the status of USB device Confirming the SRAM user area usage backing up or restoring the data in the SRAM user area and initializing the SRAM user area Starting the motion program SV43 I O Displaying the system alarm Write read check of the CF card or USB memory and built in flash memory Checking the drawing Checking the font Checking the touch panel Checking the I O of RS 232 interface Displaying the network status Checking the connection status of Ethernet Executing various diagnostics colle
363. uched folder is displayed If touch a folder of the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy is displayed If touch A V button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch Aig button the screen scrolls up down by one screen Touch a check box to select the file For operation of operating switches refer to the following G1A gt CSV G1A gt TXT 3 gt 2 G1P CSV conversion operation G1P TXT conversion operation Delete 0 gt 4 Delete operation CODY ainis nis 1 5 Copy operation WOVC n se gt 6 Move operation Rename gt 7 Rename operation Create Folder lt gt gt 8 Folder create operation Create G1P gt 9 G P file create operation Execute lt gt gt 10 Record load operation to 13 Device value delete operation If touch gt lt button the screen is closed 6 2 Various Data Control UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DEBUG SELF CHECK X m za 8 lt x m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 6 18 2 G1P CSV conversion operation G1P TXT conversion operation Advanced recipe file G1P file is converted to CSV file or Unicode text file that can be displayed edited on personal co
364. ued to next page 6 2 Various Data Control 4 If touch the Exec button the dialog box Target file shown left is displayed ARPOOOG1 GIP Touch the OK button Do you want to move the file While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 When any file with the same name exists in l the destination folder the dialog box shown This folder already contains the file APPAOOO CIP left appears without starting the movement Do you want to replace the existing Touching the OK button overwrites the file fi le Modified 07 04 08 14 2 If touch the Cancel button cancels moving with this one Modi fied 07 04 08 14 08 6 When moving is completed completion Pane latad dialog box is displayed ee ae If touch the OK button closes the dialog Failed 0 box o Z O O lt lt m 6 2 Various Data Control 6 25 7 Rename operation File name to be used in advanced recipe is changed 1 Select the check box of the file to be renamed by touching trol Data_control A A Data contro dvanced Rec elect drive APROJECT1 i nd am A Built in CF card Size Date Time DIR x f fl i eg anata er eee ery E USB drive v E 3 Free space 477 OMB Drive capacity 483 0MB 1 files are selected 0 9KB in total Number _ of selectable files in this folder 1 files Select all files GIP gt CSY GIPS TXT CreateG1P Execute r i Cancel selection
365. under the brightness with the external light of 5000Lx or less e Do not pull the cable p Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module z e The fingerprint unit is a consumable product i m Check the unit for scratch damage or dirt at regular intervals and replace with new one if necessary 2 Oe e To be recognized as a fingerprint put the finger including fingertip on the fingerprint reader firmly with 55 covering the reader as shown in the following figure 2 a D Press the finger including fingertip on the fingerprint a reader firmly Put the finger on Dn the fingerprint reader oH with covering the reader zE EOS m 558 e The following shows corrective actions when the fingerprint unit operates incorrectly When the fingerprint is Dry finger Moisten the finger with breath and put the finger again registered the fingerprint reader does not light brightly even when Dirty finger Remove stains and put the finger again the finger is put on the reader O 5 When the fingerprint is The finger is not put on firmly Press the finger on the fingerprint reader firmly ir registered the fingerprint reader aa Change the registered finger to the middle finger or first remains lit brightly Thin finger finger When the fingerprint is recognized ue elena ner The unclear fingerprint image is X recognized by the fingerprint ee Change the registered fingerprint O reader unless the finger is put on g l the reader a nu
366. us Normal NG of the R loop Displays the F loopback station execution status No per Number of the station at FLoopBK Sta which loopback is executed Displays the R loopback station execution status No per Number of the station at 3 RLoopBK Sta i which loopback is executed Displays the loopback status No per Perf No per Loop normal forward loop error reverse loop error Loop Back data link not possible Perf During loopback For the GT15 J71BR13 is displayed 5 1 Diagnostic Functions c Data link information Displays the MELSECNET H communication unit data link information communication status cause of communication suspension cause of communication stop T No Item Description 5 Displays the communication status of the host E D Link in prog FData link being executed D Link Stop A ss Cyclic transmission stopped from other station D Link Stop H Cyclic transmission stopped by host B Pass exec No Area Host B W send no allocation 2 4 Com Status B Pass exec Param Err Error in host parameters z B Pass exec Param unreceived Common parameters not received 5 m T Disconnect No B Pass Station numbers duplicated cable not connected lt 6 Disconnect Line Err Cable not connected a cP Testing Testing online offline Z 5 D Reset in prgr Hardware failure Displays the cause of disabled communication transient transmission of the host gt Normal Comm Communicating normally Offli
367. utton Select Drive A Built in CF card E USB drive Displays the drive where OS and data can be copied 1 Select Drive When the memory card is not installed A Built in CF card and B Memory card are not displayed E USB drive is displayed even if the USB memory is not installed 2 Touching the button starts copying E GOT data package acquisition operation 1 Display operation of GOT data package acquisition The GOT data package acquisition copies the installed OS or data in the GOT main unit to the CF card or USB memory This item explains using the A drive 1 Touching the drive name below Select Drive inverts the touched drive name Touching the Copy button starts copying GOT s OS project data special data are copied to the CF card This CF card can be use for installation when the GOT is turned on Please select a destination and push Copy button E USB drive 4 14 4 3 Memory Data Control Example 2 The display depends on the status of copy zZ Dialog box after touching the Copy button destination and setup 2 Operate with following the displayed dialog z Copy destination box S Because of the copy destination is Boot drive Project data and setup condition can t copy After execute disable setup please execute copy operation 2 z Lu _ oig LO z5 A 5 550 3 After copying OS and data the dialog box for notifying the c
368. utton closes the dialog box 6 Rename operation An operation log file is changed gt Logging A PROJECT1 LOG0001 g in ame Ceara Be Size Date Time DI m v 0600 DECE L L0G00001_0001 12 2KB 07 30 09 13 42 E GIL L000001_0000 a B12 2KB 07 30 09 13 42 csv Los00001 0002 18 7KB 09 02 09 18 42 csv Los00001_0001 18 7KB 09 02 09 18 43 1 files are selected 512 2KB in_total folder 5 files ging formation E USB drive Free space 953 0MB Drive capacity 955 OMB Number of selectable files in this folder i ee eee ee ee ee ee BEES ee Bee eee Es ae LINE A_LOg AZO lt gt AC DEL LIXICIVIBIN N Enter The file name will be changed Current name LOGOO00 1 002 61L New name LINE A_LOG G1L Do you want to proceed Process completed 1 Touch the check box of the file to be renamed to select the file 2 If touch the Rename button displays the screen shown left then input the file name to be renamed By touching the following button input text type is changed A Z English capital 0 9 Numeric Symbol 3 Iftouch the Enter button displays the dialog box shown left 4 If touch the OK button starts renaming file While executing Processing message appears on the screen 5 When renaming is completed completion dialog box is displayed If touch the OK button closes the dialog box 6 2 Vari
369. ver assign ChNo R5232 5V supply ChNo USB 1 A 0nA L 0CPU L QJ7 1024 9 Host PC ChNo RS422 485 ChNo Ethernet 0 None None Extend I F Setting Extend F 1 nd_ F 2 Ist ChNo None ChNo None Multimedia 0 None 2nd ChNo None ChNo None 0 lone 0 None 3rd ChNo None ChNo None 0 None 0 None Definition of ChNo 0 None 5 8 External device Other connection 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection Cancel 3 1 Communication Setting 3 1 3 Communication setting contents Z O This section describes setting items and display contents for Communication Setting O 2 6 1 T a DONE 2 A 9 Communication setting Standard I F Se Assign Ethernet F Channel Dr iver assign cmo R523 pp Cho USB i eee 2 I J A 0nA L OCPU L L lt 5 AYI fiost Ply es a ChNo RS4Z2 7405 7 Chno Ethernet 5 Z Co fone AO ke E Extend I F Setting 4 2 Lu 09 Ca S25 Extend L E Extend F 2 5 CLO Ist ChNo None None z th _ Multimedia a fis AoA 2nd None 0 None 3rd O None o Definition of ChNo O None 5 8 External device Other connection 1 4 FA device connection 9 PC connection H W 79 z O lt 2 zZ Oo 2 oO z zE p u q oO ul 30 lt DL ti oE oz 1 Channel Driver assign a Assignment of communication drivers to c
370. vet wseedes ce Reeeeeieeeceeegesgad eat peecsaa cece 7 11 7 5 2 When the CoreOS cannot be installed 0 0 0 cece cece eecceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeess 7 14 APPENDICES Appendix1 Usage Condition of Utility Function 0 cc ceecceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeaeeeseeeeeeeseees Appendix2 How to Choose Dr ive ccccccccsccsscesececececeucceeescueecuecssuceeeesaueesaeesaeeceuesuesaueeseeeseeesseensagees Appendix3 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series INDEX REVISIONS WARRANTY ABOUT MANUALS The following table lists the manual relevant to GT Designer2 product Refer to each manual for any purpose V FeTalOrcl aN Felaats GT SoftGOT1000 Version2 Operating Manual GT Designer2 Version2 Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual For GOT1000 Series GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual For GOT1000 Series 1 3 GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual For GOT1000 Series 2 3 GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual For GOT1000 Series 3 3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 1 3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 2 3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 3 3 GOT1000 Series Extended Option Functions Manual GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual A 12 Packaging Stored in CD ROM Stored in CD ROM Stored in CD ROM Stored in CD ROM Stored in CD ROM Stored in CD ROM Stored in CD
371. when directly displayed from monitor screen the screen is closed and returns to monitor screen 3 Scroll button For screens in which the content does not fit on one screen page there is a right or down scroll button on the screen AMKO Scroll one line column AREV Scroll window 1 3 Utility Display 1 3 3 Basic operation of settings change E Change of setting value GOT setup Operation Z O m 8 Z LL gt H gt Buzzer volume OFF Close Return button Utility call es Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 Key reaction speed Standard 0 ms E Touch panel calibration z Touch detection mode i USB mouse keyboar d 2 a SoftGOT GOT link Select button 2 E mae Setting item Ga 3 Example Operation screen z z eime 1 Setting item select button Sus Touch the select button to change the settings JE The setting methods differ depending on the setting items 225 The following types of setting method are available a Switch the setting value Touch the button to switch the setting value as shown in ON OFF KS b Enter the setting value with a keyboard Touch the button to display a keyboard on the GOT screen gt For the keyboard operation refer to the following m 1 3 Keyboard operation c Move to another setting screen Touch the button to move to another setting screen NM O For the setting method of each setting item refer to the setting operation of each setting screen
372. when the last time the GOT is operated until when you automatically log out of the GOT can be set 1 to 60 minutes 0 is invalid Automatic logout time The authentication method can be switched Operator name password External auth general Fingerprint auth When External auth general or Fingerprint authentication is selected the check box for Operator name password is displayed Auth method Set the item for regularly changing the password to be used for Password the operator authentication 1 to 1000 days 0 is invalid expiration date When the password is out of date after setting the password the GOT requests the password change Set the initial position input byte count of external Initial position authentication ID from among the data read from the external input authentication device O to 1998 bytes Valid byte Set the valid byte count for external authentication ID 2 to 16 6 96 count input bytes 2 Display operation of function setting Main menu Data control Data control z 1 3 tility Display x 5 E ra gt OS project information Touch Data control one Data control Touch Operator Information Function setting Function setting Auth method External auth general I Enable operator name pswd authentication Automatic logout time min 1 60 0 invalid Password expiration date C o day 1 1000 0 always Ext auth ID Touch ae te A Initial position
373. which has been moved or whose name has been changed Adjust Recipe File setting of advanced recipe setting with GT Designer3 or GT Designer2 to file which has been moved or whose name has been changed After the setting has been changed download the advanced recipe setting to GOT 6 2 Various Data Control 6 37 UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DEBUG SELF CHECK X m za 8 lt x m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 6 2 3 Logging information E Function of logging information Logging files created with the logging function can be copied deleted or renamed etc Without using a personal computer you can manage logging files on the GOT For details of the logging function refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 23 LOGGING FUNCTION GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 11 3 Logging Function Function Description ey ie Reference P Designer2 Designer3 Displaying file The file folder name data size and creating date amp time are MExample of logging information display folder data displayed Logging information operation 2 ti f G1L CSV i PE G1L file of logging file is converted to CSV file VPS Cte ee ATRI CSV conversion G1L TXT conversion 2 O ti f G1L CSV ion Sa G1L file of logging file is conv
374. while inputting year month day time minutes seconds Carry out nothing when touched other than when inputting the above Close the keyboard after the input time is displayed in clock display The update of the clock display does not restart even if the keyboard is closed The update of the clock display restarts with the operation of step3 Cancel the input time and returns the time of clock display to the time at which the keyboard was displayed and close the keyboard The update of the clock display does not restart even if the keyboard is closed The update of the clock display restarts with the operation of step3 3 If touch the OK button the changed settings are reflected and the screen returns to the Main Menu If touch the Cancel button the changed settings are canceled and the screen returns to the Main Menu 3 GOT internal battery voltage status Displays battery voltage status Display Status Normal Normal Low None Low voltage When the battery voltage is low replace the battery immediately Refer to the following for battery replacement procedure Hardware 8 3 2 Installation procedure 2 1 GOT Main Unit Function Settings UTILITY FUNCTION Oo Z W N a 2 z W a O an _ zz5 40E gt Ww LIN l Q Ona O aog COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK DEBUG INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS
375. wing GiL CSV G1L TXT lt 2 Operation of G1L CSV conversion G1L TXT conversion Delete lt 3 Delete operation CODY ceeectce L 4 Copy operation MOVE cccccceeeee lt gt 5 Move operation Rename L 6 Rename operation Create Folder gt 7 Folder create operation If touch gt lt button the screen is closed 2 Operation of G1L CSV conversion G1L TXT conversion Logging file G1L file is converted to CSV file or Unicode text file that can be displayed edited on personal computer Data co ontrol Data contro JE Logging informatio D A PROJECT INLOGOOOT iis A Built in CF card Size Date Time KB C y G1L LOGO0001_0000 512 2KB 07 30 09 L CSV LOGOO00 1 0002 8 7KB 09 02 09 J CSV LOGO0001_0001 18 7KB 09 02 09 E USB drive Free space 953 0MB Drive capacity 955 OMB Fa DIRI 61 0600001000 KB 07 30 09 13 42 __ Select all files Cancel selection 1 files are selected 512 ae in total Number of selectable files in this folder iles A Built in CF card i Size Date Time E USB drive 512 2KB 07 30 09 13 42 CSV JLOGO0001 0002 18 7KB 09 02 09 18 42 a CSV LOGO0001_0001 18 7KB 09 02 09 18 43 Free space 951 6MB Drive capacity 955 OMB 5 2 2KB 07 30 09 13 42 7 g
376. witching Base 10 23 09 09 16 Switch appl ications 10 23 09 08 30 Switch appl ications 10 23 09 08 30 B 1 Touch switch Application switching 10 23 09 08 29 Screen switching Base 10 23 09 08 28 Switch appl ications 10 23 09 07 21 Switch appl ications 10 23 09 07 21 B 1 Touch switch Application switching 10 23 09 06 58 Screen switching Base 10 23 09 06 58 10 23 09 06 58 10 23 09 06 58 10 23 09 06 56 10 23 09 05 53 10 23 09 05 53 10 23 09 05 53 10 23 09 05 53 Station No switching Common Display system language Switch appl ications Switch appl ications Screen switching Base Station No switching Common Display system language Switch appl ications rogram Data Control Operation Log Information Operation Log Data List File Name A Project1 OPELOG OPELOG_20101023_0001 610 A D 2010 Date Time Screen No Operation Change To ai J 10 23 09 09 55 Switch appl ications Operation Log ES 10 23 09 Switch applications Utility A 10 23 09 2B 1 Touch switch Application switching l 10 23 09 09 51 Screen switching Base BASE_1 10 23 09 09 51 10 23 09 09 49 10 23 09 09 28 10 23 09 09 25 Switch applications Switch applications Switch applications Switch applications 10 23 09 09 25 B 1 Touch switch Application switching 10 23 09 09 22 B 1 Numerical Input 10 23 09 09 16 Screen switching Base 10 23 09 09 16 Switch applications 10 23 09 08 30 Switch application
377. word Registration condition can be selected FX CPU not Registration condition cannot be selected compatible with 2nd keyword 4 Registration condition The access restriction can be selected from Read Write Protect Write Protect and All Protect For access restriction on each setting refer to the following manual gt The User s Manual of the FX series PLC you are using 3 2 Communication Detail Setting 3 18 1 2 3 How to select a keyword protection level For equipments that are allowed to operate the FX PLC on line 3 levels of protection level can be set When performing monitoring or changing settings with any on line equipment is required set password with referring to the following a When setting keyword only Select a protection level by the initial letter of keyword All operation protect Set a keyword with initial letter of A D to F or 0 to 9 Read Incorrect write protection Set a keyword with initial letter of B Incorrect write protect Set a keyword with initial letter of C b When setting keyword and 2nd keyword Select a protection level by Registration condition Monitoring availability at each keyword protection level Device monitoring availability at each keyword protection level is shown in the following Wh istering k d and 2nd When registering keyword only D ag eae Keyword not Read registered Lem All on line Alloperation Incorrect Incorrect pros R
378. word to delete the protection Input a keyword to delete only into the keyword FX CPU not atible with 2nd keyword een We The 2nd keyword will be ignored 4 Protection Reset the keyword in which protection has been deleted to the protection status Touch the Protect key and the keyword goes to a protected status 3 2 Communication Detail Setting 3 19 UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP zZ H W 79 z O lt 2 z Oo z SE p u q oO ul 30 lt DL l of DATA CONTROL SELF CHECK DEBUG INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 3 3 Ethernet Setting 3 3 1 Ethernet setting function The contents of the Ethernet set in GT Designer3 can be checked The setting of the host station can be changed For the Ethernet setting refer to the following lt gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 and a controller used 3 3 2 Display operation of Ethernet setting Main menu Communication setting gt gt 1 3 Utility Display Touch Ethernet setting alll setting Communication setting Ethernet setting Pe eae eee l o p o e om emo om e i O o oe O oom em on O 3 20 3 3 Ethernet Setting 3 3 3 Display contents of Ethernet setting zZ O The following describes the setting items and the display contents of the Ethernet setting O Communication setting
379. x After confirming the result returns to I O check 2 Self loopback If touch Self the hardware check of RS 232 interface is carried out 1 For preparation for the self loopback communication check insert the connector for self loopback check Customer purchased shown in the diagram right in the RS 232 interface For this connector short 2 and 3 pins 7 and 8 pins and 4 and 6 pins respectively In the communication setting of the GOT utility set the channel number for the RS 232 interface to 0 None plepiay NAIK ear tees RS 232 interface 2 After selecting Self the transferred data and received data are verified through the self loopback connector RSese communication check When the GOT cannot receive the data during the data Ppor transmission the dialog box shown right appears and the The following cause GOT restarts in five seconds Connection error H N error When the dialog box shown right appears check the parameter Do o following a e Check if the pins of the connector for self loopback check are incorrectly shorted e Check if the channel number for the RS 232 interface is set to 0 None in the communication setting of the GOT utility 3 1 3 Communication setting contents e Check if the hardware has no problems gt Hardware 10 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 17 5 1 Diagnostic Functions 3 During check the dialog box shown right is displayed 4 When the
380. y file 6 2 Various Data Control 6 39 UTILITY FUNCTION OPERATION SETTINGS DISPLAY AND GOT SET UP COMMUNICATION SETTING COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DEBUG SELF CHECK X Z O oO lt m lt m INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES E Logging information operation 6 40 1 Display operation of logging information E USB drive Free space 953 OMB Drive capacity 955 OMB LOGO0001_0001 512 2KB GIL LOGOOOO1 0002 512 2 FGIL L0G00001_0000 512 2KB 07 30 09 13 42 E CSV LOGO0001 0002 8 7KB 09 02 09 18 42 CSV L0G00001_0001 18 7KB 09 02 09 18 43 1 files are selected 512 2KB in_total Number of selectable files in this folder 5 files Select all files GIL gt CSV GILSTXT Cancel selection Copy Move Rename CreateFolder Del 6 2 Various Data Control If touch a drive of select drive the information of the touched drive is displayed If touch a folder name the information of the touched folder is displayed If touch a folder of the information of the folder of the one upper hierarchy is displayed If touch A V button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch A button the screen scrolls up down by one screen Touch a check box to select the file For operation of operating switches refer to the follo
381. ying the contents of Ethernet setting changin W Ethernet setting a j A x 3 3 aha the host 26 cara System monitor Starting the system monitor ola a No Ao Ladder monitor Starting the ladder monitor eo o Da Network i Starting the network monitor monitor Z Intelligent l Sa l z z Starting the intelligent module monitor F O module monitor EOS Servo amplifier p sis Starting the servo amplifier monitor Sui 2 monitor 050 Monitor CNC monitor Starting the CNC monitor oloo screens1 FX list editor Starting the FX list editor olo 4 1 A list editor Starting the A list editor olo SFC monitor Starting the SFC monitor oloo m O Debug Ladder edit Starting the ladder edit olo MELSEC L Starting the MELSEC L troubleshooting x troubleshooting Motion SFC i x lt Starting the motion SFC monitor x O monitor T O LL Monitor Motion program 2 Starting the motion program SV43 editor x screens2 SV43 editor Q L QnA ladder Setting the data storage location for the MELSEC Q 42 1 monitor L QnA ladder monitor function ai 5 X Deb Setting the storage locations for backup data and z ebu a Backup backup settings setting the maximum number of ror gt settin a restoration backup data and setting whether to specify the q setting backup CPU No or not Setting the trigger backup KARM 4 2 3 Continued to next page INSTALLATION OF COREOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS APPENDICES 1 2 Utili
382. yte OS C Built in Flash Memory v Write Data Size Project Data 3 Kbyte Special Data C Built in Flash Memory z 6 3 OS Project Information 6 119 6 120 C Flash Memory E USB drive IFile 19528KB 499672KB Delete Copy Property Data check J Download J Upload Project data download now 7 Same named project data has already downloaded Current Target Built version 1215F f215R Built Date 106 03 01 707 28 05 Built Time 11 48 19 7714 50 50 Author f Downloading continue 7 Setup is completed Restart now 6 3 OS Project Information Install the CF card or USB memory in GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card Hardware 8 3 2 E CF card Hardware 8 5 2 Install USB peripheral devices Touch A Standard CF Card in Select drive If touch the Download button the dialog box mentioned left is displayed Touching the OK button executes downloading If any project data with the same name exists in the C drive the screen shown left is displayed without starting downloading In this case the project data of the C drive is overwritten with the project data of the A drive when downloaded Touching the Cancel button cancels the downloading When the downloading is completed the dialog box mentioned left is displayed Touching the OK button restar
383. zation is displayed Obtain Release aos authorization x O obtained state Obtaining or releasing the exclusive authorization can At GOT startup Release be executed by the GOT ae The time length from the last operation of GT 0 to 3600 seconds T Authorization N a Z bened iine SoftGOT1000 after obtaining the authorization until the At factory shipment 60 x O AES ZE GOT automatically obtains the authorization can be set seconds SyS Ze Operai The time length for keeping the authorization obtained z Y sh i after the last operation of GT SoftGOT1000 GOT with 0 to 3600 seconds 820 eed the obtained authorization can be set The unauthorized lt At factory shipment 0 x O vine equipment cannot obtain the authorization until the set seconds gt time elapses Operation When the authorization is not obtained in GT YES NO status popup SoftGOT1000 GOT whether to display or not the x O ae oo lt At GOT startup No gt 0 notification information of the authorized side in pop up can be set 2 a E Displaying the SoftGOT GOT link function setting Main menu GOT setup Operation lt gt 1 3 Utility Display O Lu T O GOT setup D Operation i l Touch SoftGOT GOT link X H SoftGOT GOT link 6 GOT setup Operation SoftGOT GOT link function setting O Operating priority obtained state lt lt Not obtained Obtain Release 2 SoftGOT GOT link function setting

GT16 User`s Manual (Basic Utility)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents